International Recipes - Global Cooking From Around The World https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 20 Jan 2026 23:24:02 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png International Recipes - Global Cooking From Around The World https://foolproofliving.com/category/international-recipes/ 32 32 Stuffed Onions with Ground Beef and Rice https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/#respond Wed, 10 Dec 2025 15:27:48 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85205 Ingredients You’ll Need If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Growing up in Türkiye, our holiday tables looked a little different than the ones we have here in the US. Kebabs were always on the menu, but whenever my mom wanted to make something special, she made these ground beef stuffed onions, or soğan dolması as we call it.

It has been years since I last made them, but seeing their recent popularity on social media made me pull out my mom’s handwritten notes and bring this recipe back to life.

Here are a few things that make this version special:

  • It has roots in Turkish cooking. There are many versions of stuffed onions across the Mediterranean and the Middle East, but the Turkish style uses pomegranate molasses to give the dish a gentle, sweet-and-tangy balance.
  • The ingredients are simple. Pomegranate molasses might sound unfamiliar, but most grocery stores now carry it. Everything else is a pantry staple, and I included plenty of substitutions so you can make it work with what you have on hand.
  • It looks impressive, but it is easier than it seems. Once you soften the onions and get the hang of rolling them, the rest of the process is surprisingly approachable and very forgiving.

If you have never made stuffed onions before, I think you will be pleasantly surprised by how doable this dish actually is.

Ingredients You’ll Need

If you’ve been following along on social media, you’ve probably seen me testing this recipe quite a bit. As I worked through each round, I learned a few things about choosing the right ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

The exact measurements are in the recipe card below, but these are the notes I kept from all that testing:

Onions: Look for onions that are firm, fresh, and heavy for their size. Yellow onions work beautifully because they naturally become sweeter as they cook, but Vidalia onions and Walla Walla onions will also work if you want an even milder flavor. Red onions are also an option, but stuffed red onions are slightly sweeter than yellow onions.

Pro tip: In the recipe card, you’ll see four medium onions. If you’re making this for the first time, go ahead and buy one extra just in case. Depending on the size, four to five onions usually give me about 20 to 22 usable layers, which is right around what you’ll need for this stuffed onion recipe.

Ground beef: Fat equals flavor, so I like using 85/15 ground beef because it stays juicy and tender. If you prefer something richer, use 80/20 ground beef. 

You can also use lamb if you like, or half lamb and half beef, which is pretty traditional. If you are looking for a lighter alternative, though not traditional, ground chicken would also work, but be aware that it would have a slightly different flavor profile.

White rice: I’m using long-grain white rice here, the everyday enriched kind that you can find in most grocery stores. 

My mom always rinsed the rice under cold water until it ran clear, so I do that too, but I know some people prefer not to wash their rice, and that’s perfectly fine.

Some people soak their rice before using it, which helps it cook a little faster, but since we are using a rather small amount, I do not think that it is necessary. 

Alternatively, medium bulgur wheat can be a good substitute for rice. It would have a distinct earthy flavor profile, but it would still be delicious.

Pomegranate molasses: Can you make it without it? You surely can. But, should you? Absolutely not, because pomegranate molasses takes these stuffed onions to another level, giving them the signature slightly sweet-and-sour taste. So, do not skip it.

Pro Tip: When shopping for it, look for a brand that uses 100% pomegranate juice and no added sugars. If you can’t find it in your local grocery stores’ Middle Eastern section, look for it online. My favorite one is this Pomegranate Molasses.

Red pepper paste: This is known as biber salçası in Turkish cooking. You can find mild or hot versions, and both work here. If you can’t find it, you can use an equal amount of tomato paste as a substitute, and it will still be delicious.

Most Middle Eastern supermarkets carry it, but if you can’t find it there, you can buy it online. I like Oncu Turkish Mild Pepper Paste, which has great depth without being overly spicy.

Spices: This part of the recipe is the most flexible, and you can get as creative as you want. I use ground cumin, dried mint, black pepper, and red pepper flakes for a little heat.

If you can’t get your hands on dried mint, you can omit using it or use a tablespoon of chopped fresh mint instead.

How to Make Stuffed Onions

If this is your first time making stuffed onions with meat, and it looks like a lot of work, let me assure you, it is not. Once you start stuffing and rolling your first couple of onions, you’ll see quickly that the whole process is actually quite simple.

Below, I am sharing every step of the process with the little things I learned from my mom and from making this Mediterranean dish over the years for my own family:

A collage of images showing the preparation of the onions to make stuffed onions.

Step 1 – Prep the onions: If there’s one part to pay a little extra attention to, it’s this step. We’re trying to separate the layers in one piece as much as we can. Even if a few tear, don’t worry, they still work just fine once they’re stuffed.

Start by cutting off both ends of each onion, peeling the outer skin, and making a single straight cut down to the center without slicing all the way through. Doing this helps the layers loosen easily after boiling. Use a sharp knife here to make it easier on yourself.

Step 2 – Boil the onions: Add the onions to a large pot of water, bring it to a boil, and let it simmer for about 15 minutes.  You don’t want them overly soft, just soft enough that they don’t rip when you start separating the layers later. 

A collage of images showing the onion layers and the beef and rice filling.

Step 3 – Let them cool and separate the layers: Spread the onions out on a plate and let them cool on the counter.

Pro Tip: It takes a while to cool down, especially the inner layers. If you are short on time, you can place them in a colander and run them under cold tap water to speed up cooling. However, it is imperative that you let them drain properly before you start stuffing and rolling them.

When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it. You should have about 20-22 onion layers in the end. 

As you peel off each layer, you’ll notice a thin membrane. If you have the time, remove it; it helps the onions cook more evenly and prevents any chewiness. But if you’re in a pinch, you can skip this step. I’ve made this dish plenty of times, leaving the membrane on, and it still turns out great.

As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the onion cores. Don’t throw them out. We’ll use them in the filling, so put them in a large bowl.

Step 4 – Mix the filling: Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C), and while it heats, make the filling. Add the ground beef, rice, red pepper paste, tomato paste, all of the spices and seasoning, pomegranate molasses, and parsley to the bowl with the chopped onion cores.

Using clean hands, give it a good mix so that everything is evenly combined. You’re looking for a mixture that feels slightly sticky and moist but holds together when you press it between your fingers. 

Step 5 – Roll each layer into a little stuffed onion (aka dolma): Place about 1 ½ tablespoons of filling inside each layer and roll it tightly.

Pro Tip: As you stuff and roll, you’ll see that the very outermost layers of the onion are longer than the inner layers. I find that stuffed onions made with these longer layers are a bit chewy, so I cut them in half. This way, all layers are roughly the same size, and every stuffed onion tastes the same after everything is baked.

Stuffed onion in a skillet with the sauce.

Step 6 – Arrange them in the pan: I am using a 3 ½-quart cast iron skillet, but a large casserole dish would also work well. 

Place the stuffed onions in a spiral, starting from the outer edge, tucking each one right up against the next.

You want them close enough to support each other without squeezing them too tightly. In my 12-inch pan, depending on the size of my onions, I can usually fit 18-22 stuffed onions in one spiral layer.

Step 7 – Make the sauce: In a measuring cup, combine olive oil, pomegranate molasses, tomato paste, red pepper paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water. Whisk until everything dissolves. 

Pour the sauce right over the onions. You can cover the pan with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.

Pro Tip: During my recipe testing, I kept thinking the sauce looked like too much. It isn’t. You need that liquid to help the onions and filling cook slowly and evenly, and most of it evaporates in the oven, leaving just the right amount behind.

Stuffed roasted before and after they are baked.

Step 8 – Bake: Place the onions in the oven, covered, for about 30 minutes to soften all the way through. Then uncover the dish and let them brown and caramelize around the edges for another 20 minutes or so.

You’ll see that the remaining liquid will be thicker and reduced almost in half.

Step 9 – Finish with fresh parsley and serve: I love adding a handful of parsley at the end to brighten the entire dish. Serve your baked stuffed onions warm, with extra sauce spooned over the top.

Expert Tips From My Mediterranean Kitchen

Stuffed roasted onions look fancy, but once you understand a few small techniques, the whole process becomes much easier (and more enjoyable).

Here are a few lessons I learned during my recipe testing, along with a few things I learned watching my mom make these when I was growing up in Türkiye.

Don’t over-boil the onions: Keep a close eye on them once they start boiling. Let them simmer just until they become soft enough to bend, usually around 15 minutes. If you cook them too long, the layers become mushy and tear easily when you try to separate them. 

Cool the onions before handling: Letting the onions cool takes some time. If you are in a pinch, you can run them under cold water to speed things up. However, it is imperative that you drain them properly before stuffing.

It is okay to cut long onion layers: The outer layers of the onion are sometimes too long for rolling. If they are, simply slice them in half. Too much onion wrapping around the filling can become chewy after baking.

You do not need extra oil: Some versions of this recipe online (especially on social media) add additional (between ¼ cup to ½ cup) olive oil to the filling. I tested this recipe both ways and did not think it was necessary, especially if you are using 85/15 ground meat.

That said, if you’re using leaner meat, feel free to add ¼ cup olive oil to keep the filling tender and moist.

Use boiling or hot tap water for the sauce: When making the sauce, it is hard to dissolve everything with cold (or even room temperature) water, so I recommend using hot water to make it easier on yourself. 

Use parchment paper or foil to cover: Most Turkish cooks use parchment paper to cover the dish. You need to cut it so it covers the entire surface and stays put. However, aluminum foil can also be used.

Ground beef stuffed onions in a skillet from the top view.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Beef stuffed onions garnished with parsley from the top view.
Print

Stuffed Onions Recipe

This Baked Ground Beef Stuffed Onions recipe is a showstopping main dish made with tender onion layers stuffed with a beef-and-rice filling. Everything bakes in a sweet-tangy pomegranate molasses sauce that caramelizes beautifully in the oven.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Cooling time (for Onions) 20 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 55 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 493kcal

Ingredients

For The Onions

  • 4 large onions ~ 2 ½ lbs
  • Salt

For The Filling

  • ½ lbs ground beef 85-15
  • ½ cup white rice rinsed under hot tap water
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon allspice
  • ½ teaspoon dried mint optional
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes Urfa or Aleppo pepper, optional
  • 1 cup chopped fresh parsley plus more for garnish

For The Sauce

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup pomegranate molasses
  • 2 tablespoons red pepper paste Use tomato paste if you can't find it
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1 ½ cups boiling water or hot tap water

Instructions

  • Cut both ends of the onion and peel them one by one. Slice halfway through to the center without cutting all the way.
  • Fill a medium-sized saucepan with water and add the onions over medium heat. Bring to a boil and simmer for 15 minutes. The leaves will soften, and separate a bit.
  • Using a slotted spoon, carefully remove the onions from the boiling water and transfer them to a plate, and let them cool.
  • When cool enough to handle, carefully remove each layer of the onion, being gentle to avoid tearing it, and discard the thin membrane as needed. As you get closer to the middle, you’ll end up with the cores of the onions. Set them aside; we’ll use them in the filling.
  • You should have about 20-22 layers of onions in the end. Set them aside.
  • Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  • While the oven is heating, make the filling. Into a mixing bowl, place ground beef, white rice, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, kosher salt, black pepper, ground cumin, allspice, dried mint, red pepper flakes, and chopped fresh parsley.
  • Chop the reserved onion cores and add them to the bowl. Give it a good mix to ensure everything is fully incorporated.
  • When it is time to stuff, fill each layer of the onion with a tablespoon of the meat filling, then roll tightly. Repeat this process for the remaining onion layers, then arrange them in a spiral pattern in a large skillet or casserole dish.
  • To make the sauce, whisk together olive oil, pomegranate molasses, red pepper paste, tomato paste, garlic, salt, and boiling water in a measuring cup until combined.
  • Carefully pour the sauce over the stuffed onions. You can cover it with foil or a large sheet of parchment paper.
  • Bake in the oven for 30 minutes, then remove the parchment paper and continue baking for an additional 20 minutes, or until onions turn golden brown.
  • Garnish with chopped parsley and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 stuffed onions, which is ideal for serving 4 adults, with each adult eating 4-5 stuffed onions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Prep the onions and the filling. Stuff and roll the onions and arrange them in a casserole or skillet. Cover tightly and keep in the fridge for up to 24 hours. When ready to cook, make the sauce and bake as directed.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container, and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 493kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 14g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 40mg | Sodium: 1353mg | Potassium: 672mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 1596IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 4mg

What to Serve With Stuffed Onions

So you’ve made your beautiful stuffed baked onions. They’re tender, aromatic, and perfectly seasoned. But what should you serve alongside them to turn this into a complete meal?

Below are a few traditional and Mediterranean-inspired pairings to help you serve them the way they’re enjoyed across Türkiye:

Pair them with a cool yogurt sauce: A creamy yogurt sauce is one of the most classic pairings to dolma-style dishes. My Yogurt Dill Sauce adds a bright, herby note with lemon and fresh dill, while my Tzatziki Sauce Recipe is a classic pairing with thick Greek yogurt, cucumber, and garlic. 

Add a refreshing salad: A crisp salad never disappoints. Turkish Shepherd Salad is a traditional go-to with juicy tomatoes, cucumbers, and herbs, especially in the summer months. If you want something a bit more herby, Tabbouleh is another option with lots of fresh herbs.

Serve with rice or pilaf: To make this a little more filling, pair your stuffed onions with a starchy side dish. If you want a Turkish side, my Bulgur Pilaf is a classic, or try my Vermicelli Rice, another staple you’ll often see served alongside dishes like this in many Mediterranean restaurants. And if you want a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa brings a fresh, zesty note without overpowering the main dish.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat 

One of the things I love most about this stuffed onion recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it tastes better the next day.  The flavors magically deepen as they sit, which makes it an ideal recipe for make-ahead dinners, holiday prep, or easy leftovers. 

Here’s how I do it:

Make Ahead: You have two make-ahead options:

  • You can prepare, stuff, and roll all the onions, arrange them in your pan, and refrigerate them unbaked, without the sauce, for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to cook, simply mix the tomato sauce, pour it over the onions, and bake as directed.
  • Alternatively, you can bake them completely a day ahead. Let them cool, cover tightly, and refrigerate. Just pop them in the oven to warm thoroughly, sprinkle with fresh herbs, and serve!

Storage: Once baked, let the stuffed onions cool completely before storing. Transfer them to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 4 days. 

Reheat: Reheat the stuffed onions in a 350°F (177°C) oven, loosely covered with parchment or foil, for 10-15 minutes, or just until warmed through. You can also microwave them if needed, but the oven keeps the texture softer and more consistent.

Freezing: Stuffed onions freeze very well. Once completely cooled, place them in an airtight container and freeze for up to 2 months. For the best texture, thaw them overnight in the refrigerator, then reheat.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe vegetarian?

Yes, you can make a vegetarian version. Simply increase the rice to 2 cups and add 3 tablespoons of extra-virgin olive oil to the filling. It is not traditional, but some cooked lentils or mushrooms can be added to the mixture to make it even more satisfying.

What if my onion layers fall apart?

This usually happens when the onions are overcooked. Boil them just until they’re soft enough to bend, but not mushy. Using firm, fresh onions also helps because the layers are sturdier.

Can I make stuffed onions ahead of time?

Yes. To do so, stuff the onions, arrange them in the baking dish, cover tightly, and refrigerate for up to 24 hours. When you’re ready to serve, simply add the sauce and bake.

Can I use brown rice?

Technically, yes, but it takes much longer to cook and stays much firmer inside the onions. For best results, stick with white rice (long-, medium-, or short-grain). If using brown rice, soak it for at least 1 hour to soften it before adding it to the filling mixture.

Can I use red or white onions?

Yes. Red, white, or yellow onions will all work for this recipe. Just make sure the onions you choose are fresh, firm, and not soft, so the layers hold up well when boiling and rolling.

How is this recipe different than Greek Stuffed Onions?

While the concept is pretty similar, the Greek version of this recipe does not use pomegranate molasses. It is also often made with ground pork, but, similar to my recipe here, ground beef and ground lamb can be good substitutes for pork.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You’ll Love

If these meat-stuffed onions made you curious to try more, I invite you to check out a few of my favorite recipes from the Mediterranean and Middle Eastern regions below:

  • If make-ahead meat dishes are your favorite, try my Greek Lamb Meatballs for an easy dinner or a quick appetizer.
  • You’ve probably seen the Doner Kebab recipe going viral on social media. It takes the century-old classic recipe and turns it into a weeknight dinner with a clever shortcut.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/stuffed-onions/feed/ 0
Viral Doner Kebab https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/#comments Wed, 03 Dec 2025 02:41:53 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85054 Ingredients You’ll Need The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from front view.

Turkish cooking has been having a moment on social media, and I love seeing it finally get the attention it deserves. First, it was the Turkish Pasta trend; now, it is this homemade doner kebab. 

These shortcuts are clever because they make dishes that have been around forever feel doable on a weeknight with ingredients most people already have. The rolling technique you see everywhere was first shared by Mezemike, and it took off for a reason.

For me, this recipe hits close to home. I grew up in Bursa, Turkiye, where the authentic version of this dish, Iskender Kebab, was invented. So even though we never made it using this method, I immediately understood why people loved it. It captures the spirit of the dish in a much more doable way without a trip to Turkiye.

My goal here is simply to walk you through this shortcut in a clear and honest way, with a few tips to help you get as close to the real thing as possible in your own kitchen.

Ingredients You’ll Need

The ingredients for this Turkish doner kebab are simple and easy to find. You can find the full list of ingredients with exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes on a few ingredients from my testing:

Doner meat ingredients:

Doner meat ingredients from the top view.

Onion: While many viral versions use only the juice, I prefer using the whole onion, as it helps tenderize the meat, keeps it moist, and adds the depth that real doner has. To get it extra fine, I blend it into a puree, along with the garlic. 

If you don’t have a food processor, a box grater would work well too. Use the large holes to grate the onion, and reserve the juices.

Ground beef: It goes without saying that fat is flavor, so it is key here. I recommend using 85/15 ground beef for the best texture and taste. The shortcut doner kebab recipe uses ground beef, but in Turkey (depending on the region), it’s usually made with lean lamb. 

If you want to get as close as possible to the real deal, use ground lamb to make a lamb doner kebab. Lamb is the classic choice for traditional Turkish doner. Or alternatively, if you want to ease into it, you can try 50% ground beef and 50% ground lamb.

Greek yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the meat and keeps it moist. I tested this recipe both with full-fat yogurt and 2%. While both work, the texture is richer with the full-fat kind.

Spices: The classic doner meat seasoning includes ground cumin, paprika, and red pepper flakes. If you want to get as close to the real thing as possible, I would also recommend adding a pinch of dried oregano.

For the vegetables: 

Roasting vegetables like tomatoes and peppers is optional, but they are the traditional accompaniment to doner kebab, whether you wrap the meat in lavash or serve it with rice.

Ingredients for the sauce and making durum.

Tomatoes: You can use any tomato variety. If using larger tomatoes, quarter them so they roast evenly and are easier to tuck into the wrap (aka dürüm) later on.

Green peppers: Any long, green pepper works here. Traditional Turkish doner shops use sivri biber, which are mild and have a thinner skin. But because I can’t find them here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. If you’re sensitive to heat and using jalapeños, I recommend removing the seeds before roasting them. 

For the Sauce:

Most versions of the viral recipe don’t include this sauce, but I can’t, in good conscience, publish this recipe on my site without sharing it with you. If you ask me, the sauce is a must, and you just need 2 ingredients.

Butter: I am using unsalted butter so I can better control the seasoning. If all you have is salted butter, simply add a little less salt to the sauce.

Tomato paste & water: Use any brand of tomato paste (domates salcasi) you like. While not traditional, I sometimes change it up and use hot/mild red pepper paste (biber salcasi) for a spicier sauce.

For Serving:

Lavash bread: The classic bread used for wrapping meat is lavash. You can make lavash at home or buy it at the store. Here in the US, my favorite brand is Joseph’s, but I also like Trader Joe’s. 

Alternatively, you can stuff the meat in Pita Bread (in its pockets) to create a similar “sandwich” feel.

Sumac Onions: Optional, but I cannot imagine serving any type of Turkish kebab without them. It takes just a few minutes to put together and is essential to make it taste authentic.

How to Make This Viral Turkish Doner Kebab

Okay, there is a reason why this shortcut doner method has taken over social media. It gives you the same tender, well-seasoned meat you’d find in Türkiye, but in a quicker way you can easily make in your own kitchen for a weeknight dinner.

Here’s how to make it:

Steps showing pureing aromatics and making the meat mixture.

Step 1 – Prep the oven and aromatics: Start by preheating your oven to 400°F (204°C). While it heats, add the onion and garlic to your food processor and blend until smooth and pureed.

Don’t strain out the liquid; that moisture is what keeps the meat juicy and helps everything bind together. 

Step 2 – Mix the meat: Transfer the onion mixture to a large bowl and add the ground beef, tomato paste, yogurt, and spices. Using your hands, mix until everything is thoroughly combined for about 1-2 minutes. It should be well mixed, so you get a bit of each flavor in every bite.

Images showing the rolling of the meat mixture to make Turkish doner kebab.

Step 3 – Divide and shape the mixture: Once the meat is mixed, divide it into three equal pieces. During my initial testing of this recipe, I divided it into 4 portions, which worked well, but I felt the rolled doner was a bit thinner than I would like after cooking. 

That said, you can do either 3 or 4 pieces. It is more a matter of personal preference.

Step 4 – Roll the meat into a sheet: Place one piece of meat in the center of a 12×16 sheet of parchment paper, then place another sheet on top. Use a rolling pin (or your hands) to gently press it into an even rectangle. You want an even layer that’s neither too thin nor too thick.

Sometimes the meat pushes out of the sides of the parchment. Don’t worry, just tuck it back in so it’s not as thin, and keep going.

Pro Tip: Some of the videos I’ve seen on social media make it look so easy to roll out to a perfect rectangle. During my testing, I learned that the shape didn’t matter. Instead, the important thing was to roll the meat evenly on the parchment paper.

Photos showing the rolling of the meat to make the viral doner kabob recipe.

Step 5 – Roll it into a log: Remove the top parchment sheet. Now, starting from the short end closest to you, roll the meat tightly (with the bottom parchment still attached).

Transfer the rolled log to a sheet pan and repeat with the remaining pieces.

Pro Tip: Watching the videos on social media, you’ll likely see people roll the meat (like you are rolling cinnamon rolls) or fold it onto itself. As long as it is evenly rolled, both methods would work.

A collage of photos showing the preparation for the veggies with the rolled doner meat.

Step 6 – Add the vegetables: Once all three logs are on the pan, add the quartered tomatoes and whole peppers to the same pan (onto the side) and drizzle them with olive oil and a little kosher salt. 

Step 7 – Bake: Bake everything for about 15-20 minutes. When it’s done, the meat should look lightly browned, and the vegetables should be softened. 

Remove the pan from the oven and let everything cool for 5 minutes or just enough that you can unroll it without burning your hands.

Showing the cooked doner meat getting unrolled and torn into big pieces.

Step 8 – Tear the meat: Unroll each piece gently, then tear the meat into strips by hand. I don’t strip them down too small, just into large chunks.

Photo showing the texture of the butter and tomato sauce.

Step 9 – Make the tomato-butter sauce: Start by melting the butter in a small saucepan. Then, stir in the tomato paste using a fork (or even a whisk). At first, it will look a bit curdled, which is normal. Once cooked for 20-30 seconds, whisk in some hot water to achieve a more sauce-like consistency.

Pro Tip: Use hot (tap) water here; cold water will make the sauce harder to combine. Let it come to a gentle boil, then take it off the heat.

Expert Tips From My Turkish Kitchen

After testing this recipe multiple times (and growing up eating the real Turkish version), I’ve learned that a few small details make all the difference between a doner that tastes flat and one that tastes like it came straight from a shop in Türkiye. Here’s what helped the most:

Warm your bread: Your wrap is only as good as your bread, and there is nothing better than warmed lavash (or pita). You can quickly warm it in the oven or on a dry skillet, or simply set it on top of the warm meat for a minute to soften (and soak up a bit of the juices on top).

Even thickness when rolling: When you’re pressing the meat between the parchment sheets, you don’t want it paper-thin. We are aiming for even thickness so it cooks properly and stays juicy. If the meat spills out the sides of the parchment, just tuck it back in. Using a rolling pin makes it easier, but your hands work just as well.

Use sturdy parchment paper: Not all parchment paper is the same. Thinner parchment becomes soggy, tears easily, and makes rolling a lot harder. A sturdier brand helps the meat keep its shape, especially if you plan to refrigerate the logs overnight. I used 12×16 parchment sheets, and they held up beautifully.

Don’t overbake it: The meat cooks surprisingly fast. About 15-20 minutes is usually the perfect amount of time, and baking it any longer can dry out the meat. It should be tender enough to tear into strips.

Also, I’ve seen people put the doner meat under the broiler after unrolling it to make it “crispy”. Personally, I did not think that it was necessary as doner is supposed to be served tender and softer than crispy.

Brush and sear the wrap: This is an optional step, but if you have a few extra minutes, for a restaurant-style finish, you can brush the outside of the lavash with a little tomato-butter sauce and sear it in a skillet for 30-60 seconds or place it in a turned-off (but still warm) oven to warm it up a bit while you are assembling the rest of the wraps.

Doner kebab meat with roasted tomatoes and peppers on the side.
Print

Viral Doner Kebab Recipe

A shortcut version of Turkish doner kebab made with ground beef and rolled in parchment paper, just like the one trending on social media. When you serve it with roasted tomatoes, peppers, and the traditional tomato-butter sauce, it comes surprisingly close to the real thing in a fraction of the time.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 483kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Doner Meat

  • 1 onion medium-sized/peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled
  • 1 lb ground beef 85/15
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 tablespoons Greek yogurt full-fat or no fat (both would work)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For The Vegetables

  • 3 tomatoes quartered / medium sized
  • 2 green peppers
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon black pepper

For The Sauce (optional)

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ¼ cup hot water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 °F (204°C).
  • Place the onion and garlic in a food processor and pulse until fully chopped/pureed. Place it in a large bowl.
  • Into that same bowl, add in the beef, tomato paste, Greek yogurt, ground cumin, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and pepper.
  • Using clean hands, mix well until thoroughly combined.
  • Divide the mixture into 3 equal pieces*.
  • Grab a large sheet of parchment paper and place one of the pieces in the middle. Place another sheet of parchment on top and, using a rolling pin (or your hands), roll it out into a rectangle. Do your best to make it as even as possible.
  • Remove the parchment paper on top. Starting from the bottom with the short side facing you, roll the meat (with the parchment paper) onto itself in 2-inch increments until complete. Transfer it to a large sheet pan.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining pieces.
  • Move the rolled meat to the side and add the tomatoes and peppers to the same sheet pan. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Transfer it to the oven and bake for 20 minutes.
  • When done, unfold the rolled meat and tear it into large pieces.
  • To make the sauce, melt the butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add the tomato paste and water and mix until combined. Cook until it comes to a boil and remove from the heat.
  • To make “durum”, lay a piece of lavash on a cutting board and spread it with a tablespoon of tomato sauce. Add a handful of meat on top, along with some roasted tomatoes and peppers, and a handful of sumac onions (if using).
  • Drizzle it with more tomato sauce and gently roll it up from the bottom, tucking the filling in as you go.
  • Repeat the same process for the remaining lavash bread and doner meat. Using a sharp knife, cut it in half and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 doner kebab wraps ideal for serving four adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storing leftovers: If you know you’ll have leftovers, I recommend storing all components of the recipe separately in airtight containers. If stored in the fridge, they should be good for up to 3-4 days.
    You can store the wraps as well, but I recommend consuming them in the next day or two. You can reheat in a low-heat (300°F) oven until warmed to your liking.
  • Some versions of this recipe divide the doner meat mixture into 4 pieces (instead of 3 as I did) for 1 pound of ground meat. During my testing, I thought the doner meat made with 4 pieces was too thin to my liking, but either way would work.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 483kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 111mg | Sodium: 1064mg | Potassium: 838mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1814IU | Vitamin C: 66mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 4mg

How To Serve Doner Kebab?

You made the doner meat, roasted the veggies, and have the most delicious, silky tomato-butter sauce ready. Now it is time to serve. And if you want the full Turkish experience, pour yourself a cold Ayran, the simple salted yogurt drink we serve with every kebab dish. 

The good news is that you have a few options:

Make A Wrap (aka dürüm): 

Photo of the durum made with doner meat.

This is how they serve it in the viral videos, and, quite honestly, this is how you would find it in Turkey if you buy it from a street vendor. It is called dürüm and is usually made by rolling the meat in lavash bread.

To assemble, place a warm piece of lavash bread on a cutting board and spread it with a generous spoonful of the tomato sauce.

Add a handful of the doner meat, some roasted peppers and tomatoes, and a spoonful of Sumac Onions. Drizzle it with a tablespoon of the tomato sauce.

Roll the lavash tightly, tucking the filling in as you go. Slice in half, then serve immediately with extra sauce on the side. 

Pro Tip: If you prefer something sturdier or don’t have lavash on hand, you can use store-bought or Homemade Pita Bread or any of your favorite flatbreads instead.

Iskender-Inspired Plate: 

I grew up in Bursa, where doner kebab is often served Iskender-style. It uses the same ingredients you already prepared, but the assembly gives it a completely different feel. 

If you want to serve your doner meat this way, place torn pieces of warm pide bread on a plate, drizzle with tomato sauce, pile the meat on top, and finish with more sauce. 

Serve it with a dollop of creamy yogurt on the side, along with the roasted peppers and tomatoes.

With Rice:

Depending on the region, especially when you eat doner kebab in a restaurant, it often comes with rice, a few French fries, and some pickles on the side. After it is assembled, the tomato sauce is poured over the meat and rice, turning it into a simple yet just as delicious meal. 

If you want to serve it that way at home, I highly recommend making my Vermicelli Rice to keep it as close to the real thing as possible.

Viral Turkish doner recipe served with sumac onions and tomato sauce from the top view.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Make ahead: You have a few great make-ahead options:

  • Prep the rolls the day before: You can fully roll the meat logs ahead of time and refrigerate them until you’re ready to bake. The only thing to keep in mind is the parchment paper. Some get soft and wet easily, so choose a good-quality one to help the logs hold their shape overnight. I like this precut parchment paper that is not only sturdy enough but also easy to roll.
  • Prep the meat mixture ahead: If you’d rather roll it fresh the next day, simply mix the meat mixture, transfer it to an airtight container, and refrigerate. This resting time allows the aromatics to mingle and develop even further.

Pro Tip – Make the sauce fresh: The tomato-butter sauce only takes a few minutes to make and tastes best when made right before serving. I do not recommend making it ahead of time for the best results.

Storage: If you know you will have leftovers, store the meat, sauce, and roasted vegetables separately. They all keep well in the fridge, in an airtight container, for 3-4 days. This helps the texture stay closer to its fresh state. 

If not, as long as stored in an airtight container, the rolls will still hold up nicely and keep well in the fridge for 1-2 days.

Freezing: You can freeze the doner meat in two easy ways:

  • Freezing raw rolled logs: Simply wrap each roll tightly in stretch film (or place it in an airtight freezer-safe container) and freeze for up to 2 months. When you’re ready to enjoy, thaw it overnight in the fridge, then bake as directed.
  • Freezing the cooked meat: After baking, tear the meat, let it cool completely, and freeze it in an airtight container or freezer bag. For the best texture, reheat it in a skillet rather than in the microwave.

Reheating: If you store the meat separately from the rest of the ingredients, you can warm it up in a skillet over medium heat with a splash of water or a little butter. I would recommend avoiding the microwave, as it tends to dry out the meat and make it chewy.

If you have leftover sauce, warm it up in a skillet and add a little warm water to thin it out.

FAQS

Can I make this with ground chicken or turkey?

Yes, you can. Just keep in mind that in this recipe, more fat equals more flavor. If you are choosing to use chicken or turkey, choose dark-meat ground chicken or dark-meat ground turkey to replicate the rich flavors doner kebab is known for.

Is this an authentic Turkish doner?

Not exactly. Traditional doner is made on a vertical spit and slowly roasted for hours. This version is a shortcut that went viral online because it captures the spirit of doner in a way that’s easy to make at home.

What’s the difference between doner, shawarma, and gyro?

All three are sliced, seasoned meats cooked on a rotating spit, but the spices and toppings vary depending on the part of the Mediterranean/Middle East they are served:
– Döner is Turkish. Compared to shawarma and gyro, it is less seasoned, usually made with beef or lamb, and served with tomato sauce, savory yogurt, and grilled vegetables.
– Shawarma (Middle Eastern) is heavily spiced with ground turmeric, clove, cinnamon, and cardamom. It is traditionally made with chicken and beef.
– Gyro (Greek) includes dried oregano, garlic, and Mediterranean herbs, and is typically served with tzatziki. It is usually made with chicken or beef.

Can I make this without parchment paper?

I don’t recommend it. The parchment is what helps the meat hold its shape as it bakes. Without it, the logs won’t roll tightly, and the meat can spread or fall apart.

Can I make this in the air fryer?

Yes, just make sure the rolls fit inside your air fryer basket. Cook them at 400°F (204°C) for about 15 minutes. Be sure to check it around the 12th-minute mark, as air fryers tend to cook faster than ovens.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Turkish Recipes You Might Also Like

If you enjoyed this homemade doner kebab recipe, here are a few more Turkish recipes I think you’ll love:

  • If you’re craving something bold and spicy, my Adana Kebab is as close to the authentic version as you can get at home. It’s the traditional lamb kebab I grew up eating, and this homemade version still captures the rich, smoky flavor of the original.
  • For a comforting and simple weeknight dinner, my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant is a classic. The roasted eggplant with the garlicky tomato-beef filling makes it one of the most iconic dishes in Turkish cuisine.
  • And if you want something quick and nostalgic, try my Turkish Meatballs. Made with just a couple of simple ingredients, they’re the meatballs I grew up eating in Turkey.


This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/doner-kebab/feed/ 14
Chicken Kofta https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/#comments Tue, 02 Sep 2025 13:35:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83148 I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them…]]>

I kept her tricks in my own version so you can enjoy juicy, reliable patties year-round. You can grill them outside in summer, roast them on a sheet pan with veggies, or cook them quickly on the stovetop or even in your air fryer.

Grilled chicken kofta served with hummus, sliced onions and tomatoes.

Ingredients for the Juiciest Chicken Kofta

Having grown up eating this dish and after making it countless times, I’ve learned a few helpful things about the key ingredients. You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below, but here are some highlights, including substitutions:

Ingredients for the recipe from  the top view with the name of the ingredients.

Onion: Both white and yellow onions work. My mom always grated the onion so it blended evenly into the mixture. Be sure to drain the liquid, as grated onions release a significant amount of juice. Red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Ground chicken: I prefer to use organic chicken when available. Ground chicken made with dark meat adds more richness, but lean ground chicken breast also works if you prefer a lighter option.

Panko breadcrumbs: I usually reach for panko, but regular or seasoned breadcrumbs will also work. For a gluten-free option, use gluten-free breadcrumbs. Half a cup is the sweet spot. Any less and the mixture feels loose, any more and it turns too dense.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: Mince them as finely as you can. Garlic powder works in a pinch, but fresh garlic makes a big difference here.

Baking soda: This is our secret ingredient and one of my mom’s little tricks. A small amount of baking soda alters the pH of the meat, allowing the proteins to bind less tightly, which helps koftas remain tender while retaining their shape. And in case you are wondering, you won’t taste the baking soda in your cooked chicken koftas.

Egg: The egg works as a binder, which is especially helpful with lean ground chicken. Some recipes skip it, but I’ve tested it both ways and find that adding one keeps the patties from falling apart. If you prefer not to use it, the kofta will still work, though they may be a little more delicate when cooking.

Spices & Seasonings: I opted for ground cumin, sweet paprika, kosher salt, and black pepper, but adding ground coriander would also be a great option. If you want some heat, Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes are great options. Start with a small amount and adjust to taste.

Herbs: I opted for fresh Italian parsley, but any fresh herbs, such as mint or dill, work beautifully.

Optional Add-Ins:

Tomato paste: You can add up to 1 tablespoon to the mixture to add moisture and a pop of color. Red pepper paste also works, but it will slightly change the flavor.

Cheese: Both grated Parmesan cheese and low-moisture mozzarella work well here, about ¼ cup. Parmesan adds a savory umami boost, but it is salty, so be mindful of the salt in the rest of the recipe.

How to Make Chicken Kofta: Step-by-Step Instructions

Person showing how to grate an onion using a box grater.

Step 1 – Prep the onion: Set a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and grab your box grater. Using the large holes, grate the onion and place it right into the strainer. Then, using the back of a spoon, press it down to squeeze out as much juice as you can. 

It may feel like extra work, but draining the onion is key for kofta that hold their shape. If you prefer, you can chop the onion instead, but it won’t blend as seamlessly into the mixture.

Ground chicken kofta mixture in a bowl before and after it is mixed.

Step 2 – Mix everything together: Transfer the grated onion to a large mixing bowl, then add the ground chicken, panko breadcrumbs, garlic, baking soda, cumin, paprika, egg, salt, black pepper, red pepper flakes, and parsley. 

I like to mix it with my hands, gently working it until just combined. This helps you feel when everything is evenly distributed and prevents overmixing, which can make the patties too dense.

A collage of images showing the shaping of the meatballs and grilling them.

Step 3 – Shape the kofta: Pour a little olive oil (or water) into a small bowl to keep nearby. Scoop about two tablespoons of the mixture, or use a cookie scoop so you’ll get even chicken kofta meatballs. 

Lightly oil your hands, and roll and press them into oval-shaped patties. Dip your hands in olive oil as needed to prevent the mixture from sticking to your hands and to help you form smooth, even patties.

Pro Tip: Traditionally, ground chicken koftas are shaped into oval patties, which is how my mom used to make them. You can also roll them into meatballs, flatten them slightly, or even press them onto skewers to make chicken kofta kebabs. Just remember that different shapes may cook a little faster or slower.

Step 4 – Let them rest: Place the shaped kofta on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them sit at room temperature for 10-15 minutes while you heat up your grill, skillet, or oven. This quick rest helps them hold their shape when you cook them. If you are prepping ahead, you can refrigerate them instead.

How To Cook Chicken Kofta

My favorite way to cook chicken kofta is on the grill for those beautiful char marks, but I know that is not always possible. The good news is that they also turn out delicious when cooked in the oven or on the stovetop. Below are the steps for each method:

On The Grill

Step 1 – Preheat and prep the grill: Heat to medium-high and clean the grates thoroughly. A hot, oiled surface keeps the patties from sticking and gives them good grill marks.

Step 2 – Grill the Kofta: Place the patties on the grill and cook for 2 to 3 minutes per side, turning them over to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Check for doneness: Use an instant-read thermometer and remove the kofta as soon as the center reaches 165°F (74°C). Pulling them off at exactly the right temperature keeps them juicy and tender.

In The Oven

Step 1 – Preheat the oven: Set your oven to 375°F and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. The parchment not only makes cleanup easier, but it also helps prevent the bottoms of the kofta from sticking or over-browning.

Step 2 – Arrange and Bake: Place the patties in a single layer, leaving some space between each one to allow hot air to circulate. Bake for about 15 minutes, flipping halfway through for even cooking.

Step 3 – Avoid overbaking: Start checking the temperature at the 14-minute mark. Chicken cooks quickly in the oven, and once it reaches an internal temperature of 165°F (74°C), it can dry out rapidly.

On The Stove Top

Step 1 – Heat the skillet: A cast-iron pan works best because it retains heat evenly and provides a good sear for the kofta. Add a tablespoon of olive oil and heat until it begins to shimmer. A hot pan sears the outside quickly, helping to lock in the juices.

Step 2 – Cook the kofta: Place the patties in the skillet and cook 2-3 minutes per side, keeping total cook time under 8 minutes. Medium-high heat gives you golden outsides while keeping the inside tender.

Step 3 – Cook in batches if needed: Avoid overcrowding the pan, as this will lower the temperature and cause the kofta to steam instead of sear. Cooking in two batches is worth it for the better browning and flavor. Check for 165°F (74°C) in the center before serving, so you know they are cooked perfectly.

In the Air Fryer

Step 1 – Preheat: Set your air fryer to 375°F (191 °C) and lightly spray or brush the basket with olive oil to prevent sticking.

Step 2 – Arrange: Lay your chicken koftas in a single layer, leaving a small amount of space between each one to ensure even cooking.

Step 3 – Cook: Air fry for about 12 minutes, flipping them halfway through. They’re ready when the centers reach 165°F (74 °C) on a meat thermometer or when they’re nicely golden on the outside.

How To Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat

Chicken kofta is a great make-ahead recipe, whether you’re planning for a busy weeknight or stocking the freezer for later. You can prepare the mixture ahead of time, store leftovers after cooking, or freeze them raw or cooked. Here’s how I handle it:

Make Ahead: Shape the koftas, place them on a baking sheet, wrap with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for up to 24 hours. 

Storing Leftovers: You can enjoy them warm or cold. If you’re eating them cold, just let them come to room temperature so they’re not fridge-cold. Store them in an airtight container and they’ll keep in the fridge for 3 to 4 days.

Reheat: My favorite way to reheat is on the stove with just a splash of water in the pan. The steam from the water gently warms the kofta, keeping them from drying out. 

You can also pop them in a 300°F (149°C) oven for 5-10 minutes or until they are heated through. 

Freeze (raw or cooked): You can freeze them raw or cooked. Below is how I do it.

  • Raw: Place the shaped ground chicken kofta on a parchment-lined sheet pan, cover with plastic wrap, and freeze for a couple of hours until firm. Then move them into a freezer bag so they don’t take up much space. They should last up to 3 months this way. When you’re ready to cook, thaw them overnight in the fridge.
  • Cooked: Store in a freezer-safe container, pressing out as much air as you can to prevent freezer burn. They’ll keep for up to 3 months. Thaw them in the fridge overnight.
Grilled chicken koftas on a plate served with lemon wedges.

Expert Tips

Even though making this chicken kofta recipe is simple, a few small details can make all the difference in how tender, juicy, and perfectly cooked they turn out. Below are my notes from years of making this recipe, along with what I learned from testing various methods.

  • Do not overmix the mixture: Overmixing the meat compresses the protein fibers and squeezes out some of the natural moisture. This is what can make the cooked chicken koftas feel dense instead of soft and tender. I like to mix just until all the ingredients are evenly combined. 
  • Wet your hands when shaping:  Be aware that the meat mixture is very sticky. To make shaping easier, I keep a small bowl of olive oil (or water) nearby and dip my hands in it to keep them moist. A small amount of liquid makes the mixture glide smoothly, resulting in even, smooth patties.
  • Avoid cooking straight from the fridge: If you’ve prepped the mixture ahead of time and stored it in the fridge, let it sit at room temperature for 20-30 minutes before cooking. Starting with ice-cold meat can cause the kofta to cook unevenly. Allowing it to come closer to room temperature helps them cook more evenly and stay juicy.

Serving Suggestions for Chicken Kofta

If you’re wondering what to serve with chicken kofta, the good news is that it’s one of the most versatile dishes I make. You can build it into a wrap, pair it with grains, or add it to a mezze platter for entertaining. Here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

  • Wraps: My favorite way to serve kofta chicken is tucked into Homemade Pita Bread or wrapped in soft Lavash Bread, with fresh veggies, and drizzled generously with one of my creamy yogurt sauces, such as Mint Yogurt Sauce or Yogurt Dill Sauce. It’s quick, satisfying, and makes the perfect grab-and-go meal.
  • Salad: A simple crisp salad balances the warm spices in the kofta beautifully. Try my Mediterranean Pasta Salad for a crowd-pleasing, make-ahead option, or keep it light with a fresh green salad, such as my Spring Mix Salad or Fattoush.
  • Sheet Pan Kofta: For a hands-off option, make a sheet pan chicken kofta dinner by roasting the chicken koftas in the oven with quick-cooking vegetables like onions, bell peppers, and cherry tomatoes. Everything comes out ready at the same time, making it ideal for busy weeknights. 
  • Mezze Platter: Add these Turkish chicken meatballs to a mezze platter alongside Hummus, Tzatziki, and CAVA’s Feta Sauce, then add some warm bread and a few marinated olives. It’s the easiest way to make dinner feel like a little Mediterranean feast. If you prefer ground beef, my Turkish Meatballs are another great option for a mezze spread.
  • Grains: For a more filling plate, serve the kofta over Vermicelli Rice or Seasoned Quinoa. A spoonful of yogurt sauce ties everything together.

FAQs

What is the difference between kebab and kofta?

The biggest difference lies in how the meat is prepared and cooked. In Turkey, we call it chicken kofte. It is made from ground meat mixed with spices and herbs, then shaped into logs, patties, or little meatballs. If you shape it into long cylinders and wrap them around skewers, you get chicken kofta kebab. Kebab, on the other hand, is more about the cooking style and typically refers to chunks of meat, sometimes accompanied by vegetables, grilled on skewers.

Why did my kofta fall apart?

The most common reasons are either too much moisture or not enough binding. Be sure to squeeze out as much juice as possible from the onion before adding it to the mixture. Additionally, letting the shaped kofta rest for 10-15 minutes before cooking also helps them stay together.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mediterranean Chicken Dinners You Might Like

If you enjoyed this chicken kofta recipe, here are a few other Mediterranean chicken dinners to add to your weeknight rotation:

  • For a customizable meal prep-friendly dinner, my Chicken Shawarma Bowl is a great choice. It is a great dinner you can make ahead and enjoy during the week.
  • If you love a mix of savory, spicy, and sweet, my Harissa Honey Chicken is always a hit. All you need is 30 minutes of marinating time.
  • For a hands-on Mediterranean chicken recipe, try cooking Chicken Kabobs in the Oven.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Grilled chicken kofta in a platter from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kofta Recipe

Juicy, tender chicken kofta comes together in less than an hour with simple ingredients. Grill, bake, or pan-sear these seasoned patties and serve with warm bread, crisp salads, or your favorite sides for a delicious Mediterranean dinner.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 minutes
Resting time 15 minutes
Total Time 36 minutes
Servings 10 koftas
Calories 103kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 onion medium-size / peeled (about ½ cup)
  • 1 lb ground chicken
  • ½ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • 1 egg
  • 1 ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • ¼ cup fresh Italian parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil to use when shaping the kofta (or water)

Instructions

  • Place a fine mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside. Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the onion*. Place the grated onion into the strainer. Using the back of a spoon, strain all of its juices. Transfer the onion to a large mixing bowl. Discard the juices.
    Person grating onion and then straining its juices.
  • Into that same bowl, add 1 lb ground chicken, ½ cup of panko breadcrumbs, 2 cloves of minced garlic, ¼ teaspoon of baking soda, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of sweet paprika, 1 large egg, 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt, ½ teaspoon of black pepper, ¼ teaspoon of red pepper flakes, and ¼ of chopped fresh parsley.
    A collage of images showing the making of the chicken kofta mixture.
  • Mix with clean hands until well combined.
  • Pour the olive oil into a small bowl. To shape the kofta, scoop about 2 tablespoons of the mixture, oil your hands lightly, and form into 10 oval patties (or your preferred shape). A cookie scoop works well for even portions.
    Person shaping chicken koftas and grilling them.
  • Arrange the koftas on a platter, cover with plastic wrap, and let them rest at room temperature for 10-15 minutes before cooking.

Cooking On The Grill

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat. Clean the grates, then oil them using a paper towel dipped in oil.
  • Grill the kofta for 2-3 minutes for each side, turning often, until lightly golden brown and cooked through. They’re ready when an instant-read thermometer inserted into the center registers 165°F.
  • Transfer to a plate and let rest for 5-10 minutes before serving.

In The Oven

  • Preheat your oven to 375 °F (191°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Arrange the chicken koftas on the baking sheet and bake for 15 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process for even baking.

On The Stove top

  • Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a cast-iron skillet (or a large non-stick skillet) over medium high heat until shimmering.
  • Place the patties in the skillet, and cook undisturbed, for 2-3 minutes or until lightly golden brown. Continue to cook each side, turning every 2-3 minutes. It should take no more than 8 minutes to cook.*

In The Air Fryer

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 °F (191°C). Lightly spray (or brush) it with oil.
  • Arrange the koftas in a single layer, leaving enough room between each patty for air to circulate.
  • Air fry for 12-13 minutes, turning them halfway through, until the center of a chicken kofta registers 165°F (74 °C) when inserted with a meat thermometer.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 10 chicken koftas. The nutritional values listed below are per kofta.
  • Grating the onion: I know that grating the onion is the most time-consuming part of this recipe, and I think it is worth the effort, as it allows the onion to blend seamlessly into the meat mixture. However, if you prefer, you can chop your onion finely. Be sure to remove any juices (if present) before use.
  • Baking soda: The small amount of baking soda helps keep the koftas hold their shape. In case you are wondering, no, you won’t taste it in the finished dish.
  • Do not overcrowd the pan*: When cooking on the stove, it is best to cook your koftas in batches to achieve a good crust. If you cook them all at the same time, koftas will steam instead of sear.
  • Storing leftovers: Once your chicken patties come to room temperature, you can place them in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 4 days. You can enjoy them cold or warm. 

Nutrition

Calories: 103kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 55mg | Sodium: 434mg | Potassium: 286mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 267IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kofta/feed/ 2
Turkish Shepherd Salad https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83027 What is Shepherd Salad? If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would…]]>

What is Shepherd Salad?

If there were such a thing as the easiest salad in the world, Shepherd Salad would probably top the list. 

The name may sound a little unusual, but it comes from humble origins. In the countryside of Turkey, shepherds carried simple, inexpensive ingredients like tomatoes, cucumbers, onions, and peppers. Out in the fields, they would quickly chop everything and dress it with olive oil and lemon juice for a fresh, no-cook meal.

Shepherd salad in a bowl with spoons on the side.

Because these were the kinds of ingredients that were affordable and easy to find, Shepherd Salad has always been considered a simple, everyday dish rather than a luxury.

Today, Çoban Salatası remains a staple across Turkey and the Eastern Mediterranean. While it shares some similarities with Greek Salad, Shepherd Salad does not usually include cheese or olives, keeping it lighter and more refreshing. 

I left Turkey over 20 years ago, but to this day, I still make this salad almost daily when summer produce is at its peak. It’s one of those recipes that instantly brings me back home.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need 

You’ll only need a handful of fresh vegetables and pantry staples to make this easy summer salad. You can find the full ingredient list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my experience and from how it is traditionally made in Turkey:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.

Tomatoes: Use the ripest, juiciest tomatoes you can find. Heirloom, Roma, cherry, or even steak tomatoes all work well.

Cucumbers: The authentic Turkish shepherd salad recipe uses Persian cucumbers, which are crunchy and with fewer seeds compared to English cucumbers. However, both types can be used in this recipe. If your cucumbers are freshly picked, it is not necessary to peel them, but I recommend tasting them, as older cucumbers may have bitter skin.

Scallions: I opted for scallions (also known as green onions) for their mild flavor, but finely chopped red onion or white onion can be used if you prefer a sharper bite. If you’re using green onions, you can use both the white parts and the green parts.

Green peppers: Traditionally, this salad is made with a Turkish pepper called sivri biber, a long, slender pepper that can range from mild to hot. Since I can’t find it here in the US, I usually use Anaheim peppers or jalapeños. For a milder option, a green bell pepper works as well.

Lemon juice: For the best taste, use freshly squeezed lemon juice, but in a pinch, bottled juice would also work. You can also swap it with white wine vinegar, apple cider vinegar or red wine vinegar for a slightly different tang.

Olive oil: I recommend using a mild-flavored extra virgin olive oil.

Sumac powder: Sumac is usually available in the Middle Eastern or Mediterranean section of most grocery stores, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. I often buy mine online, and if you are new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul Sumac Spice.

Just be sure to check the best-by date, as sumac has a shorter shelf life than many other spices (usually around 6 months).

Fresh herbs: I use fresh flat-leaf parsley in this recipe, but you can easily switch it up with whatever herbs you have on hand. In Turkey, it is very common to add fresh mint, fresh dill, or even a mix of the two.

Optional Add-Ins (Modern Variations):

The traditional Shepherd’s Salad is made with just the basics, but you can easily make it your own with a few optional add-ins. Some of my favorites are:

Olives: A handful of olives is a delicious way to make this salad more substantial and filling. In Turkey, we often use briny, firm varieties like Gemlik olives, but Kalamata and black olives work as well. Any olives you enjoy, even simple green olives, will do the trick.

Feta cheese: For the best taste and creamy texture, choose a good-quality feta made from sheep’s or cow’s milk and stored in brine. 

Dried mint: In some parts of Turkey, a small pinch of dried mint is sprinkled over the salad for more of an earthy flavor. It is not used in every version, but it is a traditional touch that pairs well with the sumac.

Urfa Chile or Aleppo Pepper: For a little heat, you can also sprinkle in some Urfa Chile pepper, Aleppo pepper, or any red pepper flakes you have on hand. For the most authentic result, aim for a variety that isn’t too spicy so the fresh flavors of the salad can really shine.

How to Make Turkish Shepherd Salad (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Shepherd’s Salad couldn’t be simpler. You don’t need any special equipment; just a sharp knife, a cutting board, and a bowl. Here’s how to prepare it:

A collage of images showing the assembling of shepherd's salad.

Step 1 – Chop the vegetables: One of the hallmarks of this salad is that everything is cut into small, even pieces. This way, every bite has a little bit of everything. Dice the tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and peppers, then transfer them to a large bowl.

Step 2 – Add the dressing: Drizzle the vegetables with lemon juice and olive oil. Sprinkle with sumac, salt, and black pepper.

A collage of images showing the mixing of Turkish tomato and cucumber salad.

Step 3 – Finish with herbs: Add the chopped parsley on top. Using salad tongs (or clean hands), gently toss until the vegetables are evenly coated. Tossing gently is key, as it helps keep the tomatoes from getting mushy.

Step 4 – Serve: Enjoy right away while the vegetables are crisp and fresh. Shepherd’s Salad is best served immediately, since the salt and lemon juice draw water out of the vegetables, and the salad can become watery if it sits too long.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: You can chop the vegetables a few hours in advance and store them covered in the refrigerator. For the best texture, wait to add the dressing until just before serving to keep the vegetables crisp and prevent too much liquid from collecting in the bowl.

Storing Leftovers: Place any leftovers in an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 2 days. Keep in mind that the vegetables will naturally release some liquid as they sit, which will make the salad softer the next day. If that happens, just give it a quick toss and, if needed, add a squeeze of fresh lemon juice to brighten it back up.

Freezing: Freezing is not recommended since the vegetables lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the freshest taste and crunch, enjoy this salad right away.

Expert Tips:

While Shepherd’s Salad is simple to make, a few small details can take it from good to truly authentic. Here are my best tips:

  • Use fresh ingredients: This salad depends on peak-season produce. Ripe, juicy tomatoes and crisp cucumbers make all the difference. If your vegetables aren’t in season, sprinkle them with a pinch of salt and let them sit for a few minutes to bring out their natural juices.
  • Finely chop the vegetables: The traditional way in Turkey is to cut everything into small, even pieces. This will give you a mix of everything in each bite, and it will also ensure the lemon and olive oil coat everything evenly.
  • Season just before serving: Salt and lemon juice draw liquid out of the vegetables, especially tomatoes. So to keep the salad crisp, add the dressing and seasonings right before you bring it to the table.
  • Mix gently: Toss the salad lightly with your hands or salad tongs so the tomatoes don’t break down and become mushy.
  • Keep it chilled: Shepherd’s Salad is especially refreshing when served slightly cold. If you prep the vegetables ahead, store them in the fridge and dress just before serving.

Delicious Ways to Serve Turkish Shepherd Salad:

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish tomato and cucumber salad. While you can enjoy it with nearly any meal, here are some of my favorite ways to serve it:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish shepherd salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Turkish Shepherd Salad Recipe

An authentic Turkish Shepherd Salad (Çoban Salatası) made with juicy tomatoes, crisp cucumbers, peppers, onions, and parsley. Light, refreshing, and ready in just 15 minutes.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 119kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 medium-sized tomatoes diced into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 3 Persian cucumbers peeled and sliced ¼ inch thick
  • 2 scallions both green and white parts, thinly sliced
  • 2 green peppers Aneheim peppers, jalapenos, or serrano peppers – seeds removed and sliced thinly
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Place tomatoes, cucumbers, scallions, and green peppers in a large bowl or a large platter.
    Side by side images showing the ingredients of Turkish shepherd's salad.
  • Drizzle it with lemon juice, olive oil, and season with salt, pepper, and sumac.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and toss to combine.
    Side by side photos showing the making of coban salad.
  • Serve it right away.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6 cups of salad (depending on the size of your vegetables), and it is ideal for 4 (large) servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge for up to 2 days. It is normal for the vegetables to release their juices as they sit. Just give it a stir before serving.
  • Optional add-ins: As I was writing this recipe, I wanted to stay true to the traditional recipe. However, some modern-day versions of this recipe add other ingredients like a handful of crumbled feta cheese, chopped black olives, and a sprinkle of red pepper flakes (or Urfa chile if you can get your hands on.) All of these would be great addition to the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 119kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 247mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 748IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

What’s the difference between Turkish Shepherd Salad and Greek Salad?

Both salads feature tomatoes and cucumbers as their base, but they are prepared and served differently. In Turkish Shepherd Salad, the vegetables are finely chopped so every bite has a mix of everything. It’s dressed simply with olive oil, lemon juice, and sometimes a sprinkle of sumac, and traditionally does not include cheese or olives (though you can add them if you like).

Greek Salad (Horiatiki), on the other hand, is made with larger chunks of vegetables and usually includes feta cheese, olives, and oregano, giving it a heartier and more briny flavor.

Can I add cheese to Turkish Shepherd Salad?

While it is not traditional, you can sprinkle it with a handful of crumbled feta cheese.

What does Çoban mean in Turkish?

Çoban, pronounced as Chough-bahn, means Shepherd.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

Turkish cuisine is known for similar, easy-to-make salads like this one that you can make during the peak tomato season. A few of my favorites are:

  • Summer tomatoes mixed in with white beans and red onions, Piyaz (Turkish White Bean Salad) is yet another simple salad 
  • At every kebab restaurant in Turkey, you’ll find a side of ezme, and my version shows you how to make this authentic “Turkish salsa” at home with just a few simple ingredients.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-shepherd-salad/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Sumac Onions Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/#respond Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:22:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82353 What Are Sumac Onions? Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what…]]>

What Are Sumac Onions?

Growing up in Turkey, sumac onions were always on the table. For us, they were what pickled onions are for many American homes: a simple, tangy side that brightens up almost any meal.

While we called it “sumac onions” and served it more like a condiment, some people also refer to it as a “red onion salad” and serve it as a side dish. Both are perfectly acceptable.

Sumac onions in a bowl from a top view.

Now, in case you are not familiar, the key ingredient is sumac. It is a deep red spice made from dried berries (not peppers, though many people think so) with a tangy lemony flavor and slightly earthy taste. Unlike chili powders, it isn’t spicy hot.

When mixed with thinly sliced red onions, sumac helps tame their sharpness, turning them into a slightly sweet and refreshing bite. That’s why you’ll often see sumac onions served alongside meat-centric dishes like lamb, beef, or chicken kebabs. They cut through the richness and spice, bringing a welcome crunch and a pop of brightness to every bite.

Simple Ingredients You’ll Need

You’ll need only a few basic pantry staples to make this sumac onions recipe. You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful notes from my recipe testing:

Ingredients for sumac red onions in bowls from the top view.

Red Onion: Since this is the main ingredient, use a fresh red onion and slice it as thinly as possible. A sharp knife works well, but a mandolin ensures even slices. In a pinch, you can substitute white or yellow onions, though the flavor will be slightly different.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: A mild-flavored olive oil works best.

Lemon Juice: My mom always used lemon juice, as most Turkish families do, but other acidic ingredients like apple cider vinegar, red wine vinegar, or lime juice also work. Keep in mind, though, that the flavor profile will vary depending on the acid you use.

Kosher Salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, but if you are using other brands like Morton’s or sea salt, I would use half the amount and adjust it as necessary.

Sumac: Usually available in the Middle Eastern section of most supermarkets, sold as sumac spice or sumac powder. If you’re new to sumac, I really like Eastanbul sumac spice (affiliate link). Keep an eye on the best-by date, since sumac typically has a shorter shelf life than many other spices, about 6 months.

Red Pepper Flakes (Urfa Chili or Aleppo Pepper): Optional, but the authentic version often uses a pinch of Urfa chili or Aleppo pepper. If you can’t get your hands on either one of those, any other red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Fresh Chopped Parsley: Finely chopped parsley is traditional, but you can switch it up depending on the dish you are serving it with. For example, fresh mint pairs beautifully when serving with lamb.

Pomegranate molasses (optional): A drizzle of pomegranate molasses is optional, but it would add a nice sweetness, especially if you are serving this with kebabs.

Tomatoes (optional): If I am serving this sumac onion salad with lamb kabobs like the traditional Adana Kebab, I add a handful of halved cherry tomatoes. They bring a pop of color and an extra touch of freshness.

How to Make Sumac Onions (Step-by-Step Guide)

Making Turkish sumac onions is as straightforward as it gets. You don’t need any special equipment, just a sharp knife and a bowl. Follow these simple steps, and you’ll have a tangy, refreshing side ready to serve with your favorite dishes.

A collage of images showing thinly sliced onion and a bowl of onions mixed with the rest of the ingredients.

Step 1 – Slice the onions: On a sturdy cutting board, cut the red onion in half lengthwise. Remove the skins and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. A sharp knife works best, but always keep the flat side of the onion against the board for safety.

Step 2 – Mix the ingredients: Place the sliced onion in a medium bowl. Add the olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper (if using).

A collage of images showing thinly sliced red onions being massaged and garnished with parsley.

Step 3 – Massage: Using clean hands, gently massage the onions for 1-2 minutes, until they have softened slightly and absorbed the seasonings.

Step 4 – Garnish and rest: Sprinkle with chopped parsley and toss to combine. If you have the time, cover and refrigerate for 10-15 minutes before serving to let the flavors meld.

Helpful Expert Tips

Whether you’re serving sumac pickled onions as a condiment for kebabs or tucking them into sandwiches, this recipe is simple enough for anyone to make. Still, a few tips can help you get the best results on your first try:

  • Soak the onions if needed: If you’re sensitive to the strong, pungent taste of red onions, soak the slices in cold tap water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain before mixing. This works especially well if you plan to serve them right away. However, keep in mind that if you are making them ahead, this step is unnecessary, as their sharpness naturally mellows as they sit in the fridge.
  • Use fresh sumac: Unlike many other spices, sumac has a relatively short shelf life. Check the freshness before using it. I list one tablespoon in the recipe, but I often add closer to 2 tablespoons at home because I love the flavor. Taste and adjust to your preference.
  • Slice evenly: Try to cut the onions into even slices so each bite has the same texture and balance of seasoning. A mandolin can be helpful, but a sharp chef’s knife works just fine.
  • Don’t skip the massage: Gently massaging for a minute not only softens the onions but also helps them absorb the sumac and other seasonings more fully. 
  • Serve slightly chilled: While you can enjoy them right away, serving them chilled adds a refreshing crunch that pairs especially well with rich meat dishes.
  • Watch out for stains: Sumac has a deep red color, and when mixed with red onions, it can easily stain.. Avoid wearing your favorite white shirt while preparing it, and consider using gloves if you prefer.

Delicious Ways to Serve Sumac Onions

The pairing options are endless for this Turkish onion salad. While you can serve it with nearly any savory dish, here are some of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

  • With Kebabs & Grilled Meats: Sumac onions are the classic pairing with the rich, smoky kebabs that Turkish, Lebanese, and other Middle Eastern cuisines are known for. I especially love to serve on top of my Adana Kebab, Chicken Shish Tawook, Doner Kebab, and Oven Chicken Kebabs.
  • With Shawarma: Their tangy bite balances the spices in shawarma beautifully. Try them with my Easy Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma.
  • In Bowls: Add freshness and brightness to grain or salad bowls. They’re perfect on top of a Chicken Shawarma Bowl or a Homemade CAVA Bowl.
  • With Seafood Dishes: They pair wonderfully with Grilled or Baked salmon, adding contrast to the richness of the fish.
  • Make it a part of your mezze platter: Serve it along with other mezze platter staples like Hummus, Muhammara, and Baba Ganoush.
  • Vegetarian & Vegan Favorites: Sumac onions bring life to plant-based meals, adding a burst of freshness that makes every bite more satisfying. I love serving them alongside Rice with Vermicelli or crispy Falafel.

Storing Leftovers & Making Ahead

Making Ahead: This recipe is perfect for meal prep since the onions continue to mellow and develop flavor as they sit. You can make them 2–3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or mason jar in the fridge.

Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers refrigerated for 3 to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.

Freezing: Freezing isn’t recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best taste and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Zoomed in photo of sumac onions in a bowl.

FAQs

What do sumac onions taste like?

Sumac onions have a bright, tangy taste with a hint of sweetness. The sumac adds an earthy, citrus-like note that softens the sharpness of raw red onions.

How do you make raw onions less strong/pungent?

If you find raw onions too sharp, soak the slices in a bowl of cold water with a pinch of salt for about 10 minutes, then drain well before using.

How long do sumac onions last / How should I store sumac onions?

They should last for 3-4 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container or a jar with a tight-fitting lid.

Can I add other ingredients or variations?

Yes, absolutely. Sumac onions are very versatile. You can drizzle in a little pomegranate molasses for extra sweetness, swap in fresh mint instead of parsley, or add spices like ground cumin for a different twist.

Other Middle Eastern/Mediterranean Condiments You Might Like

If you enjoy this onion sumac salad, chances are you’ll love other Middle Eastern and Mediterranean condiments too. Here are a few to try next:

  • If you’re a fan of the bold, spicy flavors of the region, my homemade harissa recipe is a must-try.
  • Bright and earthy with lemon and garlic, tahini sauce is one of the easiest ways to add depth to grilled meats or roasted vegetables.
  • When you want to mellow out the richness of kebabs or grilled meats, everyone’s favorite creamy Greek white sauce (known as tzatziki) made with cucumber, garlic, and dill is hard to beat.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Turkish red onion sumac salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Sumac Onions Recipe

These quick and tangy Sumac Onions are a quick Middle Eastern condiment. Made with thinly sliced red onions, lemon juice, olive oil, and sumac, they add a refreshing, citrusy bite that balances rich dishes like kebabs, shawarma, or grilled fish. Serve as a side, condiment, or salad for a fresh pop of flavor.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 45kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 red onion medium sized
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Cut onions in half lengthwise, remove the skins, and slice thinly into half-moon shapes. Transfer to a medium bowl.
  • Add the olive oil, lemon juice, Kosher salt, sumac, and Aleppo pepper.
    Two images side by side showing onions being thinly sliced and onions in a bowl garnished with sumac.
  • Using your hands, gently massage the onions for 1–2 minutes until they soften slightly and absorb the seasonings.
  • Add the parsley and toss to combine.
    A collage of images showing sumac onions massaged and then garnished with parsley.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ to ¾ of sumac onions, which would be ideal for serving 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Onions: While the traditional recipe is made with red onions, in a pinch, you can use white onions, but keep in mind that the flavor profile will be slightly different.
  • Make Ahead: These onions get even better as they sit. You can prepare them 2-3 days in advance and store them in an airtight container or jar in the fridge.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in the fridge for up to 4 days. Just give them a quick stir before serving to mix the seasonings back in.
  • Freezing: Not recommended, as the onions lose their crisp texture once thawed. For the best flavor and crunch, enjoy them fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 45kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 0.4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 295mg | Potassium: 61mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 0.2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sumac-onions/feed/ 0
Lavash Bread Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:19:46 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82286 If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s…]]>

If you’ve ever been to a Middle Eastern or Mediterranean restaurant, chances are you’ve had lavash. Similar to pita, it’s the go-to bread for serving with kebabs, dips, and salads. Growing up in Turkey, I learned early on that you simply don’t eat kebab without a piece of warm lavash.

Yes, you can find it at the store, but once you taste a freshly cooked, puffed-up lavash straight from the skillet, there’s no going back. And the best part? It’s easier to make than you think.

In this post, I’ll walk you through the step-by-step process of making lavash bread, complete with foolproof tips and troubleshooting advice, so you can confidently make it at home anytime.

What is Lavash? A Journey Through This Ancient Flatbread

Lavash (or lavaş, as we call it in Turkey) is a soft, thin flatbread with ancient roots stretching across the Middle East and Central Asia. While the lavash bread recipe may vary slightly from region to region, it is a staple in many countries across the region, including Armenia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Azerbaijan, and Turkey.

At its core, lavash is as simple as bread gets: just flour, water, salt, sugar, milk (optional), and yeast. But despite the short ingredient list, the result is anything but basic. 

Depending on where it’s made, lavash can be thick and chewy or paper-thin and crisp. 

My version here sits right in the middle; soft enough to wrap around your favorite kebabs but sturdy enough to use it as a utensil to scoop up dips and salads just like we do in Turkey.

Essential Ingredients for Lavash Bread

The traditional lavash bread recipes you’ll find in cookbooks are usually made with just three ingredients: flour, water, and salt. 

While that version is beautiful in its simplicity, it can take a bit more time and technique to get right. In my version, I use a small amount of yeast to help the dough rise more easily, a splash of milk for a softer texture, and a touch of sugar (or, in my case, honey) to feed the yeast and get it bubbling faster.

You’ll find the exact measurements of this homemade lavash recipe in the recipe card below, but here are a few essential notes and tips from my testing to help you get the best results every time.

Ingredients for the recipe are in small bowls from the top view.

Water: We use lukewarm water (around 110 °F – 43 °C) to activate the yeast. The temperature is important here because if it is colder, the yeast will not activate, and if it is hotter, it will kill it. 

Yeast: I use instant yeast in this recipe, but I still bloom it in warm water with a bit of honey to give it a head start. This step isn’t always necessary with instant yeast, but I’ve found it helps create a better rise and a more reliable dough. 

If you only have active dry yeast, you can use it the same way, just make sure it foams up before moving on.

Sugar: A small amount of sugar helps feed the yeast and encourages it to bubble up during the resting period. You can use granulated sugar, but I like to use honey to keep this recipe free of refined sugar. Either one will do the job.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil: I use a little bit of extra virgin olive oil, mostly for flavor. It adds a subtle richness to the dough and helps keep the lavash soft. 

Milk: A small amount of milk makes the dough softer and adds a slightly richer texture. I use whole milk, but any kind you have on hand will work. Just make sure it’s at room temperature so it doesn’t interfere with the rising time. 

If you prefer a dairy-free version, you can use water instead.

All-Purpose Flour vs. Bread Flour: The recipe I am sharing here is made with all-purpose flour, which yields a soft and pliable dough that is perfect for rolling kebabs. If you prefer a sturdier, chewier texture, you can swap in bread flour instead. It has a higher protein content, which gives the dough more structure.

Kosher salt: I used Diamond kosher salt, which is less salty than most kosher salts. If you use other brands, such as Morton’s, be sure to use half the amount. 

Step-by-Step: How to Make Lavash Bread at Home

Whenever I make any kind of bread, I always want to know how far in advance to start, especially if I’m planning to serve it for dinner. This easy lavash recipe takes about 1.5 hours from start to finish, including time to knead, rise, and cook. So if dinner’s at 7, starting around 5:30 pm is just right.

This recipe makes 10 lavash, just in case you are planning ahead or cooking for a crowd.

Here’s how to make lavash at home, step by step:

Yeast is activated and mixed with oil in a bowl.

Step 1 – Activate the Yeast: Place the lukewarm water (around 110°F / 43°C) and honey (or sugar) in a measuring cup. Stir well to make sure the honey is fully dissolved. Add the yeast and let it sit for 5 minutes, or until you see a grey-ish thick layer of bubbly foam on top. Then stir in the olive oil and milk until fully combined.

Wet ingredients are added into the dry ones and mixed.

Step 2 – Combine Wet & Dry Ingredients: In a large mixing bowl, combine the flour and salt. Pour in the yeast mixture and knead the dough with clean hands for about 5 minutes, or until no dry flour remains. 

At this point, the dough (and your hands) will be sticky, and that is totally normal. As you knead, turn the dough frequently to ensure everything comes together evenly.

The bread dough risen and then kneaded.

Step 3 – First Rise: Cover the bowl with a clean kitchen towel (or loosely with plastic wrap) and let it rise in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. By the end of that time, it should look a little smoother and slightly puffed in volume.

Step 4 – Knead the Dough: Lightly flour your kitchen counter and transfer the dough over. Knead it for about 5 minutes.

You don’t really need much of a technique here, but when I’m kneading it, I usually press the whole dough with the heel of my hand, push it away, fold it back over, and give it a turn. Then I just keep repeating that motion until the dough feels smooth and stretchy.

It shouldn’t be too sticky, but if it is, go ahead and sprinkle in a bit more flour, just a little at a time (no more than a tablespoon). You don’t want to use too much flour, as this can make your lavash too dry or stiff.

Alternatively, you can knead the dough in a stand mixer using the dough hook. However, keep in mind that you might not need to knead it as long. The visual cue to pay attention to is for the dough to be smooth and no longer sticking to the sides.

The dough rolled and cut into the balls.

Step 5 – Divide the Dough: Shape the dough into a log approximately 12 inches long and divide it into 10 equal pieces. When you go with 10, each lavash ends up being about 9 to 10 inches in diameter once it is rolled out and cooked. If your skillet is smaller, you can divide the dough into 12 and make slightly smaller ones.

You can totally eyeball it, but if you want all your lavash to be about the same size, a kitchen scale helps.

Grab a dinner plate and sprinkle it with a little flour. Roll each piece into a ball and place them on the plate. Then cover them loosely with a kitchen towel and let them rest for 20 minutes.

The lavash dough is rolled out.

Step 6 – Heat the Skillet & Roll Out the Dough: When you are ready to cook, heat a large (10- or 12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat until it is really hot. This part is essential because if the pan isn’t hot enough, the dough will stick. You’ll know it is ready when a few drops of water sizzle and disappear almost instantly.

While the pan heats up, start rolling out the dough. Take one ball at a time and roll it into a 9- to 10-inch circle using a rolling pin. Do your best to keep it round, but I’ll be honest; it is a little tricky at first. 

The good news? It gets easier the more you do it, and honestly, a slightly wonky lavash still tastes just as good.

The lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.

Step 7 – Cook the Lavash: Before you start rolling, grab a basket (a tortilla warmer works beautifully if you have one) or a bowl and line it with a kitchen towel. We need a place to store the freshly cooked lavash and keep it soft and warm. Set that aside.

Carefully transfer the rolled-out dough to the hot skillet. Within 10 to 15 seconds, you should see little bubbles start to form on the surface. Give it a flip, cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. As it cooks and puffs, you’ll see golden brown spots start to appear, which is exactly what we want.

Keep flipping every 10-15 seconds, and cook for about 40-50 seconds total, or until both sides are cooked and it has some nice color.

Transfer the freshly cooked lavash to your prepared basket and cover it with the towel to keep it warm. Then just repeat the process (roll, cook, and store) for the remaining dough balls.

Expert Tips 

Roll it out thin: The key to getting soft, pliable lavash is rolling the dough really thin. I know it is tempting to focus on making a perfect circle, but honestly, thinness matters more than shape. Even if your lavash isn’t perfectly round, it will still taste great.

And if you have a pasta machine, that is a great shortcut to get an even, thin sheet of dough without too much effort.

Go easy on the extra flour: It is tempting to keep adding flour if the dough feels sticky, but try to trust the process and the visual cues I mentioned earlier. Only add more flour when the dough really starts to stick (especially while rolling), and try to work quickly. Too much flour can lead to stiff, dry lavash, and we definitely don’t want that.

Keep it warm: Don’t skip setting up a spot to keep the cooked lavash warm. Otherwise, while you are busy cooking the rest, the earlier ones will cool down and lose their soft, pliable texture. And you don’t need anything fancy; a basket or a bowl lined with a clean kitchen towel works perfectly.

Work faster with a buddy: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is rolling and cooking the lavash. But it goes a lot quicker (and is honestly more fun) if you have someone helping out. I usually rope my husband in. He is in charge of the skillets and cooks two at a time while I roll out the dough. Teamwork makes it so much easier.

Stay close while it cooks: These flatbreads cook fast, so it is important to keep a close eye on them, even while you are multitasking. I know you’ll likely be rolling out the next one while one is cooking (I do the same), but try not to turn your back on the skillet. It gets very hot, and things move quickly, so just stay aware, especially if you have young kids around.

Troubleshooting Common Lavash Baking Issues

While this lavash flatbread recipe is pretty straightforward, I ran into a few hiccups during testing, so I wanted to share some tips in case you experience the same. Here are a few common issues and what might be causing them:

Dough isn’t rising: After the first 20-minute rest, your dough should be slightly larger and less sticky. If that is not happening, chances are your yeast was not properly activated. This usually comes down to the water being too cold or too hot. If you don’t see bubbles on top during the blooming stage, it is best not to add that mixture to the flour and just start fresh with a new batch.

Dough is too sticky or too dry: Before the first rise, the dough will be sticky, and that is completely normal. After it rests and you begin kneading, it should smooth out and become easier to handle. 

A little flour on the counter is fine if it is sticking too much, but try not to overdo it. Too much flour can dry the dough and make the lavash stiff.

Lavash isn’t bubbling in the skillet: If you are not seeing bubbles after placing the dough in the pan, there are usually two possible reasons: either the skillet isn’t hot enough, or the dough was rolled too thick.

Serving Suggestions:

If you’re wondering how to use lavash, the short answer is anywhere you’d use your favorite flatbread. But like most bread recipes, there are so many other ways to enjoy it. Below are a few of my favorite recipes to pair with lavash:

Adana kebab rolled in lavash bread.

Kebabs: The most traditional way to serve lavash is as a wrap for kebabs, like my Turkish Adana Kebab and Homemade Doner Kebab. Its thin, soft texture makes it perfect for rolling, and it does a great job soaking up all the delicious juices from the meat. That said, you don’t have to stop at kebabs. Any grilled meat, like my Shish Tawook,  works beautifully wrapped in lavash.

Shawarma: Beyond kebabs, homemade lavash is the perfect wrap for your favorite shawarma recipes, such as my Chicken Shawarma or Beef Shawarma. Just roll up the meat with your favorite toppings for a delicious, handheld meal.

Scooping Mezes and Dips: While pita is often the go-to for serving with meze like baba ganoush, hummus, or muhammara, warm lavash is just as good, if not better. Tear off a piece and use it to scoop up the dips right off the plate. No spoon needed.

Breakfast: Lavash is also fantastic with a simple Turkish breakfast spread. I love serving it alongside cheeses, olives, Turkish eggs, and freshly sliced tomatoes and cucumbers. And if I feel like treating myself a bit, I sometimes even brush it with some melted butter while it is still warm.

Other versatile uses: Lavash is one of those breads you can serve with just about anything. Use it to dip into soups and stews, wrap up leftovers, or even turn it into a quick wrap. Any time you find yourself reaching for bread, lavash will do the job beautifully.

​​How to Store, Freeze and Reheat Lavash

I’ll be honest, lavash is best on the day that it is made while it is still warm. As it cools, it tends to lose its softness. That said, if you store it properly, it is still great the next day. Here’s how I do it:

Storage: Let the lavash cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container or sealable zip-top bag. Keep it in the fridge for up to 3 or 4 days.

Freezing: Once cooled, place the lavash in a freezer-safe container or freezer bag with sheets of parchment paper between each piece. Try to remove as much air as possible before sealing. It will keep in the freezer for up to a month. When you’re ready to use it, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: You have two options here:

  • In the oven: Preheat the oven to 325°F. Lightly spray the lavash with water, place it on a baking sheet, and warm for 8 to 10 minutes or until heated through. You can reheat multiple pieces using this method.
  • In the microwave (my favorite method): Lightly wet two sheets of paper towel and wrap the lavash in between. Microwave for 30 seconds, then carefully remove the towels. If it needs a bit more time, repeat for another 10 to 15 seconds. When using this method, it is best to reheat your lavash one piece at a time.

Frequently Asked Questions

What’s the difference between lavash and pita?

Lavash and pita are both Middle Eastern flatbreads, but they’re not quite the same. Pita is usually thicker and bakes up with a pocket in the center, which makes it great for stuffing. Lavash, on the other hand, is thinner, softer, and more flexible, making it easier to use as a wrap.
Additionally, pita is usually cooked in a very hot oven, whereas lavash bread is often cooked on a skillet, griddle, or traditionally (especially in Armenia) in a tonir (or tandoor) oven.

Can I make lavash without yeast?

Yes, you can. I like to use yeast because I find yeasted dough to be easier to work with, but you can make lavash using only flour, salt, and oil.

Can I make lavash on a griddle?

Yes, you can. A griddle works just as well as a skillet, especially if you want to cook more than one lavash at a time. Some people even prefer to roll the dough into an oval shape to fit better on a rectangular griddle.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Bread Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you’re a fan of lavash, chances are you love Middle Eastern breads just as much as I do. Here are a few more recipes from the archives:

  • Stop buying pita at the store and try making your own. It’s easier than you think. Check out my post on how to make pita bread, complete with foolproof tips perfect for beginners.
  • If you’ve ever had a traditional Turkish breakfast, you’ve probably had simit. Some people call it Turkish bagels, and once you try it, you’ll understand why it’s such a favorite. This one’s worth your time.
  • No sourdough starter? No problem. My no-knead olive bread is one of the easiest, most hands-off bread recipes you can make. Just mix, let it rest, and bake.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Lavash bread in a basket from the top view.
Print

Lavash Bread Recipe

This easy lavash bread recipe is made with just a few basic ingredients you probably already have on hand and cooked on the stovetop until soft and lightly puffed. Perfect for wrapping kebabs, scooping dips, or serving with your favorite Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Bread
Cuisine Middle Eastern, Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Rolling and resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 30 minutes
Servings 10 servings
Calories 211kcal

Ingredients

  • ¾ cup warm water at 110 °F degrees
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 ½ teaspoon instant yeast aka quick rise yeast – (5g)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ cup whole milk at room temperature
  • 3 ¼ cups all purpose flour plus more for rolling (423 g)
  • 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt 8g

Instructions

  • Place ¾ cup of warm water and 1 teaspoon of honey in a measuring cup. Stir to ensure that the honey is fully dissolved.
    The yeast activated and mixed with olive oil in a bowl.
  • Add the yeast and stir until it is well combined. Let it rest for 5 minutes. It will have a thick layer of bubbles on top.
  • In the same measuring cup, add ¼ cup olive oil and ½ cup milk. Give it a good stir. Set it aside.
  • Combine 3 ¼ cups all-purpose flour and 1 ¼ teaspoons kosher salt in a large bowl.
    Dry ingredients are being mixed with the wet to make lavash dough.
  • Add the yeast mixture and knead for 5 minutes, first mixing the dough until no flour remains and then turning it into a ball. In the end, it will be a very sticky dough, and that is normal.
  • Cover the dough with a clean kitchen towel and let it rest in a warm part of your kitchen for 20 minutes. It will get slightly larger in size.
    The dough is placed in a bowl to rise and a person is kneading it.
  • Transfer the now-rested dough to a lightly floured surface.
  • To knead the dough, press it with the heel of your hand, then push it away, fold it back over, and rotate it 45 degrees. Repeat this process for 5 minutes or until the dough is smooth. If it’s too sticky to work with, sprinkle in a bit more flour, 1 tablespoon at a time.
  • Shape the dough into a log and divide it into 10 equal pieces.
    The dough is cut into smaller pieces.
  • Roll each piece into a ball, dust it with flour, and transfer it onto a plate. Loosely cover the plate with a kitchen towel and let it rest for 20 minutes.
  • When you’re ready to cook, heat a large (12-inch) nonstick or cast-iron skillet over high heat for 5 minutes. The pan needs to be very hot to keep the dough from sticking. To test, flick a few drops of water into the skillet. If they sizzle and disappear right away, it’s ready.
  • While the pan heats up, roll out one dough ball into a 10-inch circle using a rolling pin and more flour as needed. As you roll, it might be tricky to keep a perfect circle, and that’s totally fine. Just do your best.
    Lavash dough rolled out with a rolling pin.
  • Carefully transfer the rolled dough to the hot skillet. Cook for 10 seconds (you’ll see bubbles forming), then flip. Cook for another 10 seconds, then flip again. Repeat for a total of 3-4 flips or until it looks fully cooked and has golden spots.
    Lavash cooked in a skillet from the top view.
  • As soon as it’s done, wrap the warm lavash in a clean kitchen towel and place it in a basket to keep warm. Continue adding each cooked piece to the basket, keeping them wrapped so they stay soft and warm while you finish the rest.
  • Repeat the same rolling and cooking process with the remaining dough balls.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 10 lavash, each approximately 9 to 10 inches in diameter. The nutritional values below are per piece.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover bread to room temperature and store in an airtight container (or a Ziploc bag) for up to 4 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat in a low-heat oven (325°F) for 8-10 minutes, or until thoroughly warmed through. Or you can wrap it in a lightly wetted paper towel and microwave for 30 seconds. 
  • A word on the yeast: I used instant rapid yeast as I find that it blooms faster but active dry yeast can also be used.
  • This recipe was adapted from Betul Tunc’s cookbook Turkuaz Kitchen’s lavash recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 211kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 79mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 20IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lavash-bread-recipe/feed/ 8
Adana Kebab Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/ https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/#comments Tue, 29 Jul 2025 21:17:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82217 Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in…]]>

Recently, a local reader challenged me to share how to make this iconic kebab at home. Having grown up in Turkiye and with a good friend who owns a kebab restaurant in Adana (and serves nothing else!), I felt uniquely qualified to take on the challenge.

In this post, I will walk you through every aspect of creating these juicy, flavorful skewers with confidence. I’ll share how to choose the right meat, the true authentic seasonings, essential shaping techniques, and foolproof grilling tips I’ve picked up through my own recipe testing.

Adana wrap on a plate from the top view.

What Is Adana Kebab?

At its essence, Adana Kebab (or as we call it, Adana Kebap) is Turkey’s most iconic grilled lamb skewer. Hailing from the city of Adana, this traditional recipe is made with just a handful of core ingredients: finely ground lamb, tail fat, a specific Turkish red pepper called kapya, fiery Urfa chili flakes (or Aleppo pepper), salt, and black pepper.

Although many online versions include aromatics and spices like onion, garlic, or cumin, the authentic recipe adheres to those five basics.

The traditional method also calls for hand-mincing the meat with a special curved knife called a zırh (affiliate link), threading it onto wide metal skewers, then grilling it over charcoal for a deeply smoky, rich result.

The True Secret of Adana Kebab: Ingredients and Their Role

When it comes to the ingredient list for this Turkish classic, the most important thing to remember is that less is more.

Sure, you can add onion, garlic, or spices like cumin and coriander. But my suggestion is to first master the basics of the authentic recipe, and then tweak it to your own preferences from there.

Ingredients for Turkish lamb kebabs in bowls from the top view.

You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here is a more detailed breakdown of what you will need.

The Meat: Lamb, Beef, or Both?

That said, even though I just made a case for sticking to tradition, I’ll be the first to bend the rules a bit, starting with the most important part of the recipe: the meat.

The authentic version is made by chopping lamb (typically from the shoulder) and tail fat with a curved knife called a zırh (in the US, it is referred to as a cleaver knife).

The goal with using a tool like zırh is to chop the meat and fat together, back and forth, so that it (almost) forms a paste. In a way, you’re grinding the meat yourself, by hand, until the fat and muscle bind naturally.

Now, as much as I love the idea of sticking to the original, even as someone who cooks for a living, I don’t own a zırh.

And as for tail fat? Let’s just say it’s not exactly easy to find.

So, in the spirit of making this Turkish skewers recipe doable for home cooks (dare I say it, even on a weeknight), I use ground lamb instead. I know it’s not quite the same, but I truly believe it’s the next best thing.

Now, you might be wondering: can you use ground beef instead, or a combination of both? The answer is yes and yes. But there’s one very important detail to keep in mind: fat content.

What makes Adana Kebab so iconic, and so delicious, is the fat. Fat doesn’t just add richness. It also helps the meat hold together and cling to the skewer as it cooks. It’s the secret to that signature juicy texture and the reason these kebabs don’t dry out or fall apart on the grill.

Since ground lamb naturally has more fat than beef, you’ll need to make adjustments if you’re using beef. Look for a fatty grind, ideally a 60/40 ratio if possible. 

If you’re buying from a butcher, ask for ground chuck with extra fat, or see if they can add in some beef fat trimmings for you.

Signature Seasonings of Adana: Red Pepper, Urfa Chili, and Salt

There’s a common belief that most kebab recipes rely heavily on aromatics like onion and garlic, along with spices such as ground cumin, coriander, and paprika.

Red Pepper

While that might be true for many types of kebab, this ground lamb skewer recipe challenges that idea. Instead of layering in lots of spices, it highlights one very specific ingredient: a red pepper called kapya. Native to Turkey, kapya peppers are known for their sweet and smoky flavor and add a distinctive depth to the original recipe.

I would have loved to use Kapya here, but since it’s not widely available in the US, I went with the next best thing I could find: red Fresno peppers.

If you can’t get your hands on those, a red bell pepper will also work.

Urfa Chili Flakes (Pul Biber)

The next signature ingredient is Urfa chili pepper (affiliate link), also known as Aleppo-style red pepper flakes. Urfa chili has a deep, earthy heat that’s mild yet complex, and it complements the richness of the lamb beautifully.

If you can find it, it is absolutely worth using. That said, you can use any red pepper flakes you have on hand. And, of course, feel free to adjust the heat level to suit your preferences.

Paprika

To help round out the flavor of the red pepper, especially when using substitutes like Fresno or bell pepper, I like to add a little extra depth with paprika. I use two teaspoons of my favorite kind to help bring in some of the sweetness and smokiness that kapya naturally offers.

This is also a great place to put your own spin on the recipe. Use sweet paprika, smoky paprika, or a combination of both, depending on what you prefer and have on hand.

Salt & Pepper

Finally, we have salt and black pepper.

And I’ll say this upfront. The amount of salt might surprise you. The recipe calls for one tablespoon of kosher salt for two pounds of ground lamb. It may sound like a lot, but it is essential.

Salt not only enhances the taste, but it also helps the meat bind and hold its shape on the skewer.

Of course, not all salts are created equal. I use Diamond Crystal kosher salt (affiliate link), which is lighter and less salty by volume than many other brands. If you are using something like Morton’s kosher salt, I recommend starting with half the amount and adjusting to taste.

I also add a touch of black pepper to round out the simple seasoning.

The Essential Tool Worth Investing in for Home-Style Adana Kebab

Whenever I share a recipe here on the blog, I try to avoid using tools or gadgets that most home kitchens don’t already have.

But in the case of this Turkish lamb skewers recipe, I wanted to stay as true to the original as possible, which meant making one small exception; I had to buy the thick, flat metal skewers (affiliate link) traditionally used in Adana.

My thinking is this: if you enjoy making kebabs at home, this is a worthy one-time investment that will more than pay off in the long run.

During my recipe testing, I first attempted to make these kebabs using thin bamboo skewers commonly found in most households. I had such a hard time getting the meat to stick and hold that signature thickness. The mixture kept slipping off or falling apart during grilling, which made the whole process stressful.

That’s when I realized that the people who have been making this Adana recipe for generations must know what they’re doing. So, I ordered a set of one-inch-wide kebab skewers (affiliate link), and the difference was night and day.

Here is how it is helpful:

  • The thicker skewers give you more surface area to work with when shaping the meat. 
  • Their width helps the meat cling better, and the longer body allows you to form a full-length kebab that cooks evenly over the grill. 
  • They also help the meat stay intact when exposed to high heat, which is especially important when working with a high-fat mixture like this one.

How to Make Adana Kebab at Home

Once you have your ingredients prepped and your skewers ready, the rest comes down to technique. It’s not difficult, just a few key steps to follow for the best results. Here’s how I break it down:

Preparing your kebab mixture:

Step 1 – Chop and Drain the Red Peppers

Start by removing the seeds and chopping the red peppers as finely as you can. This helps them blend seamlessly into the meat mixture, rather than showing up as visible chunks.

After chopping, place the peppers in a fine mesh strainer and press gently to release their juices. This step is essential as we want to remove as much liquid as possible so the mixture doesn’t become too wet or soggy when it’s time to shape.

Meat mixture in a bowl from the top view.

Step 2 – Prepare the Meat Mixture

In a large mixing bowl, combine the drained chopped peppers, ground lamb, paprika, red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper. Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and evenly seasoned.

Once it’s mixed, divide the meat into equal portions based on how many skewers you plan to use. My set came with three skewers, so I divided the mixture into three even parts. You can eyeball it or, if you prefer precision, weigh the portions using a kitchen scale.

If you want to make it ahead, just cover the bowl and place it in the fridge. In fact, if you can plan ahead, I highly recommend it. Giving the mixture a chance to rest helps the flavors come together and settle into the meat. An overnight rest (up to 24 hours) can really make a difference.

Shaping your Adana Kebabs

The meat is being threaded onto the skewer.

Step 3 – Thread Onto the Skewers

When you’re ready to thread the meat, start by setting up your workstation. Grab your skewers, a small bowl of water to wet your hands, and bring out the meat mixture from the fridge.

To thread, take one portion of the ground lamb mixture, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center. Using your hands, press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to create an even shape.

If or when the mixture starts to feel sticky, lightly wet your hands to prevent the meat from sticking too much. Just be careful not to overdo it. A little water goes a long way, and too much can make the mixture too soft to hold together.

As you work, do your best to keep the thickness even from top to bottom. Once you’ve shaped the kebab, take a moment to gently press and seal the top and bottom ends of the meat onto the skewer.

Step 4 – Create the signature ridges

Adana skewers shaped from the top view.

If you’ve had Adana Kebab before, you’ve probably noticed the pattern of shallow ridges pressed into the surface. They’re not just for appearance. These indentations help the meat cook more evenly over high heat and give the kebab its signature look.

To make them, use your thumb and forefinger to gently press along the length of the meat, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat the same motion on the other side.

Grilling Your Kebabs

Step 5 – Grill

Lamb kebabs on the grill.

The traditional way to cook Adana Kebab is over a charcoal grill, which gives it that distinct smoky taste and slightly crisp exterior. That said, I used my gas grill for this version to keep it simple and approachable for home cooks. Both methods work well, and below you’ll find tips for each.

If using a gas grill: Preheat your grill to 400°F to 425°F. Clean the grill grates thoroughly and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.

Carefully place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates and grill, turning them frequently to ensure even cooking and a nice char on all sides.

Depending on the thickness and length of your kebabs, this will take about 10 to 12 minutes.

Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it cooks. That’s completely normal, but it’s important to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking. 

Adjust the heat as needed and continue rotating the skewers to avoid burning and help them cook evenly.

If using a charcoal grill: Light your charcoal and let the coals burn until they’re covered with a thin layer of white ash.

Spread them out evenly and position the skewers directly over the heat. Grill the kebabs, turning them every couple of minutes to ensure even cooking and that nice, smoky char.

The total time will be similar, around 10 to 12 minutes, again depending on the heat level and the size of your skewers.

Similar to cooking it on a gas grill, keep a close eye during grilling, especially if you notice flare-ups. The goal is juicy, charred kebabs that stay intact from grill to plate.

Step 6 – Let It Rest While Making Sumac Onions

Sumac onions before and after they are mixed.

Once the kebabs are grilled, transfer them to a sheet pan and cover loosely with foil. Let them rest for about 5 to 10 minutes so the juices have time to settle back into the meat.

While the kebabs are resting, you can prepare one of the classic accompaniments to Adana Kebab: sumac onions, a traditional onion salad that beautifully balances the richness of the meat.

They’re easy to make, but if you’d like a more detailed breakdown, feel free to check out my Sumac Onions recipe.

To make a quick batch, combine sliced red onion, olive oil, lemon juice, kosher salt, sumac, and a pinch of red pepper flakes in a medium bowl. Using clean hands, gently massage the onions until they have softened slightly. Finish with a sprinkle of chopped parsley.

Assembling and Serving

Step 7 – Assemble:

Adana wrap being assembled and placed on a plate from the top view.

With the meat grilled and your sumac onions ready, all that’s left is the bread. Traditionally, Adana Kebab is served with lavash, a soft Mediterranean-style flatbread.

It’s similar to pita bread, and you can usually find it in most supermarkets. Of course, if you’d like to try making your own, I also have a homemade lavash recipe available for you to follow.

To assemble, place a piece of lavash flat on a plate and use it to slide the meat off the skewer. Since my skewers are quite large, I like to cut the kebab in half while it’s still on the skewer, then slide each half off gently. The meat should release easily.

From there, simply top it with a generous spoonful of sumac onions, a few slices of tomatoes, and a sprinkle of fresh parsley before rolling it up.

Needless to say, it is best to enjoy your Adana wrap while it’s still warm.

Expert Tips: Troubleshooting Adana Kebab

As you can see, making this Turkish Adana Kebab recipe doesn’t require any unusual ingredients or complicated cooking techniques. Still, while preparing this post, I made a few mistakes and learned a few things that I think would be helpful, especially if you’re making it for the first time.

Below are some tips to help you get the best results:

Falling off the skewer during grilling: During my recipe testing, I had a couple of kebabs fall apart on the grill. In the end, I realized there are two main reasons this can happen:

  • Not enough fat: If the meat doesn’t have enough fat, it will have trouble sticking to the skewer and keeping its shape. So don’t skip the fat, especially if you’re using ground beef or a beef-lamb mix.
  • Ends not sealed properly: Sealing the ends means gently squeezing and securing both the top and bottom of the kebab where the meat meets the skewer. If this step is skipped, the meat may loosen or fall off when exposed to high heat.

Even thickness is key: As you’re threading the skewers, make sure the meat is evenly distributed from end to end. I’ll admit, it takes a little practice, but once you shape your first one, it gets easier. Taking the time to shape the kebab evenly helps it cook properly and stay intact.

Let it rest: As with any kebab recipe, letting the meat rest in the fridge before grilling makes a big difference. That chill time allows the salt to work its way through the mixture and gives the flavors time to meld.

Keep a close eye on the grill: Because of the high fat content, flare-ups are normal while grilling. This is where you may need to manage the heat a bit. Stay close by, and turn the skewers often so they cook evenly without burning.

Using make-shift skewers: During my research for this recipe, I came across a few versions where people used makeshift skewers by wrapping bamboo skewers (or wooden skewers) with aluminum foil.

I’ll be honest, I haven’t tried that method myself. After testing this recipe more than five times, I can say that even with thick metal skewers, getting the meat to stick takes a bit of technique. So while it might work in a pinch, I’d be hesitant to recommend it. In my experience, investing in proper wide skewers makes the process much more reliable and much less frustrating.

How to Serve Adana Kebab: Authentic Turkish Pairings for a Complete Meal

So you made your Adana Kebab, garnished it with sumac onions, and wrapped it in warm lavash. Good for you! But what if you want to take it up a notch?

Below are a few traditional pairing ideas in case you’d like to serve it the way we do in Türkiye:

Pair it with a classic Turkish salad: Turn your kebab into a full feast by serving it alongside a fresh salad like the classic pairing, Turkish Ezme. Alternatively, you can go with a traditional Shepherd’s Salad (Çoban Salatası), a white bean salad like Piyaz, or even my Greek Cucumber Salad for a cooling contrast.

Add grilled vegetables: If you have a little extra time, grill some tomatoes or green peppers on the side while your kebabs are cooking. These simple vegetables add a lovely charred flavor and are often served right on top of the kebab in restaurants across Türkiye.

Serve with rice or bulgur pilaf: For a more substantial meal, pair your kebab with a starch. My Vermicelli Rice or Bulgur Pilaf are both authentic and satisfying options that round out the plate perfectly.

Drizzle it with yogurt sauce: While not traditional, a spoonful of tzatziki sauce or my yogurt mint sauce can be a nice addition, especially if you’re serving this to kids or anyone who prefers a milder dish. The creamy yogurt helps balance the spices and adds a cooling contrast to the richness of the meat.

Don’t forget the ayran: In Türkiye, if you order Adana Kebab at a restaurant, chances are your server will bring out a glass of ayran without even asking. This cool, tangy yogurt drink helps balance the spices in the kebab and brings everything together. The good news is you can make ayran at home in just a few minutes.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Adana kebab on a plate served over lavash.
Print

Adana Kebab Recipe

This Adana Kebab recipe is a home-cook-friendly version of the iconic Turkish ground lamb kebab, made with ground lamb, red peppers, and Urfa chili (also known as red pepper flakes). Threaded onto wide skewers and grilled to perfection, it's rich, juicy, and full of authentic flavor. Served with lavash and sumac onions, it's a complete meal that brings the taste of Türkiye to your own backyard.
Course Dinner, Lamb
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Resting time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 32 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 669kcal

Ingredients

For the kebab

  • 2 red peppers red fresno chilis or ½ red bell pepper
  • 2 lbs ground lamb or 1 lb ground lamb + 1 lb ground beef
  • 2 teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa chili flakes or Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 1 tablespoon kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • Water to wet your hands

For the Sumac Onions

  • 1 medium-sized red onion sliced
  • 1 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 tablespoons sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili flakes Aleppo pepper or red pepper flakes
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

To Serve with

  • 6 Lavash or pita bread

Instructions

  • Start by preparing the peppers. Remove the seeds and chop them as finely as you can. Place the chopped peppers in a colander set over a bowl and let them drain to release their juices. Once drained, transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  • Add the ground lamb, paprika, Aleppo pepper, salt, and black pepper to the bowl with the peppers.
    Ground lamb mixed with red peppers and spices in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, mix everything together until fully combined and the seasonings are evenly distributed.
  • Divide the meat mixture evenly based on the number of skewers you have. For example, if you have 3 skewers, divide the mixture into 3 equal portions.
    A person is threading the meat onto the skewer.
  • Take one portion, shape it into a ball, and gently insert the skewer through the center.
  • Fill a small bowl with cold tap water and keep it nearby. Using your hands, carefully press and spread the meat down the length of the skewer, turning it as you go to ensure even thickness all around. Lightly wet your fingers as needed to prevent the meat from sticking to your hands. Remember that just a little water is enough to help shape the kebabs without making the mixture too wet.
    Adana kebab on skewers ready to grill.
  • Once shaped, gently press and secure the top and bottom edges of the meat where it starts and ends on the skewer. This is an essential step in that it helps prevent the meat from breaking apart during grilling.
  • To create the traditional ridges, use your thumb and forefinger to lightly press along the length of the kebab, making shallow marks every couple of inches. Rotate the skewer and repeat on the other side. These ridges help the meat cook evenly and give the kebabs their signature look.
  • Preheat your gas grill to 400°F-425°F. Clean the grill grates well and brush them with oil to prevent sticking.
    Turkish Adana on the grill.
  • Once the grill is ready, place the Adana kebab skewers on the grates. Grill for 10-12 minutes, turning them often so they cook evenly and develop a nice char on the outside.
  • Keep in mind that because the meat has a higher fat content, you may experience flare-ups. Stay close to the grill and adjust the heat as needed to prevent burning.
  • Once cooked to your liking, cover the meat with foil and let it rest for 5-10 minutes.
  • While the meat is resting, make the sumac onions. In a medium-sized bowl, mix the sliced onions, olive oil, lemon juice, salt, sumac, and red pepper flakes.
    Sumac onions in a bowl.
  • Using clean hands, gently massage the onion mixture until slightly softened. Garnish with parsley.
  • When ready to assemble your Adana kebab, grab a lavash (or pita bread), place the meat on top, and garnish with sumac onions. Roll and serve right away.
    Adana kebab served on lavash with sumac onions on top.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves six adults and the nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Using beef instead of lamb: You can make this recipe with beef or with a mixture of beef and lamb, but it is important that you use a cut that is high in fat or ask your butcher to incorporate some beef trimmings to your ground beef.
  • Keep a close eye while grilling: Because the meat is rich in fat, you may see flare-ups as it is grilling. That’s expected, but it’s essential to stay close to the grill while they’re cooking.
  • Storage: Bring your kebabs to room temperature and store in the fridge for up to 3-4 days.
  • Reheating: Warm in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Nutrition

Calories: 669kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 39g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Cholesterol: 110mg | Sodium: 1755mg | Potassium: 487mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1809IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 6mg

Storing, Reheating and Freezing Instructions:

While freshly grilled Adana Kebab is always best, leftovers can be stored, frozen, and reheated with good results. Here’s how I handle it:

Storage: Let the kebab cool to room temperature, then place it in an airtight container. Store it in the fridge for up to 3 to 4 days.

Freezing: Wrap the leftover meat tightly in parchment paper, then wrap again with aluminum foil to keep everything in place. Transfer to the freezer and store for up to 1 month. When ready to use, thaw overnight in the fridge.

Reheating: Reheat in a low oven set to 300°F (150°C) for about 10 to 15 minutes, or until warmed through. Cover loosely with foil to prevent it from drying out.

Can You Make Adana Kebab Without a Grill? (Oven & Stovetop Alternatives)

While many online sources suggest you can easily cook Adana Kebab in the oven or on the stovetop, the truth is, the very essence of true Adana Kebab comes from cooking it over an open flame.

To be perfectly honest, that signature smoky flavor and crisp exterior are incredibly difficult to replicate without a grill.

However, I understand not everyone has a grill, and /or weather conditions may not cooperate to grill kebabs on the outside.

In that case, you can adapt this recipe, but it’s important to know you’ll likely be missing out of the signature smokey flavors. These alternatives are best thought of as Adana-style ground lamb kebabs, not a substitute for the real thing.

Cooking in the Oven

Step 1: Line a quarter sheet pan with a wire rack. This helps the meat cook evenly and allows air to circulate underneath. Preheat your oven to 400°F (204°C).

Step 2: Spread the meat mixture onto the rack in an even layer. Using a knife or spatula, divide it into 6 to 8 portions to mimic the shape and size of skewers.

Step 3: Bake for 20 to 23 minutes. Finish with 1 to 2 minutes under the broiler to develop a bit of char on top.

Cooking on the Stovetop

To be completely honest, I don’t recommend trying to cook full skewers on a skillet. It’s just too difficult to manage the thickness and shape. Instead, I suggest turning the meat mixture into Adana Kofte-style meatballs, which are easier to handle and still delicious.

Step 1: Form meatballs. Use a small cookie scoop or tablespoon to portion out the meat. Roll and gently flatten each one in the palm of your hand, then set them aside on a plate.

Step 2: Heat the pan. Add about a tablespoon of oil to a cast-iron or heavy-bottomed skillet. Heat it until it’s shimmering and very hot-this ensures you get a nice sear rather than steaming the meat.

Step 3: Cook in batches. Add the meatballs to the skillet, being careful not to overcrowd the pan. Cook them on all sides until nicely browned and cooked through, working in batches and adding more oil if needed.

FAQs

Is Adana kebab very spicy?

It depends. The heat in Adana Kebab comes mainly from the red peppers and Urfa chili used in the recipe. The level of spiciness can vary based on how many pepper seeds you include and how hot your red pepper flakes are.

If you want a milder version, simply remove all the seeds from the peppers and use less Urfa chili or substitute with a milder variety. If you like it spicy, keep some of the seeds and use more chili to dial up the heat.

Can I add onion, garlic, or other spices like cumin to this recipe?

You can, but keep in mind that it won’t be considered authentic Adana Kebab anymore. The traditional version is very simple and doesn’t include aromatics like onion or garlic.
That said, if you’d like to experiment with your own version, you can absolutely add them. Just make sure to grate them finely (or use a food processor to chop it finely) and strain out any excess liquid before mixing them into the meat. This helps keep the mixture from getting too wet and falling apart on the grill.

How do I know when Adana Kebab is cooked through?

You will know that it is fully cooked when it is nicely browned with grilled marks on the outside, is firm to touch and juicy when cut open.

What if I don’t have wide metal skewers?

Wide, flat metal skewers are essential for shaping and grilling Adana Kebab properly. If you don’t have them, you can try doubling up bamboo skewers or flattening them slightly, but keep in mind that the results won’t be quite the same.

You’ll likely lose the traditional look, and there’s a higher chance the meat won’t stay in place during grilling.

Other Authentic Turkish Recipes You Might Like:

If you’ve landed on this page, I suspect you’re a fan of Turkish food and maybe looking for even more foolproof, beginner-friendly recipes from my home country. Below are a few more classics you might also enjoy:

  • If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant and looked over the menu, chances are you’ve seen Turkish Red Lentil Soup on the list. It’s a simple 30-minute soup that’s just as beloved and familiar as Adana Kebab.
  • And if you’re in the mood for something cozy and quick, Turkish Pasta is another weeknight favorite that’s gone viral for a reason. It’s easy to make and loaded with comforting flavors.
  • Treat yourself to Türkiye’s most famous breakfast dish with my Turkish Eggs (Çılbır), poached eggs nestled on garlicky yogurt, drizzled with spicy butter, and ready in minutes. It’s truly a unique and satisfying experience!

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/adana-kebab/feed/ 2
Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/#comments Tue, 01 Jul 2025 16:52:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15923 What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce) You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would…]]>

What is Tzatziki Sauce? (Beyond the White Gyro Sauce)

You know that question about your desert island food? Tzatziki would be mine. 

At its core, tzatziki is a yogurt-based dip made with strained yogurt (also known as Greek yogurt), cucumber, garlic, lemon juice, and herbs (typically dill or mint).

Referred to by many names, such as Greek Tzatziki sauce, Tzatziki Sauce, and Cucumber Yogurt Sauce, it can be served as a dip, a sauce, or even as a dressing. 

It pairs well with just about anything, from meat to gyros, to Turkish kebabs, to grilled or roasted vegetables.

While many people in the U.S. know it as the white sauce that comes with a gyro, that version is often heavier, sometimes made with mayonnaise or sour cream, and doesn’t always include cucumber. 

My homemade tzatziki sauce recipe is different here. It’s the real thing. The kind of tzatziki you’ll find on tables in homes across Turkiye, Greece, and beyond.

Essential Ingredients for Authentic Tzatziki (And Why They Matter)

The good news is that this easy tzatziki recipe requires only a few simple ingredients and comes together in minutes. You’ll find the full list in the recipe card below, but here are a few helpful tips to keep in mind when shopping:

Tzatziki sauce ingredients from the top view with text on the image.

Full-fat Greek Yogurt (also known as Strained Yogurt): I think the best yogurt for tzatziki is a whole-milk, plain Greek yogurt. It yields a rich and creamy tzatziki dip, a main characteristic of this Mediterranean sauce.  If your container has any liquid sitting on top, be sure to strain that out before using.

You can also use plain, unsweetened yogurt or even low-fat or fat-free yogurt, but the texture will be a bit looser compared to Greek yogurt.

Fresh Cucumber: Either Persian or English cucumbers work well. I like to peel them first, as some cucumber skin can be bitter. Still, it is a personal preference.

I grate them using the large holes on a box grater and then drain them in a mesh sieve. It might seem like an extra step, but thoroughly draining the grated cucumber helps eliminate excess liquid, giving you the thick, creamy consistency that this cucumber tzatziki sauce is known for.

Fresh Garlic Cloves: The traditional version of this Mediterranean yogurt sauce calls for fresh, finely minced garlic. I usually add two cloves per 1 ½ cups of yogurt, but feel free to adjust the amount based on your preferences. 

If you prefer a milder flavor, garlic powder is a fine substitute. Since it’s more concentrated, I recommend using about 1 teaspoon per 1 ½ cups of yogurt.

Fresh Herbs: I like using fresh dill, but fresh mint is another classic option. In Turkiye, it’s also common to use dried dill or mint if fresh isn’t available. That said, I think fresh herbs bring a brighter, more vibrant taste.

Fresh Lemon Juice: Just a squeeze is enough to brighten the flavors and balance the richness of the yogurt.

Kosher Salt and Black Pepper: You won’t need anything beyond basic seasoning here. Start with the amounts listed in the recipe and adjust to taste.

Extra Virgin Olive Oil (Optional): You won’t see olive oil listed in my recipe because my mom never used it. I find that thick, whole-milk yogurt gives the sauce all the richness it needs. However, if you’d like to add it, a tablespoon of olive oil per 1 ½ cups of yogurt is a good starting point.

How to Make Easy Homemade Tzatziki: A Step-by-Step Guide

Making a delicious tzatziki with yogurt, shredded cucumber, and lemon juice doesn’t require any special cooking techniques, so anyone can do it.

A collage of images showing how to strain grated cucumber and make the yogurt mixture.

Step 1 – Grate and drain the cucumber: Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the peeled cucumber and transfer it to a fine-mesh strainer. Press down with a spatula to release the excess moisture. I usually let it sit for a few minutes to help the juices drain completely.

Once drained, you should have about 1 cup of grated cucumber.

Alternatively, you can wrap the shredded cucumber in a clean tea towel and squeeze it by hand to remove as much liquid as possible.

Step 2 – Whisk the yogurt base: In a medium bowl, combine the Greek yogurt, freshly squeezed lemon juice, minced garlic, salt, and black pepper.

Whisk until smooth and creamy. This is also a good time to give it a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

A collage of photos showing how to make tzatziki from scratch.

Step 3 – Add cucumber and herbs: Fold in the drained cucumber and fresh dill or mint. Mix until everything is evenly combined.

Step 4 – Cover and chill:
You can serve it right away, but if you have the time, cover and let it rest in the fridge for at least 30 minutes. This allows the flavors to meld and deepen.

A bowl of tzatziki surrounded with vegetables.
Print

Easy Tzatziki Sauce Recipe

An easy tzatziki sauce recipe that you can make in minutes and serve with all your savory Mediterranean/Middle Eastern dishes.
Course Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 61kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 English Cucumber peeled (or 2 Persian cucumbers)
  • 1 ½ cups Whole Milk Greek Yogurt unsweetened and unflavored
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 cloves fresh garlic peeled and minced finely
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • cup fresh dill or fresh mint

Instructions

  • Using the large holes of a box grater, grate the cucumber. Transfer it into a fine-mesh strainer and strain all of its juices, pressing it with a rubber spatula. Set aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  • In a medium-size mixing bowl, whisk together yogurt, lemon juice, minced garlic, salt and pepper.
  • Using a spatula, fold in the cucumber and dill. Transfer to a bowl.
    Person making the tzatziki in a bowl.
  • If you have time, cover with plastic, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ¼ to 1 ½ cups of tzatziki sauce which is ideal for 4 servings as a condiment. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as written up to 2 days before serving. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. Be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: This sauce will stay fresh for about 3-4 days. Simply place leftovers in an airtight container and keep them in the fridge. If you notice any liquid separation, just give your Tzatziki a good stir before serving.
  • A word on olive oil: My recipe relies on rich yogurt for creaminess and does not require adding any olive oil, unlike some other tzatziki recipes. However, for extra depth, drizzle 1 tbsp extra virgin olive oil on top before serving.
  •  

Nutrition

Calories: 61kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 31mg | Potassium: 245mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 381IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 105mg | Iron: 1mg

Expert Tips from a Lifelong Tzatziki Maker

This recipe is pretty straightforward, but there are a few things I want to point out so you can end up with the best tzatziki on your first try:

  • Don’t skip draining the shredded cucumber: This is the single most important step when it comes to achieving that creamy texture tzatziki is known for. Yes, it’s an extra step, but it makes all the difference.
  • DIY Greek Yogurt: If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can strain plain yogurt at home. Just place a fine-mesh sieve over a bowl and line it with cheesecloth (a paper towel will also work in a pinch). Add the yogurt, cover it, and let it sit in the fridge for a few hours. The longer it sits, the thicker it becomes.
    Since plain yogurt has more liquid, I recommend using about half a cup more than the recipe calls for to account for the liquid that will drain.
  • Avoid overmixing: Once you have folded in the cucumber and herbs, mix only until the ingredients are just combined. Overmixing can cause the cucumber to release more liquid, which may water down the sauce.
  • Do not skip the chilling: To me, the secret to the best tzatziki sauce is letting it rest in the fridge. This time allows the flavors (especially the garlic and fresh herbs) to develop and deepen. Even just 30 minutes makes a difference, but planning for an hour or two can yield even better results.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Make Ahead: You can make this Greek tzatziki sauce recipe a day or two ahead. Just be sure to transfer it to an airtight container and store it in the fridge.

Storage: Leftovers will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Give it a good stir before serving, and if any liquid has collected on top, simply pour it off or drain it before mixing.

Delicious Ways to Serve Tzatziki Sauce in Your Daily Cooking

Images showing food that uses tzatziki.

I may or may not have been caught eating this Mediterranean classic with a spoon. All jokes aside, tzatziki is a staple for a reason. It pairs beautifully with just about any meat or vegetable dish that could use a cooling, creamy contrast. Here are a few of my favorite ways to use it:

Kabobs and Gyros: Simply drizzle it right on top! If you want to try something different, try drizzling this sauce over my Karniyarik recipe (aka Turkish Stuffed Eggplant), Greek Yogurt Chicken, Shish Taouk, or Baked Chicken Kabobs, Chicken Shawarma, or serve it with Turkish Kofte

Sauce for Burgers and Sandwiches: I love using it as a spread for Greek Lamb Burgers (pictured above) or my Chicken Pita Wraps. It adds a creamy contrast and brings everything together.

Vegetables and Vegetable Dishes: A dollop of tzatziki can turn simple roasted eggplant into a delicious appetizer. It’s also a great match for baked zucchini fritters, crispy falafel, or just about any veggie-forward dish you’d serve at a gathering.

With Salads: Tzatziki isn’t just a dip; it makes a fantastic, creamy addition to various salads. I particularly love a dollop alongside or even mixed into my easy Greek salad for an extra layer of freshness.

Grain Bowls: Drizzle it over shawarma chicken bowls (pictured above) or make it part of a DIY Cava bowl. It adds creaminess and brightens the rest of the toppings.

Part of a Meze Platter: Serve it in a bowl as a dip on a large platter along with cheese and crackers, olives, hummus, muhammara, pita bread (or pita chips), and fresh raw vegetables.

Tzatziki Sauce Variations & Substitutions:

  • Dairy-Free/Vegan Options: To make this vegan or dairy-free, use a neutral-flavored plant-based yogurt. I prefer unflavored cashew yogurt, but coconut or almond milk yogurt can also work. Just make sure it’s unsweetened and as thick as possible for the best consistency.
  • Herb Variations: You can easily make this creamy tzatziki sauce your own by switching up the herbs. Fresh dill and mint are classic options, but parsley or chives are also great alternatives. No fresh herbs on hand? You can leave them out and still have a delicious dip.
  • Making it Thinner (like Turkish Cacık): If you have ever been to Turkiye, you’ve probably had cacik, a thinner version of tzatziki. To achieve that texture, simply use plain yogurt instead of Greek yogurt, or stir in about ½ cup of cold water (or more, depending on your preference) until you reach the desired consistency.

FAQs:

How Do You Spell Tzatziki?

The phonetic spelling is /tsaˈtsiːki/. The word for this Greek yogurt cucumber sauce is spelled T-Z-A-T-Z-I-K-I. It is a loanword from Modern Greek, which actually comes from the Turkish word cacık, of unknown origin.

How Do You Pronounce Tzatziki?

So, how do you say Tzatziki? The correct way to pronounce Tzatziki is “tsah-see-key.” Think of the tsah part as how you say “pizza,” without the first two letters.

Can Tzatziki sauce be frozen?

Technically, you can freeze yogurt, but after thawing, it loses its creamy consistency. This is generally true for most savory yogurt-based dressings or sauces. Therefore, I wouldn’t recommend freezing Tzatziki sauce.

Can I use non-fat yogurt?

Yes, you can use any plain yogurt you like. However, I recommend sticking to Greek Yogurt as it is thicker than other yogurt types. The higher the fat content, the more delicious and creamy it would be, but non-fat or low-fat plain yogurt would still do the job.

Do I have to strain the juice of the cucumber?

The correct answer is yes. Some people even go as far as straining yogurt and cucumber in a colander lined with cheesecloth overnight in the fridge. I guess it is because they prefer a thicker consistency. However, in my opinion, the thickness of Tzatziki is a personal preference. If you like yours runny then no need to strain the juices and vice versa.

Do I have to peel the cucumber?

It is a personal preference. I prefer to peel mine as some cucumber skin can be bitter.

Can I substitute sour cream for yogurt?

I don’t usually recommend it, as the flavor and texture are quite different. Sour cream is richer and tangier than yogurt, and it has a higher fat content, which can make the sauce feel heavier than intended.

What can i substitute for greek yogurt in tzatziki sauce?

If you don’t have Greek yogurt, you can use plain (unsweetened) yogurt to make tzatziki. Since it is not as thick as Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), I recommend straining its liquid before use. Simply place it in a fine-mesh strainer lined with cheesecloth and set it in a bowl.

Other Yogurt Sauce Recipes You Might Also Like:

  • My Yogurt Dill Sauce is bright, herby, and perfect for serving with salmon, baked potatoes, or simple roasted vegetables.
  • A drizzle of my Greek yogurt salad dressing instantly turns any salad greens into a refreshing, creamy side that goes with just about any meal.
  • A spoonful of my Yogurt Tahini Sauce adds a creamy, nutty layer to grain bowls, roasted veggies, or just about anything that needs a little something extra.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/easy-to-make-tzatziki-sauce-recipe/feed/ 25
Bulgur Pilaf https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/ https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/#comments Wed, 14 May 2025 11:56:20 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7708 If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s…]]>

If you are unsure about what to do with that bag of bulgur in your pantry, you’re not alone. It’s just not as popular as grains like brown rice or quinoa here in the U.S. But you’re in the right place. 

I grew up eating (and cooking) this ancient grain on the regular, and on this site, you’ll find plenty of approachable and flavorful recipes using bulgur wheat. Start with this Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe, and when you are ready for more, learn How To Prepare and Cook Bulgur like rice or try my Chicken with Bulgur and Tabbouleh Salad recipes.

Turkish bulgur pilaf in a pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

What You Need To Know in a Nutshell

  • What is Bulgur Pilaf? Also referred to as bulgar pilaf, bulgur pilavi, or bulghur pilaf, this traditional dish is made by cooking bulgur with aromatic vegetables and spices. It’s a beloved staple across Mediterranean and Middle Eastern countries, especially in Turkish, Lebanese, and Armenian cuisines. Made with coarse bulgur, it has a chewy texture and a naturally nutty flavor that makes it both hearty and satisfying.
  • Two versions to choose from: Depending on the region (or your own preference), bulgur wheat pilaf can be made with vegetables like onions, tomatoes, and peppers, or kept more basic with toasted vermicelli. Both are equally simple to prepare and delicious in their own way.

How To Make Bulgur Pilaf?

This Mediterranean Bulgur Wheat Pilaf recipe comes together in just a few steps with pantry staples. Here is how you cook it:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  1. Gather your ingredients:  For the full list of ingredients, check out the recipe card below. Here are a few helpful notes and substitution ideas:
    • Bulgur: You’ll find several types of bulgur at the store, but for this recipe, coarse or extra coarse bulgur works best. I usually order mine online (affiliate link), but Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur is a good alternative and easy to find in most grocery stores.
    • Tomato: One large fresh tomato is all you need. If you do not have fresh tomatoes on hand, you can either omit it or add one more tablespoon of tomato paste.
    • Pepper: A small green bell pepper can be used instead of jalapenos.
    • Cooking liquid: For extra flavor, use vegetable stock or chicken stock instead of water.
    • Spices and herbs: Ground cumin and fresh parsley are classic choices, but feel free to experiment with other spices such as ground coriander and paprika. The same applies to fresh herbs.  If you have it on hand, a combination of fresh mint, dill, and parsley would be fantastic in this Mediterranean bulgur recipe.
A collage of images showing how to make bulgur pilaf with tomatoes and chickpeas.
  1. Saute aromatics: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add onion, ground cumin, green pepper, and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Stir in the minced garlic and tomato paste and cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or so.
  2. Add in the rest of the ingredients: Add in bulgur, chopped tomatoes, chickpeas, and your cooking liquid of choice. Season with salt and pepper, and stir to combine everything evenly.
A collage of images showing bulgur wheat pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  1. Let it cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and lower the heat. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
  2. Let it rest & serve: Off the heat, rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork. Garnish with fresh chopped parsley and serve.

Bulgur With Vermicelli – Mom’s Version

A lot of Turkish rice dishes include vermicelli, like the classic Vermicelli Rice Pilaf. So it’s no surprise that bulgur pilaf with vermicelli is also a popular variation. As a matter of fact, it was one of my mom’s signature recipes. 

Bulgur wheat pilaf with vermicelli from the top view.

To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:

  1. Heat oil (or butter): You can use any oil, but as is usually the case, butter makes this pilaf taste better. Heat it on medium heat.
  2. Saute vermicelli: Add in ¼ cup of the vermicelli (or orzo) and saute until it is golden brown. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
  3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur wheat and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
  4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil: Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
  5. Cook: Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.

Expert Tips

  • Use the right bulgur grind: For the best texture, stick with coarse or extra coarse bulgur (sometimes sold as “pilavlik bulgur”). Finer (sold as fine bulgur) varieties tend to become mushy and won’t give you the signature chewy bite that it is known for. If you are new to cooking bulgur and adding it in your recipes, feel free to check out my post I wrote on Types of Bulgur Wheat.
  • Should you rinse bulgur before cooking? It’s totally up to you. Rinsing isn’t required, especially if your bulgur is pre-packaged and clean. But if you’re buying from bulk bins, a quick rinse under cold water is a good idea.
  • Toast for extra flavor: If you have a few extra minutes, toast the bulgur briefly before adding the liquid. It might come as an extra step, but doing so deepens the nutty flavor and adds a subtle complexity to the overall dish.
  • Liquid-to-bulgur ratio: My go-to ratio for 1:2, meaning for every 1 cup of coarse bulgur, you will need 2 cups of liquid. That said, depending on the brand and grind of bulgur, you might need slightly more or less liquid. If the grains still feel firm after the liquid is absorbed, add a splash of hot water, cover, and let it sit a bit longer.
  • Do not skip the resting: Letting the pilaf rest covered after cooking helps the grains fully absorb any remaining moisture and gives you a fluffier final dish.
  • Adjust the seasoning after cooking: Taste your bulgur pilaf before serving and adjust the salt, pepper, or herbs to your liking. While it is optional, a squeeze of lemon juice just before serving can brighten the flavors beautifully.

Serving Suggestions

Traditionally, bulgur pilaf is served with chicken or beef recipes as a side dish. That being said, it can stand on its own as a vegetarian dish, especially if it is served with a side salad. Here are a few of my favorite pairings:

  • Red meat: Bulgur pilaf pairs beautifully with hearty meat dishes, especially the ones with rich sauces that the pilaf can soak up. Try it with my eggplant beef stew or Ina’s pot roast to add a Mediterranean twist to your meal. And if you’re in the mood for something a little lighter, it goes perfectly with lamb meatballs.
  • Chicken: This pilaf is the perfect side dish for classic Middle Eastern chicken recipes. Serve it with juicy Shawarma Chicken or Shish Taouk for a meal that feels special but is super easy to pull together. 
  • Vegetarian: For a simple vegetarian meal, serve the pilaf with creamy cucumber and yogurt sauce (aka tzatziki), yogurt dressing, or a cold glass of ayran. Or, if you’re feeling a bit fancy, use it as a filling in my Vegetarian Stuffed Eggplant recipe—it’s a beautiful dish that looks impressive but is easy enough for a weeknight dinner.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is one of the most popular Turkish recipes on Foolproof Living, and for good reason, it is absolutely delicious. If you try it, please leave a comment and rating below to let me know how it turned out. And don’t forget to tag your photos on Instagram with #foolproofeats so I can see and share your creations!

Turkish bulgur pilaf recipe in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Turkish Bulgur Pilaf Recipe

This Bulgur Pilaf recipe is a classic Middle Eastern/Mediterranean side dish made with simple pantry ingredients. Ready in about 20 minutes, it has a satisfying chewy texture and a subtle nutty taste, making it perfect to serve with meat, chicken, or as a light vegetarian meal.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Vegan, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 22 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tbsp olive oil or butter
  • 1 onion chopped, medium sized (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 green pepper seeded jalapeno or a small bell pepper would work (approximately 1/2 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tbsp tomato paste
  • 1 cup coarse bulgur both coarse and extra coarse bulgur would work for this recipe
  • 1 fresh tomato cut into small cubes (approximately 1 cup)
  • 1 can chickpeas 14 oz. can, drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups water or vegetable broth
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon ground black pepper

Garnishes

  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Saute onion and tomato paste: Heat olive oil in a medium saucepan over medium heat. Add in onion, cumin and green pepper and saute until translucent, 4-5 minutes.
    Person showing how to saute veggies to make bulgur wheat pilaf.
  • Stir in the minced garlic and sautee for 30 seconds. Add in tomato paste and stir constantly for a minute or so.
  • Add in bulgur wheat, tomatoes, chickpeas, and water (or stock). Season it with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine, bring it to a boil, put the lid on, and turn down the heat to low. Let it simmer for 10-12 minutes or until most of the liquid is absorbed.
    Bulgur pilaf before and after it is cooked.
  • Off the heat, allow it to rest for 10 minutes (with the lid on), fluff it with a fork, garnish with parsley, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 cups of bulgur pilaf, which serves four people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Reheat in a pot with a splash of water over medium heat until warmed to your liking.
  • Freezing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, transfer to a freezer-safe container, and freeze for up to 2 months. Thaw it a day in advance in the fridge and warm it up on the stove before you are ready to serve it.
  • Bulgur and Vermicelli Pilaf: An earlier version of this recipe included a more basic bulgur pilaf made without tomatoes, tomato paste, vegetables (onion, pepper, etc.) and chickpeas. It is how my mother made it. To cook Bulgur Pilaf with Vermicelli:
    1. Heat oil (or butter): Heat oil in medium heat.
    2. Saute vermicelli: Add in 1/4 cup vermicelli and saute until it is golden brown for 5-6 minutes while constantly stirring it with a wooden spoon. It should feel like it is almost burning. 
    3. Add in the coarse bulgur wheat: Add in bulgur and saute for 4-5 minutes while constantly stirring.
    4. Add in the liquid & bring it to a boil. Add in your cooking liquid (water, stock, or a combination), salt and pepper. Give it a stir. Bring it to a boil, put the lid on, turn down the heat, and let it simmer for 12-15 minutes.
    5. Rest & Serve: Let it rest (with the lid on) for 10 minutes and then fluff it with a fork before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 661mg | Potassium: 407mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 499IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/moms-bulgur-pilaf/feed/ 49
Lamb Burgers Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/#respond Tue, 06 May 2025 20:00:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=81378 How to Make Lamb Burgers? These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using…]]>

What You Need to Know in a Nutshell

Before we jump into how to make lamb burgers, here are the key things to know that will help you get it just right:

How to cook the lamb patties: I like grilling them during the summer months, but if I make these burgers during the colder months, I cook them in the oven or on the stovetop. You’ll find the cooking instructions for all methods below.

How long does it take to cook? Depending on the thickness of your patties, on the grill, they take about 10–12 minutes. In the oven at 400°F, expect around 15–18 minutes. On the stovetop (using a cast iron skillet), go for 5–6 minutes per side.

Seasoning for lamb burgers: A flavorful blend of cumin, coriander, paprika, and lemon zest gives the ground lamb burgers a Mediterranean-style taste that pairs beautifully with tzatziki.

What to put on lamb burgers: We keep these Greek-style lamb burgers fresh and simple by layering the burger patties with tzatziki sauce, a slice of tomato, pickles, and curly greens. However, other burger toppings like pickled red onions, sumac onions, a dollop of CAVA’s feta cheese dip, or even a spoonful of harissa would also work beautifully, especially if you’re leaning into the Mediterranean flavors.

How to Make Lamb Burgers?

These Mediterranean lamb burgers are quick to prepare and easy to cook. Whether you’re using a grill, oven, or skillet, here’s how to do it with step-by-step photos:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Step 1 Gather your ingredients: You’ll find the complete list in the recipe card below. But here are a few quick ingredient notes and substitutions:

  • Ground Lamb: The base for this lamb patty recipe is ground lamb, which naturally has a higher fat content (typically around 20–25%), making it juicy. If you prefer something slightly leaner or want a milder taste, try a 50/50 mix of ground lamb and ground beef. Lamb and beef burgers still capture that Mediterranean feel but with a milder flavor that some people prefer.
  • Fresh Herbs: Parsley is essential for freshness. Mint is optional, but I recommend using it. Mint adds a bright, cooling note that helps balance the natural gaminess of the lamb.
  • Spices: Cumin, coriander, and paprika create a warm, aromatic base that complements the richness of the lamb. For more depth, you can use a tablespoon of my Mediterranean Spice Blend or Middle Eastern 7 Spice, which work beautifully with these ground lamb patties.
  • Toppings: We used tzatziki, tomato slices, pickles, and greens. For a different sauce for lamb burgers, try my Mint Yogurt Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce, which are quicker to make.
  • Hamburger Buns: Store-bought burger buns work just fine, but if you have the time, I highly recommend making my Brioche Burger Buns.
A collage of photos showing how to make the lamb mixture.

Step 2 Prepare the burger meat: Mix ground lamb, garlic, herbs, spices, lemon zest, salt, and pepper in a large bowl until just combined. Resist the urge to overmix the lamb mixture as it can make patties dense and tough instead of tender and juicy.  

A collage of images showing the lamb patties before and after they are cooked.

Step 3 Form the patties: Shape into four patties, about 4 inches wide. Press a shallow thumbprint in the center of each, which is key to a perfect lamb hamburger patty recipe.

Step 4 Cook the patties: Whether you’re grilling, baking, or pan-searing, you can cook these patties to your preferred level of doneness (here is a temperature chart). For medium, aim for an internal temperature of 145°F (63°C); for well done, cook to 160°F (71°C). The best way to check is by inserting an instant-read thermometer into the center of the patty.

  • On the Grill: Preheat the grill to medium-high heat (400–425°F / 200–220°C). Clean and oil the grates, then place the lamb patties on the grill. Cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium, or 5–6 minutes per side for well done.
  • In the Oven: Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Place the patties on a parchment-lined baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.
  • On the Stove: Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat. Cook the lamb burgers for 5–6 minutes per side, depending on the size of your patties and doneness preference.
The toppings from the top view.

Step 5 Toast the buns & prep your toppings: While the burgers cook, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill or in the oven to toast them lightly. This is also a great time to slice your tomato, rinse the greens, and get your pickles and tzatziki ready for assembly.

An image showing how to prepare lamb burgers.

Step 6 Assemble: Spread tzatziki on the bottom bun, add a thinly sliced tomato, greens, pickles, and the grilled lamb burger patty. Top with more tzatziki and the top bun. Serve right away.

Expert Tips

Here are a few tips to help you get the best results when making this recipe:

  • Thumbprint trick: Don’t skip the small dent in the center of each lamb patty as it helps the burgers cook evenly and keeps them from puffing up in the middle as they cook.
  • The secret to juicy lamb burgers: Mix the ingredients just until combined to avoid a dense texture, and cook the patties only until they reach your desired doneness (145°F (63°C) for medium or 160°F (71°C) for well done). Overmixing or overcooking are the most common reasons for dry burgers.
  • Prevent falling apart: If your lamb burger patties tend to break apart on the grill, try chilling them in the fridge for 30 minutes before cooking and avoid flipping too early. During testing, I found versions of this recipe that use breadcrumbs or egg as a binder. I didn’t find those additions necessary in my version here, but they can be helpful if your mixture feels too soft or loose.
  • Shape slightly larger than the bun: As the lamb burger patties cook, they shrink slightly. To ensure a perfect fit, shape your patties just a bit wider than the buns. They’ll cook down to the correct size.

Serving Suggestions

These lamb hamburgers are easy to pair with a variety of fresh and satisfying sides. Here are some of my favorite ideas:

  • Coleslaw: If I make these lamb burgers for a cookout, I usually serve them with a bright, crunchy slaw like my Red Cabbage Slaw or Mayo-Free Coleslaw, which pairs beautifully and can be made ahead.
  • Mediterranean-inspired salads: Continuing with the Greek/Mediterranean theme, serve these lamb burgers with a Mediterranean Pasta Salad or a Greek Cucumber Tomato Salad—both are refreshing, easy to prep ahead, and complement the flavors of the burgers beautifully.
  • Bean Salads: Serve alongside my Five Beans Salad or Cowboy Caviar for a colorful, protein-packed addition—great for outdoor cookouts.

More Lamb Recipes You Might Like:

If you enjoy cooking with lamb, be sure to check out some of my other go-to lamb recipes like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Ground lamb burger layered with tzatziki sauce from the front.
Print

Lamb Burgers Recipe

These juicy Greek-style lamb burgers are seasoned with warm Mediterranean spices and topped with tzatziki, fresh tomato, and crisp greens. They are quick to prepare and easy to cook on the grill, stovetop, or in the oven. Perfect for a weeknight dinner or casual cookout.
Course Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 546kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • 2 garlic cloves peeled and minced
  • 2 tablespoons fresh parsley chopped finely
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped finely optional
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper

For Serving

  • 4 burger buns sliced in half
  • 1 cup Tzatziki Sauce or yogurt dill sauce
  • 1 tomato sliced
  • ½ cup sliced pickles dill or bread-and-butter, depending on your preference
  • 4 leaves curly greens or any other salad greens

Instructions

  • Place 1lb ground lamb, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 2 tablespoons of fresh parsley, 2 tablespoons of fresh mint, 1 teaspoon of ground cumin, 1 teaspoon of ground coriander, ½ teaspoon of paprika, 1 teaspoon of kosher salt, and ½ teaspoon of ground black pepper in a large bowl.
    Lamb mixture before and after it is mixed.
  • Using clean hands, mix until all the ingredients are fully combined, being careful not to overwork the meat.
  • Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions and shape them into 4-inch-wide patties. As you shape them, remember that they shrink slightly during the cooking process so it is best to make them a bit larger than your burger bun.
    Lamb patties being shaped and grilled.
  • Use your thumb to gently press a shallow indent in the center of each patty—this helps them cook evenly and prevents puffing on the grill. Cover and set aside while you preheat the grill.

To Cook On the Grill:

  • Preheat a gas grill to medium-high heat (around 400–425°F). Once hot, scrape the grates clean and brush them with olive oil.
  • Place the lamb patties on the grill and cook for 3–4 minutes per side for medium (145°F) or 5–6 minutes for well done (160°F), depending on your preference. Once cooked, place them on a plate, cover with aluminum foil and let them rest for 2-3 minutes for the juices to redistribute.

To Cook in the Oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 400°F (200°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Transfer the patties to the baking sheet and bake for 15–18 minutes, flipping them halfway through.

To Cook on the Stove:

  • Heat a tablespoon of oil in a cast-iron, grill pan, or non-stick skillet over medium heat.
  • Place the lamb patties on the hot skillet and cook for 5–6 minutes (or more, depending on your doneness preference) per side.
  • While the patties are cooking, place the buns on the cooler side of the grill (or in the oven or the skillet) to warm them through.

To Assemble

  • To make lamb burgers, spread some tzatziki (or yogurt dill sauce) on the bottom half of each bun. Add a slice of tomato, some salad greens, a few pickle slices, and a grilled lamb patty. Spoon a little more tzatziki over the top of the meat, then place the top bun on and serve.
    Ground lamb burgers on a plate with yogurt sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four lamb burgers. The nutritional values below are per serving and include the toppings. 
  • Other herbs: While I opted for fresh parsley and mint, you can use other fresh herbs like rosemary and oregano in smaller quantities (about 1 to 2 teaspoons each) as they tend to be more potent.
  • Make ahead: You can mix and shape the lamb burger patties up to a day in advance. Store them covered in the fridge until you’re ready to cook.
  • Leftovers: Cooked lamb burgers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Reheat gently on the stove or in the oven to avoid drying them out.
  • Freezing: 
    • To freeze raw, place uncooked patties on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper and freeze until solid. Then transfer to a freezer-safe bag or container with parchment between each patty. They’ll keep for up to 2 months. Thaw in the fridge overnight before cooking.
    • To freeze cooked lamb patties, bring them to room temperature, cover tightly with plastic wrap, and freeze for up to a month.

Nutrition

Calories: 546kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 1305mg | Potassium: 454mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 892IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 194mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/lamb-burgers/feed/ 0
Quinoa Tabbouleh https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/ https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/#comments Sat, 01 Mar 2025 12:47:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=20389 Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring…]]>

Growing up in a Mediterranean country, tabbouleh, or kisir, was a staple in our house. It was my mom’s go-to spring and summer salad, which she paired with pretty much everything. 

This version, made with protein-rich quinoa (a fantastic substitute for bulgur), is the latest addition to my Quinoa Salad recipes collection, and it’s just as delicious as the traditional recipe. If you love quinoa as much as I do, be sure to check out my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad for another fresh and vibrant option. 

Quinoa tabouli being drizzled with the dressing.

And if you’ve ever wondered about the different names and spellings—tabbouleh, tabouli—they’re simply variations of the same name, reflecting different versions of the Arabic word.

Recipe Ingredients:

This tabouli quinoa recipe is made with simple ingredients that make a bright and refreshing salad. The fresh herbs and crisp vegetables provide a delicious contrast to the fluffy quinoa, while the tangy lemon dressing ties everything together beautifully. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Quinoa: This quinoa tabbouleh salad will work with any type of quinoa. Red, black, tricolor and white quinoa would all work. It is imperative to rinse quinoa before cooking if you want it to taste good. 
  • Cooking liquid: While water works just fine, I highly recommend cooking your quinoa in vegetable stock. It adds depth of flavor, ensuring that the base of your quinoa tabouli salad is tasty right from the start.
  • Fresh lemon juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is my favorite acid for the dressing used in this recipe, but in a pinch, white wine vinegar can be used. The flavors would be slightly different but still be great.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil
  • Fresh herbs: A mix of fresh herbs is key to classic tabouli, and this quinoa version is no exception. I like to use a cup of fresh flat-leaf parsley, a cup of fresh dill, and half a cup of fresh mint leaves, but there’s no strict rule—adjust to your taste! You can stick to just parsley and dill or skip the dill altogether if it’s not your favorite.
  • Fresh tomatoes: I prefer using colorful cherry tomatoes for their sweetness and vibrant look, but any variety will work—just be sure to chop them into small pieces for even distribution.
  • Cucumber: I prefer Persian cucumbers as they are crunchy, but English cucumbers would also work.
  • Scallions: Green onions provide a mild onion flavor that ties everything together. While it is not traditional, finely chopped red onion could be a good substitute in a pinch. 
  • Seasonings: I kept it simple with just kosher salt and pepper in this tabbouleh quinoa salad recipe, but you can add a touch of ground cumin, ground coriander, or a pinch of red pepper flakes to the dressing for extra depth of flavor.

Optional Add-Ins

While the recipe for quinoa tabouli I’m sharing stays close to the traditional version, you can easily customize it with a few extra ingredients. These aren’t traditional, but they add delicious new flavors:

  • Feta Cheese: A handful of crumbled feta adds a creamy, salty contrast that pairs perfectly with the Mediterranean flavors.
  • Kalamata Olives: Their briny, tangy taste enhances the salad and adds an extra punch of flavor.
  • Garlic: The traditional tabbouleh salad recipe does not use garlic in the lemon dressing, but you can always add a minced garlic clove if you are a fan.
  • Chickpeas: Again, the classic tabbouleh recipe does not use chickpeas, but sometimes I add a can of (drained and rinsed) chickpeas to make it even more satisfying.

How To Make Quinoa Tabbouleh?

Making this quinoa tabouli recipe is easy, and it comes together in just a few steps in under 20 minutes. Yes, there is a bit of chopping involved, but the result is a refreshing and wholesome dish that you’ll want to make on repeat.

A collage of images showing how to cook quinoa and make the dressing.
  1. Cook the Quinoa: Place the rinsed quinoa in a medium saucepan along with your cooking liquid and salt. Bring to a boil, reduce to a simmer, cover, and cook for about 10-12 minutes until the liquid is absorbed. Let it rest for 10 minutes, then fluff with a fork and transfer it to a large bowl to cool.
  2. Make the Dressing: While the quinoa is cooking, prepare the dressing. In a small bowl, whisk lemon juice, olive oil, salt, and black pepper until fully combined. 
  3. Chop the fresh herbs and veggies – Finely chop the fresh parsley, dill, and mint. Quarter the cherry tomatoes, dice the cucumbers and thinly slice the scallions. Add the chopped herbs, tomatoes, cucumbers, and scallions to the cooled quinoa.
Tabbouleh with quinoa in a salad bowl.
  1. Assemble your tabouli quinoa salad – Drizzle the cooked quinoa and the veggies with the dressing and gently toss to combine.
  2. Serve – Taste for seasoning and add more salt, pepper, or lemon juice as needed. Serve immediately or refrigerate for later.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

My favorite thing about this quinoa tabbouleh salad recipe is that it stores well. As a matter of fact, since the flavors meld together over time, it actually tastes even better the next day. Here is how I make-ahead and store leftovers:

  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Before serving, give it a quick stir, taste for seasoning, and refresh it with a squeeze of lemon and more seasoning if needed.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze this dish, but I do not recommend it as it will lose most of its fresh flavors when thawed.

Expert Tips:

This recipe is simple and easy to make, but to ensure the best quinoa tabbouleh, here are a few key tips to help you get it right on your first try:

  • Chopping by hand vs. using a food processor: I like to chop the herbs by hand using a sharp chef’s knife as it gives me more control over the texture, ensuring evenly chopped herbs. Plus, there is no risk of over-processing, which can turn herbs into a paste. However, if you prefer a food processor, pulse in short bursts instead of running it continuously to prevent the herbs from turning into a paste.
  • Herb stems: When it comes to herbs, you can chop the parsley and dill stems, as they are tender and flavorful. However, with mint, I prefer using only the leaves unless you’re growing your own and it’s super fresh.
  • Are you short on time? You can prep the herbs and veggies a day in advance and store them in the fridge until you’re ready to put it all together.
  • Let the quinoa cool a bit: You can mix everything together while the quinoa is still warm for a slightly different texture and flavor, but letting it cool first helps keep the herbs fresh and vibrant. I usually cook the quinoa a day in advance—not only does this save time, but it also ensures it’s perfectly cooled and ready to use.
  • Cooking quinoa: While I opted to cook quinoa on the stovetop, you can cook quinoa in the microwave, in an instant pot, and a rice cooker. Feel free to pick the method that works best for you. Also, I usually cook a big batch and freeze some for later. If you have some cooked quinoa on hand, this quinoa tabbouleh comes together in minutes.
  • Serve at room temperature: This tabouli recipe with quinoa tastes best when served at room temperature, allowing the flavors to fully develop. If you made it in advance, take it out of the fridge 15 minutes before serving for the best taste and texture.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this gluten-free tabbouleh salad with any protein or vegetarian main or just by itself for a light meal. Below are a few of my favorite pairings:

Other Quinoa Salads You Might Also Like

If you make this recipe for tabbouleh salad with quinoa, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to leave a star rating and a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This recipe was originally published in September 2018 and updated in March 2025 with new step-by-step photos and more helpful tips. The recipe itself remains the same, with only minor edits for clarification.

Quinoa tabbouleh in a salad bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Quinoa Tabbouleh Recipe

Traditional Mediterranean Tabbouleh Salad made with a twist. Made with protein-rich quinoa, this vegan and gluten-free Quinoa Tabbouleh Salad Recipe is the perfect year-round salad for all your indoor and outdoor parties.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean, Turkish
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 205kcal

Ingredients

For the Quinoa:

  • 1 cup uncooked quinoa rinsed
  • 1 ¾ cups water or vegetable stock
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Dressing:

  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed – plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt more to taste as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Tabbouleh:

  • 1 cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 cup fresh dill chopped (optional)
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves chopped
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and chopped or 1 English cucumber
  • 3-4 scallions sliced thinly both white and green parts

Instructions

  • Place 1 cup quinoa in a saucepan along with 1 ¾ cups of vegetable stock (or water) and a half teaspoon of kosher salt. Stir to combine, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat.
    Person showing how to cook quinoa.
  • Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and cook for 10-12 minutes or until water is fully absorbed. Turn the heat off and let it rest for 10 minutes. Fluff it with a fork, transfer it to a large salad bowl, and let it cool while working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the dressing by whisking together 4 tablespoons of freshly squeezed lemon juice, ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, and ¼ teaspoon black pepper in a bowl. Set it aside.
    A collage of images showing how to make the dressing and prep the ingredients.
  • To assemble the quinoa tabbouleh, add 1 cup of chopped parsley, 1 cup of fresh dill, ½ cup fresh mint, 1 cup of quartered cherry tomatoes, 2 chopped Persian cucumbers, 3 thinly sliced green onions into the bowl with the quinoa.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing. Give it a gentle toss.
    A bowl of tabouli with quinoa is being drizzled with the dressing.
  • Taste for seasoning and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5 to 6 cups of tabbouleh, ideal for serving six adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Using dill: Most tabouli recipes are made with fresh parsley and mint, but my mom always added fresh dill, so I followed in her footsteps. If you are not a fan, you can omit using dill (and use more parsley or mint instead.)
  • A quick note on chopping herbs: Traditional tabbouleh is made with finely chopped herbs for a light, delicate texture, but if you prefer a rougher chop, that works too! It all comes down to personal preference.
  • Make Ahead: If preparing in advance, cook and cool the quinoa, chop the veggies, and make the dressing a day or two in advance. Store them separately in airtight containers in the fridge. Toss everything together about an hour before serving for the best texture and flavor.
  • Storing Leftovers: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Before serving, taste for seasoning and add more lemon juice and salt and pepper if needed. 

Nutrition

Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 408mg | Potassium: 404mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1812IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 66mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/quinoa-tabbouleh/feed/ 22
Chicken Shawarma Bowl https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/#comments Tue, 25 Feb 2025 22:15:45 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80344 During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a…]]>

During the week, all-in-one dinner bowls like this and my  DIY CAVA bowl are a satisfying, time-saving option. With a little bit of advanced preparation, you can turn this popular street food (typically served with pita bread) into a hearty shawarma rice bowl perfect for a quick weeknight dinner. If chicken isn’t your preference, you can also make this shawarma bowl recipe with my classic Beef Shawarma.

Chicken shawarma bowl served with rice and toppings from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This is a wonderful recipe to make with leftover chicken shawarma, and it comes together very quickly if you have leftovers. Otherwise, you can make your chicken shawarma meal from scratch. You can find all of the ingredients at your everyday grocery store—no specialty shopping is required.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on the image.
  • For The Marinade
    • Chicken: I used boneless skinless chicken thighs in this deconstructed chicken shawarma, which gives the best flavor and texture. But if you’d prefer to swap in chicken breasts, they will also work well. 
    • Kosher salt
    • Shawarma seasoning: My homemade spice blend, made with flavorful spices like ground cumin, paprika, turmeric, coriander, cardamom, and cinnamon, is easy to make and great to have on hand. But if you’d prefer to buy a ready-made jar, here’s my favorite one (affiliate link). 
    • Lemon juice
    • Extra Virgin Olive oil 
    • Garlic: I prefer fresh garlic cloves for the most impact but garlic powder could be used for a milder garlic flavor.
  • For The Rice
    • Water or Stock: While water is sufficient, using either vegetable stock or chicken broth when cooking your rice will give it more flavor.
    • Unsalted butter: I prefer unsalted butter so that I can adjust the salt but if all you have is salted butter, omit the additional Kosher salt. Alternatively, you can also use olive oil to cook your rice,
    • Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper
    • Rice: For my chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe, I used long-grain white rice. While I know it is controversial, I prefer to rinse my rice before cooking it.
  • Toppings For The Bowls
    • Cherry tomatoes: Look for fresh, crisp cherry tomatoes and cut them into quarters. Regular or grape tomatoes will also work if that’s what you have available.
    • English cucumber: Persian cucumbers are also an option. 
    • Curly salad greens: These can be one type of lettuce or a blend of various kinds. The key here is that you want a more delicate, curly leaf to slice thinly for texture in your shawarma chicken bowl.
    • Dill pickles: You can purchase these at the store, or pickle your own in advance. The zesty crunch these pickles provide makes them one of the chicken shawarma toppings you don’t want to skip!
    • Pickled red onions: If you’d like to make your own, here’s my pickled red onions recipe. Storebought is also ok to use. 
    • Tzatziki: While you can find many tzatziki options at the grocery store, making your own tzatziki using plain Greek yogurt, cucumbers, and fresh lemon juice is easy and extra tasty. 
    • Hummus: This is an optional ingredient that adds some creaminess to your chicken shawarma bowls. Again, you can select any version at the store, or you can make my Mediterranean Hummus in advance. 
    • Lemon: A couple of lemon wedges, served on the side, are optional for a touch of brightness as a finisher. 

Ingredient Substitutions

One of the best parts about this chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe is that it is endlessly customizable. There are so many different varieties that you can make, depending on which ingredients you have on hand or simply prefer. Here are some common substitutions you can use:

How to Make Chicken Shawarma Bowls?

Chicken shawarma over rice is a straightforward recipe that anyone can make. With a little advanced prep, you can even throw your shawarma bowls together quickly on a busy weeknight for a quick and easy dinner. 

A collage of image showing how to prepare chicken shawarma with rice.
  1. Prepare your chicken. Pat 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs dry with paper towels and season them with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
  2. Season your chicken and allow time to marinate. Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic to the bowl with your chicken in it. Mix it all together using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  3. Cook your marinated chicken shawarma. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until the internal temperature of a chicken thigh registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes more, while watching it closely to prevent burning.
  4. Prepare your chicken shawarma for your bowls. Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well.)
A collage of photos showing how to make rice and assemble the bowl.
  1. Cook the rice. While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. In a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat, then add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork.
  2. Assemble your chicken shawarma bowls. To assemble the shawarma chicken and rice, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.

How to Meal Prep & Store Leftovers?

My chicken shawarma bowls recipe can be adapted for your weekly meal prep routine. Here are a few simple instructions to ensure the optimal result: 

  • Meal Prep: How you prepare your shawarma meal in advance depends on how you prefer to eat it. Do you plan to enjoy it hot, or do you not mind eating it cold/at room temperature? 
    If you’d like to eat your chicken rice shawarma hot, then I recommend you store your rice and chicken together, keeping the rest of the toppings separate. This way, when you go to reheat your bowls, you can heat only the shawarma chicken and rice, then add the toppings afterward. If you don’t mind eating your chicken shawarma bowls cold or at room temperature, feel free to store everything together when you meal prep your bowls. 
  • Storing Leftovers: The same instructions as above apply here with any leftovers you have. Store the rice and chicken together separately from the toppings if you plan to eat it again hot. As long as they are kept in an airtight container in the fridge, they should be fresh for up to 3 days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat rice and chicken in a low-heat oven (around 300 degrees F) and then add the toppings right before serving.
Chicken Shawarma Rice Bowls with fresh lemon slices on the side.

Expert Tips

When it comes to all of the chicken shawarma bowl recipes you’ll find, this one is achievable and foolproof. Here are a couple extra tips that I have for you to ensure a seamless preparation experience in your own kitchen:

  • Feel free to cook your chicken in the manner you prefer. While the recipe below instructs you to cook your chicken thighs on a sheet pan in the oven, they will also come out just as delicious if you choose to grill them on a barbeque, or if you choose to use a cast iron skillet on the stovetop. You can find the details of each method in our chicken shawarma recipe.
  • Marinating your chicken will result in the best flavor. My mom always marinated our chicken shawarma overnight, allowing the spices to fully infuse the meat. This extra time helps the flavors develop and makes the chicken even more tender. However, if you’re short on time, you can cook it right away—shawarma seasoning is already packed with bold, aromatic flavors that will still shine through.
  • Short on time? Take the Trader Joe’s shortcut. If you live in the US and have access to Trader Joe’s, here’s a hot tip: The packaged chicken shawarma they sell at Trader Joe’s is fantastic and takes about 20 minutes to cook in the oven. It is a fantastic shortcut to make this shawarma chicken bowl in less than 30 minutes for a quick weeknight dinner. 
  • Make it lighter. If you want to cut down on calories, you can skip the rice and assemble your shawarma bowls over a bed of lettuce or cauliflower rice (for a low-carb and keto friendly option) instead. Additionally, you can add other veggies like thinly sliced red bell peppers, cucumbers, and radishes. 
  • Serve it as a part of a larger meal. While this recipe is a complete meal on its own, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with chicken shawarma sides like warm pita bread, baba ganoush, muhammara, or a fresh cucumber and tomato salad.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this Healthy Chicken Shawarma Bowls recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma bowl garnished with pickled red onions from the top view.
Print

Chicken Shawarma Bowl Recipe

If you’re wondering how to eat chicken shawarma beyond the usual pita, this versatile grain bowl is the answer. Meal prep-friendly and easy to customize, this chicken shawarma and rice recipe transforms a classic shawarma plate into a hearty rice bowl with all the authentic Middle Eastern toppings like tzatziki sauce, hummus, and pickled red onions.
Course Lunch, Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 747kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade:

  • 1 ½ lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons shawarma seasoning
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Rice:

  • 2 cups vegetable stock or water or chicken stock
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter or olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup long-grain white rice rinsed and drained

For The Bowls:

  • 1 ½ cups cherry tomatoes quartered
  • 1 English cucumber cut into small pieces, or 3 Persian cucumbers
  • 1 ½ cup curly salad greens rinsed and sliced thinly (or any other salad greens)
  • ½ cup pickled cucumber sliced (aka dill pickles)
  • ½ cup pickled red onions
  • 1 cup tzatziki sauce or yogurt tahini sauce
  • 1 cup hummus optional
  • 4 wedges of a lemon

Instructions

  • Pat dry 1 ½ pounds of chicken thighs with paper towels and season with 1 ½ teaspoon of kosher salt on both sides. Transfer them to a large bowl.
    Person preparing chicken for the chicken shawarma rice bowl recipe.
  • Add 2 tablespoons of shawarma seasoning, ¼ cup of lemon juice, ¼ cup of olive oil, and 2 cloves of fresh minced garlic. Mix well using kitchen tongs to coat the chicken with the marinade. Cover the chicken with stretch film and marinate it in the refrigerator for an hour or overnight.
  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.).
  • Arrange the marinated chicken on the baking sheet on a single layer and place it on the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).
    Chicken shawarma before and after it is cooked.
  • Let the chicken rest for 5 minutes, then slice it into ½ inch strips (or you can cut it into cubes as well).
  • While the chicken is cooking, cook the rice. Into a medium saucepan, add 2 cups of water (or stock), 1 tablespoon of unsalted butter, and 1 teaspoon of kosher salt. Bring to a boil over medium-high heat. Add the rinsed rice, reduce the heat down to low, cover, and cook until rice is tender, about 15-17 minutes. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10 minutes (do not remove the lid); right before serving, fluff it with a fork and season with black pepper.
    A collage of images showing cooking the rice and the assembled chicken shawarma bowl.
  • To assemble the chicken shawarma bowls, divide the rice among four bowls. Top it off with sliced shawarma chicken, a handful of cherry tomatoes, sliced cucumbers, salad greens, pickled cucumbers, pickled red onions, and a generous dollop of hummus and tzatziki.
  • Serve right away.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes four adult servings of chicken shawarma bowls. The nutrition values below include optional toppings like hummus and tzatziki.
  • Meal prep: If preferred, you can assemble it in airtight meal prep containers. If you go in that direction, I recommend storing cooked chicken and rice together and adding the toppings right before serving the most fresh shawarma rice bowls. 
  • Storing: Bring leftovers to room temperature, place in an airtight container and keep in the fridge for upto 3 days.
  • Marinading: The one-hour (or overnight) marinading is optional. If you are short on time, you can cook chicken right away.

Nutrition

Calories: 747kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 44g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 179mg | Sodium: 2615mg | Potassium: 896mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 948IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 159mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-bowl/feed/ 2
Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir) https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/#comments Thu, 06 Feb 2025 14:24:32 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80042 Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many…]]>

Growing up in Turkey, çilbir aka Turkish poached eggs, was a breakfast staple. As you have seen in so many of our Turkish cuisine recipes, our culture is big on using strained yogurt (commonly referred to as Greek yogurt) as a complement to our savory dishes. Thus, for me as a Turkish child, Greek yogurt and eggs for breakfast were frequent delights—and ones I still crave regularly as an adult in the US.

Turkish eggs placed on a plate with yogurt and spicy butter sauce and garnished with herbs.

What Are Turkish Eggs (Cilbir)?

Cilbir eggs (pronounced “chull-burr”) are essentially eggs and yogurt for breakfast. To make this Turkish eggs recipe, you prepare a garlic yogurt sauce and a chili butter sauce for your plate’s base, then you poach your eggs to place on top, and use crusty bread as your serving spoon to swirl the velvety combo together.

The tang of the yogurt and the zing of the chili sauce give the Turkish-style eggs a surprising pop that will leave you licking the plate. The best part is that while it looks like something you’d be served at a top-tier brunch restaurant, it comes together quickly and without fuss in your own kitchen.

Ingredients and Substitutions

A short list of ingredients and four simple components make this Turkish breakfast recipe something that is 100% achievable on both weekday and weekend mornings in under 25 minutes. Here’s what you’ll need to prepare this Turkish yogurt and eggs recipe:

The ingredients for cilbir from the top view.
  • For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:
    • Plain Greek yogurt: Since this is a savory dish, it is important to select plain, unsweetened yogurt. Strained, as known as Greek yogurt, works best, but if all you have is regular yogurt, you can use that as well. If you have the time, you can place it over a cheesecloth-lined strainer and let it drip for a few hours to have a similar, thick consistency to Greek yogurt.
    • Fresh garlic clove: We only use 1 clove in our Turkish çılbır recipe, but you’re welcome to add more if you want a more intense garlic flavor. 
    • Lemon juice: Freshly squeezed from 1 lemon works best—just be sure to avoid dropping in any seeds. 
    • Kosher salt and black pepper
  • For the Poached Eggs:
    • Distilled white vinegar: We use a small amount in this Turkish egg dish as a tool to help our eggs coagulate more quickly during the poaching process. Not to worry—you won’t notice much of a vinegar flavor in the final dish. While distilled white vinegar is the traditional ingredient here, you’re also welcome to substitute in apple cider vinegar or white wine vinegar for the same effect. 
    • Eggs: We used large eggs, but extra large eggs would also work just fine.
  • For the Spicy Butter Sauce:
    • Unsalted butter: If you’d prefer to use salted butter instead, please be sure to adjust the additional salt to taste. We think this yogurt eggs recipe is best made with butter, but if you’d rather use oil, you may swap in olive oil or a combination of the two. 
    • Turkish red pepper flakes: We recommend that you use Urfa chili pepper or Aleppo pepper, which is also known as “pul biber.” If you can’t get your hands on it, you can use any chili flakes you have in your spice drawer. Also, if you are serving Turkish eggs and yogurt to children or those who cannot handle spicy foods, you can use paprika only. 
    • Sweet paprika: We prefer sweet paprika but smoked paprika can also be used.
    • Kosher salt
  • For Serving:
    • Fresh herbs: Depending on your palate, you can finish this dish off with a sprinkling of either fresh dill, parsley, or mint. Sumac is also an excellent Turkish seasoning to garnish this dish. 
    • Crusty bread: Your bread is used as a vehicle for scooping up the ultra-creamy Turkish eggs with yogurt. It is usually served with crusty bread such as our  No Knead Olive Bread, No Knead Artisan Bread, or if you want to do it as we do it in Turkiye, you can serve it with Simit or Pita Bread to scoop up the smooth, savory fusion of eggs and yogurt. Once you try it, you will know why it is one of the most popular Turkish egg recipes!

How to Make Turkish Eggs?

Yogurt and eggs for breakfast come together in a few simple steps. If you follow these step by step instructions, you’ll end up with a delectable way to start your day, Mediterranean-style.

Steps showing how to make Turkish eggs in a collage of photos.
  1. Yogurt with eggs starts with the yogurt sauce! In this first step, you’ll whisk together the yogurt, fresh garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl. Then, simply cover it and set it aside so it can come to room temperature while you prepare your eggs. 
  2. Poaching the eggs is next, but don’t be intimidated—it’s easier than you think. Fill a medium saucepan with water that’s at least 4 inches deep and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. This is when you stir in the vinegar, which is crucial for perfectly poached eggs.
  3. Draining the raw eggs first is important. While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine-mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg into it. Be very gentle at this step—you want to keep your yolk fully intact. Allow the excess watery egg whites to drop through the strainer, then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  4. Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside. (You’re going to use this to dry off your cooked eggs!)
  5. When you’re ready to poach your eggs, we recommend that you cook no more than two at a time, otherwise it can get overwhelming. First, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and then cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny. 
  6. Dry the cooked eggs as they come out of the water. Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon (draining the excess water) and then transfer it to the paper-towel-lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs, cooking each set two at a time.
  7. Immediately before serving, melt the butter in a small pan or skillet. This step comes together quickly, so we find it easiest to work with butter cut into smaller pieces. Next, add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt to your melted butter. Allow the combo to cook for 15-20 seconds, or until the butter starts to foam and sizzle. Do not let it brown!
  8. Plate your eggs with yogurt. Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Then, add two poached eggs on top of the yogurt sauce. Finally, drizzle it all with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  9. Garnish your dish. Using the fresh herbs of your choice—parsley, dill, or mint—sprinkle them over the top along with a pinch of salt and pepper, to taste. Here is where you could also use sumac, if you’re interested. Repeat the same process for the second serving in its own dish. Serve immediately while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The truth is, this is a dish that is meant to be made and enjoyed at the moment. Turkish eggs breakfast is simple though, so there’s not too much prep that needs to be done ahead of time—it’s already a streamlined recipe.

  • To Make Ahead: If you’d like, the component that you can make in advance is the garlic yogurt sauce. Simply mix it together and place it in the fridge. We recommend you allow it to come to room temperature before serving. 
  • To Store: Unfortunately, there’s really no good way to store poached eggs and yogurt that’s already been warmed, so eat up! 
Turkish eggs with greek yogurt on a plate served with toast on the side.

Expert Tips

If you’re looking for Turkish egg breakfast perfection, it’s definitely within reach if you take note of this insider advice:

  • Start with room-temperature eggs eggs. It is best to take your eggs out of the fridge 15-20 minutes before you are ready to poach them, as cold eggs straight from the fridge can lower the water temperature too much, which can lead to uneven cooking and a looser white.
  • Get yourself some fresh eggs for the best results. In his article on poaching eggs, my favorite food scientist/teacher, Kenji Lopez-Alt, says, “Fresh eggs have tighter whites and yolks that help them retain their shape better as they cook.” So, using fresh eggs, you will end up with perfectly poached eggs without those whispy white floaters.
  • Do not skip straining your raw eggs. Straining the egg before poaching helps remove the thin, watery part of the egg white, which is what tends to create those wispy strands in the water. By removing this excess liquid, you’re left with a firmer white that wraps neatly around the yolk, resulting in a more compact, poached egg.
  • Only poach two eggs at a time. The poaching process moves more quickly than you think, so sticking to two eggs at a time prevents you from getting overwhelmed and damaging the eggs due to rushing and overcrowding in the pan. 
  • Bring your yogurt to room temperature before plating. You do not want your hot eggs and hot chili butter sauce interacting with cold yogurt. That is why we recommend making the garlic yogurt sauce first so that it can come to room temperature while you are poaching the eggs.
  • Watch your butter—it burns easily. Your chili butter sauce is the final step because it is practically done instantaneously. Do not step away or leave it in the pan too long, as it will brown and burn, thus becoming unappetizing. 
  • Check your eggs for doneness. While this is more of a personal preference, runny yolks are one of the characteristics of this egg yogurt recipe. You will want to watch your eggs and remove them when they have reached the level of runniness you desire in your yolks. While it’s not traditional, soft fried eggs are acceptable if you don’t enjoy poached eggs. 
  • Presentation matters. This is an Instagram-worthy recipe. To achieve a finished dish like the one in our photos, be sure to plate as instructed by swirling the yogurt on the plate, then placing the eggs on top, then drizzling your chili butter sauce. The fresh herb topping gives a green flash of color that you won’t want to skip. 
  • Serve immediately. This is not the type of dish that you want to leave sitting around. Poached eggs are meant to be served right away, particularly here since you’ve just topped them with hot chili butter sauce.

FAQs

Where did Turkish eggs come from?

Turkish eggs originated during the Ottoman Empire, first appearing as a recipe in a book in 1876. While there have been a few variations on the dish over the centuries (cinnamon, onions, and tomato have made appearances), this Turkish eggs with Greek yogurt recipe has mostly stood the test of time as it is outlined here.

How do you pronounce çılbır?

The cilbir pronunciation isn’t as tricky as it looks. The ç character is pronounced like the English letter combination of “ch”. Then, the full word sounds like, chull-burr.

If you make your own Turkish Eggs Recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Turkish Recipes You Might Like

Turkish eggs recipe on a plate with bread on the side from the top view.
Print

Turkish Eggs Recipe (Cilbir)

Turkish eggs are a visually stunning dish that brings the bold flavors of the Mediterranean to your breakfast table. A low-carb, high-protein recipe, it is made by placing poached eggs on a bed of creamy, garlicky yogurt and drizzling it with a rich, spiced butter sauce. Served with crusty bread for scooping, every bite offers a perfect balance of textures and flavors—making it a standout in any Turkish breakfast spread.
Course Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 2 servings
Calories 346kcal

Ingredients

For the Garlic Yogurt Sauce:

  • 1 cup unsweetened plain Greek yogurt room temperature
  • 1 clove fresh garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Poached Eggs:

  • 1 tablespoon white vinegar
  • 4 large eggs

For the Chili Butter Sauce:

  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter* cut into pieces
  • 1 teaspoon Urfa or Aleppo pepper any red pepper flakes you have on hand
  • ½ teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

For Serving:

  • 1 tablespoon of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and/or mint
  • Sliced bread or toast

Instructions

  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together the yogurt, garlic, lemon juice, salt, and pepper in a bowl, cover it, and set it aside. I intentionally do this first so that it can come to room temperature while I poach the eggs.
  • To poach the eggs, fill a medium saucepan with water (it should be at least 4 inches deep) and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Once it comes to a boil, turn the heat down to low and let it come to a simmer. Stir in the vinegar.
  • While you are waiting for the water to come to a boil, place a fine mesh strainer over a small bowl and crack an egg while being super gentle to make sure not to disturb the yolk. Let the excess loose (watery) egg whites drop through and then transfer it into a ramekin. Repeat the same process for the rest of the eggs.
  • Place a sheet of paper towel on a large plate and set it aside.
  • When ready to poach the eggs, stir the simmering water to create a vortex in the middle, carefully drop the egg in the middle, and cook for 3 to 3 ½ minutes until the whites are firm and the yolk is set but still soft and runny.
  • Carefully remove the egg using a slotted spoon and then transfer it to the paper-towel lined plate. Repeat the same process with the rest of the eggs*.
  • Right before serving, melt the butter in a small skillet. Add the Urfa chili pepper (or any red pepper flakes) and salt. Let it cook, stirring gently with a wooden spoon, for 15-20 seconds until the butter starts to foam and sizzle and the color turns to a hazelnutty brown.
  • To assemble: Using the back of a large spoon, spread half of the yogurt sauce on a plate. Add two poached eggs on top and drizzle them with the sizzling chili butter sauce.
  • Garnish with fresh parsley or chopped dill; sprinkle it with a pinch of salt and pepper to taste. Repeat the same process for the second serving. Serve immediately while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 2 people with each portion serving two eggs. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving of bread/toast.
  • Butter: You can use salted butter, but if you do, omit the additional salt.
  • Cooking eggs: We recommend poaching no more than two eggs at a time for the best results.
  • Eggs: While this Turkish egg recipe is traditionally made with poached eggs, you can serve it with fried eggs or soft-boiled eggs as well. 
  • Make Ahead & Storage: You can make the garlic yogurt sauce a day in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. While technically you can store the leftovers in an airtight container, we highly recommend consuming this dish as soon as possible while it is still warm and fresh.

Nutrition

Calories: 346kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 378mg | Sodium: 1053mg | Potassium: 311mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1548IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 175mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-eggs-recipe/feed/ 2
Pickled Turnips Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/#comments Fri, 24 Jan 2025 17:23:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79897 If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen…]]>

If you’re a fan of classic Middle Eastern dishes like chicken shawarma, pita wraps, or chicken kabobs, you’ve likely seen them served with these pink turnip pickles. Their bold and zesty bite makes them the ideal accompaniment to the region’s spicy, rich, and savory dishes, adding texture, color, and a distinctive flavor.

While they’re a staple in Lebanese cuisine (and therefore mostly referred to as Lebanese Turnip Pickles), they’ve also become widely enjoyed in neighboring countries, finding a place in their cuisines much like other popular Mediterranean condiments like hummus and tzatziki sauce.

Pink pickled turnips in a glass jar.

Ingredients and Substitutions

This Mediterranean pickled turnips recipe uses just a few basic pantry-friendly ingredients you already have. But if you are missing one or two, below is everything you need to know about the ingredients:

  • Hot water: We need hot water to dissolve the salt and sugar. There is no need to boil water; hot tap water works just fine.
  • White distilled vinegar: Use distilled white vinegar for the most natural and authentic taste. However, while it is not traditional, you can use apple cider vinegar for a more fruity and sweet taste or white wine vinegar for a milder, slightly more delicate flavor. 
  • Sugar: A small amount of sugar balances the tanginess of the vinegar with a touch of sweetness. You can use both granulated and cane sugar when making these Arabic pickled turnips.
  • Kosher salt: We used kosher salt since home cooks widely use it daily. However, pickling salt and sea salt can also be used. We do not recommend table salt as it contains iodine, which can produce bitter-tasting pickled pink pickles.
  • Turnips: We used the purple skin white turnips, which are widely available in grocery stores. Peeling is optional, but we recommend cutting them into uniform batons to ensure even pickling. While it is not traditional, Japanese hakurei turnips (aka Tokyo turnips) can also be used in this recipe. They are smaller and have a milder (less bitter) flavor than white radishes.
  • Beet: Any color of beet can be used, but red beets are used for the signature pink color. 
  • Fresh Garlic: While optional, a clove of fresh garlic infuses the brine with a savory flavor. Use a large clove of garlic or two small ones.
  • Bay leaves: A small bay leaf gives the pickling brine an herbal note that enhances the flavor of the turnip pickles, but it is optional.
  • Whole black peppercorns: We added a small amount of black peppercorns to provide a hint of spice and complexity to the overall flavor.
  • Optional add-ins: If preferred, other flavorings, such as a few leaves of fresh herbs (such as dill, parsley, and thyme) and a pinch of red pepper flakes, can be added.

How to Make Pickled Turnips?

Pickling turnips at home requires only 10 minutes of hands-on time. The method we are using is usually referred to as “refrigerator pickles,” as we use a quick vinegar-based brine instead of canning using a heat-processing method used in other pickle recipes for a longer shelf life.

Once it is assembled and the jar is sealed, all that’s left to do is to wait a few days for the most vibrant and flavorful Lebanese pickled turnips. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to pickle turnips.
  1. Prepare the quick brine: In a large measuring cup, combine the hot water, vinegar, sugar, and kosher salt. Add sugar and salt and whisk until they are completely dissolved.
  2. Layer the vegetables: In a clean 32-ounce glass jar with a wide mouth, start layering the turnips, beets, and garlic. Add a handful of turnips first, followed by a few beet pieces and a garlic clove. Repeat this process until the jar is nearly full.
  3. Add the spices: Add the bay leaf and sprinkle the peppercorns over the top.
  4. Pour the brine: Carefully pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, making sure that everything is completely submerged,  but there is still an inch of space left on top.
Two photos side by side showing Lebanese turnip pickles before and after they are pickled.
  1. Seal and cool: Seal it with the lid and let it cool to room temperature. At this point, you can let it sit on the counter or transfer it to the refrigerator.
  2. Let time do its magic: For the best flavor, let the pickles sit in the fridge for at least three days. However, keep in mind that the magic really happens after five to seven days when the flavors fully develop.

FAQs

How to cut turnips for pickling?

To cut turnips for pickling, start by slicing the top and the bottom. Use a vegetable peeler to peel the turnip. Cut the now-peeled turnip in half and then cut it into ½-inch slices. Stack the slices and cut them into ½-inch wide strips, creating baton-like pieces.

How long are pickled turnips good for?

As long as they are kept in the fridge in a tightly sealed jar, they will last for upto 1 month.

How To Store Pickled Turnips?

The best way to store pickled turnips is in a tightly sealed jar kept in the refrigerator. They will stay fresh and flavorful for up to a month, making them a convenient condiment you can use any time.

How To Serve Them?

These Middle Eastern pickled turnips are a wonderfully versatile condiment that can add a flavorful kick to many dishes. Below are a few serving suggestions:

  • Shawarma: Whether you’re serving a chicken shawarma platter, beef shawarma wrap in pita bread, or falafel wrap, these pickled pink turnips are the ultimate condiment to complement the bold spices and rich flavors of this classic Middle Eastern dish.
  • Rice Bowls: Use these Lebanese pickles as a topping for rice bowls, like my Homemade Cava Bowl or Shawarma Chicken Bowl, for a tangy crunch that pairs beautifully with roasted vegetables, seasoned rice, and your favorite protein.
  • Mezze Platter: Serve them along with other classic Mediterranean condiments like Baba Ganoush, Muhammara, and Hummus.
  • Salads: Top off any of your favorite Mediterranean salads to add a touch of tangy flavor and a satisfying crunch.

Expert Tips

While the process of pickling turnips is a relatively straightforward one, we wanted to include a few helpful tips to make sure you’ll succeed on your first try:

  • Wash the root vegetables well: Rinse turnips and beets under cold water to ensure they are dirt-free. While you can pickle them with the skin on, I prefer to peel them before pickling to ensure that the brine penetrates easily and the pickles have a cleaner taste.
  • Slice the vegetables evenly: Make sure the turnips and beets are cut into uniform pieces (about ½-inch batons) so they pickle evenly. Uneven cuts may result in some pieces being softer or crunchier than others.
  • Start with a clean jar: There is no need to sterilize the jar, but we recommend that your jar is thoroughly cleaned and dried before use. If you don’t have a 32-ounce jar, two 16-ounce glass jars also work.
  • Don’t overfill the jar: It is okay to pack the root vegetables tightly, but it is best to leave about an inch of room at the top of the jar. We do want the turnips and the beets to be fully submerged in the liquid, but leaving a small room at the top will allow the brine to circulate properly.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this pink pickled turnips recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Pickled turnips in a jar with some placed on a fork.
Print

Pickled Turnips Recipe

A Middle Eastern staple, pink pickled turnips are a tangy and crunchy condiment served with wraps, sandwiches, grilled meats, and as a part of mezze spreads.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Resting time 5 days
Total Time 5 days 10 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 44kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup hot water (tab water would work)
  • 1 cup white distilled vinegar
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar
  • 2 tablespoons kosher salt
  • 1 lb turnips peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
  • 1 red beet small one, peeled and cut into ½-inch batons
  • 1 garlic clove cut in half
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¼ teaspoon black peppercorns

Instructions

  • Add 1 cup of hot water, 1 cup of white distilled vinegar, 1 tablespoon sugar, and 2 tablespoons of kosher salt in a large measuring cup. Stir until the sugar is fully dissolved.*
  • In the mason jar, layer the turnips, beets, and garlic evenly: start with a handful of turnips, then a few pieces of beet, followed by a piece of garlic.
  • Repeat the same pattern until the jar is filled, ensuring the ingredients are distributed evenly throughout the jar. Gently push down to ensure they fit into the jar.
  • Add the bay leaf and peppercorns.
  • Pour the prepared vinegar mixture over the vegetables, ensuring everything is submerged but there is still an inch of space left on top.
  • Seal the jar tightly and let it cool to room temperature before storing it in the refrigerator.
  • Refrigerate for at least 3 days before serving to allow the flavors to meld. For best results, wait 5-7 days.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of turnip pickles that is ideal for 6 servings as a condiment. The nutrition information below is per serving.
  • * Alternatively, you can place cold water in a small saucepan, add the vinegar, sugar, and salt, and cook, stirring occasionally, until the sugar and salt are fully dissolved.
  • Storage: While the color of the brine turns fully pink after 3 days, we highly recommend waiting at least 5 days for the flavors to develop. Be sure to store it in the fridge once the jar is opened. As long as it is tightly sealed and kept in the refrigerator, these Mediterranean pickled turnips will stay fresh for up to a month.
  • In the fridge or on the counter? We’ve seen versions of this pickled turnip recipe where some home cooks leave the jar on the kitchen counter (or a dark place like the pantry) for a few days before transferring it to the refrigerator, while others keep it in the fridge the entire time. We tried both ways and found that there were no differences in taste.

Nutrition

Calories: 44kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.1g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 2390mg | Potassium: 195mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 7IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-turnips/feed/ 2
Turkish Pasta https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/#comments Sat, 04 Jan 2025 17:34:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=79631 Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was…]]>

Growing up in Türkiye and making my fair share of Turkish recipes, this comforting Turkish pasta dish, known as kiymali makarna, was one of my mom’s go-to weeknight dinners. So, when I came across Anna Paul’s TikTok video of her mom making it, I was instantly transported back to my childhood.

This dish is a simplified take on manti, the iconic Turkish dumplings known for their labor-intensive preparation. Making manti is usually a communal activity involving making the dough from scratch, filling it with spiced meat, and folding each piece by hand. It is a process that takes hours. This “cheat manti” (or sometimes referred to as “manti pasta”) offers the same bold and comforting flavors but in a fraction of the time, making it perfect for modern weeknight cooking.

Pasta Turkish garnished with dried mint and tomatoes from the front view.

Ingredients and Substitutions:

This dish is all about combining simple ingredients to create layers of flavor. While the list of ingredients may look long, there are plenty of options when it comes to substitutions. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients from the top view.
  • Pasta: I use farfalle, but other small pasta shapes like fusilli or penne would work. You can also use your gluten-free pasta if you are following a gluten-free diet. For a gluten-free option, use your favorite gluten-free pasta. While alternative pastas like chickpea or brown rice pasta can be used, note that their distinct flavors might slightly change the overall taste of the dish.
  • Ground beef: Lean ground beef (93%) works best for a lighter, flavorful meat sauce. You can also use ground lamb, turkey, or chicken, but keep in mind that each will bring a distinct flavor profile to the dish.
  • Yellow onion: You’ll need about a cup of finely chopped yellow onion. Any type of onion, like Walla Walla, Vidalia or even white onion would work.
  • Red Pepper Paste : Traditionally, this recipe uses mildly hot red pepper paste, which adds a unique depth of flavor. It’s readily available online (affiliate link). If you don’t have it on hand, tomato paste makes a great substitute.
  • Spices: You’ll need a combination of onion powder (to enhance the onion taste), ground cumin, sweet (or smoked) paprika, red pepper flakes (such as Aleppo or Urfa chili pepper), salt and black pepper.
  • Greek Yogurt: I like the thickness of plain Greek yogurt (as you can see in my Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce recipe), but regular unsweetened plain yogurt would also work. Go for full-fat yogurt for the most delicious creamy sauce or low-fat for a lighter one.
  • Fresh Garlic: Use fresh garlic cloves for the signature garlicky taste. However, while not traditional, you can use garlic powder for a milder flavor.
  • Lemon Juice: Similar to my yogurt dressing recipe, a squeeze of lemon juice helps balance the strong garlic flavor.
  • Unsalted butter: You can use salted or unsalted butter, but if you go with the salted version, be sure to adjust the seasoning accordingly.
  • Kosher salt
  • Garnish: Though they are optional, the traditional Turkish pasta is sprinkled with a handful of dried mint and sumac. Alternatively, you can use chopped parsley and chili flakes, if you don’t mind the heat. I also added a handful of cherry tomatoes for some color, but they are also optional. 

How To Make Turkish Pasta?

At first glance, this recipe might seem to have many steps, but most of them can be done simultaneously, making the process quicker and more efficient. Here is how I do it:

A collage of images showing how to make the tiktok viral Anna Paul's Turkish pasta recipe.
  1. Cook the pasta: Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package instructions until al dente. Save half a cup of the cooking liquid, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  2. Saute meat: While the pasta is cooking, add the ground meat in a large skillet (or a pan). In the viral TikTok video, Anna’s mom intentionally does not use olive oil, saying that the meat releases its oils as you saute it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. Still, if you feel like your meat can benefit from a little olive oil, feel free to use it.
  3. Cook with the spices and add the onion: Add the spices and cook, stirring constantly, for about 5 minutes, or until the meat is no longer pink. Then, add the diced onion and red pepper paste (or tomato paste) cook until softened. As you are sauteing, use the reserved pasta as needed, ensuring that the meat sauce maintains its moisture levels.
  4. Make the garlicky yogurt sauce: Whisk yogurt, minced garlic, lemon juice and kosher salt in a bowl until super creamy. Taste for seasoning and make sure it is seasoned according to your taste buds.
A collage of photos showing the butter sauce drizzle.
  1. Make the butter drizzle: I recommend making the butter drizzle right before serving. The process is super simple. Melt butter in a small saucepan and then stir in 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  2. Assemble: To serve, grab a pasta bowl. Place the cooked pasta at the bottom, spoon 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce on top followed by ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Finish it with a drizzle (about one or two tablespoons) of the paprika butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  3. Garnish: If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. 

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

While this dish is quick to assemble, you can save time by preparing some components in advance to assemble it in a flash. It also stores well, making for a flavorful lunch the next day. Here is how I do it:

  • Make Ahead: 
    • Meat sauce: Cook the meat and onion mixture, let it cool to room temperature, and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
    • Garlic yogurt sauce: Prepare the sauce and store it in a jar or airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
    • On the day you plan to serve: Cook the pasta while reheating the meat sauce on the stovetop. Right before serving, make the chili butter sauce and assemble as written in the recipe.
  • Storage & Reheating: If you can, I recommend keeping each component of the leftovers separate in airtight containers in the fridge. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.
Cheat manti pasta recipe in a bowl with a fork on the side.

Helpful Tips:

  • Cooking onion: When I first saw the viral video, I was a bit skeptical about sauteing the onion after cooking the meat, but to my surprise, I found that this method preserves the onion flavor better, creating a distinct and delicious contrast, very similar to manti. It’s different from how my mom prepared it, but I really enjoyed the end result.
  • Spice levels: The spicy butter drizzle is a signature component of this recipe. While the recipe below is more on the milder side, feel free to up the amount of red pepper flakes if you love spicy food. The yogurt sauce beautifully balances the spiciness creating a harmonious flavor profile.
  • Let it sizzle: I’ve seen some people make the butter drizzle in the microwave. While I understand that it is convenient (and one last dish to wash), the butter drizzle is supposed to sizzle when drizzled. That is why, for the most authentic Turkish pasta experience, take the extra minute to melt and season the butter in a skillet. The sizzling adds a burst of aroma and flavor that truly elevates the dish.
  • Curry powder: In Anna Paul’s version of Turkish pasta, she adds a dash of curry powder. While you’re welcome to include it, I chose to omit it since curry powder isn’t traditionally used in manti. To stay true to the version I grew up eating, I opted for the classic spices instead.

Other Pasta Recipes You Might Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Turkish Pasta following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Turkish pasta recipe being drizzled with the melted butter sauce.
Print

Turkish Pasta Recipe

The TikTok-viral Turkish Pasta recipe, made famous by Anna Paul, is a 30-minute wonder that's as delicious as it is easy. Made by layering cooked pasta with garlicky yogurt, spiced ground beef, and a chili butter drizzle, this recipe is easy to make, satisfying, and totally worthy of the hype.
Course Main Course – Pasta Dish
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 563kcal

Ingredients

For The Pasta

  • 8 ounces pasta I use farfalle but any shape would work
  • Kosher salt

For The Meat Sauce

  • 1 lbs ground beef 93%
  • 1 medium size onion chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 2 teaspoons sweet paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Garlic Yogurt Sauce

  • 1 cup Greek yogurt unsweetened plain (full fat or skim)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

For The Butter Sauce

  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 teaspoon sweet paprika
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes or more to taste (such as Aleppo Pepper or Urfa Chili pepper)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

As Garnish (optional)

  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 4 tablespoons dried mint or fresh parsley
  • 2 tablespoons sumac optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of water to a boil. Season the pasta water generously with salt. It should taste like the ocean. Add the pasta and cook until it is al dente. Timing might differ depending on the brand you use, so be sure to check the instructions on the packaging. Mine took about 9-10 minutes. Save ½ cup of the cooking liquid*, drain the pasta, and set it aside.
  • While the pasta is cooking, make the meat sauce. In a large skillet over medium heat, add 1 pound ground beef. Cook, breaking up the large chunks of meat with a wooden spoon for about 4-5 minutes or until it is no longer pink. As it cooks, it should release some of its oils.
  • Add the 1 medium-sized chopped onion, 1 tablespoon red pepper paste (or tomato paste), 1 teaspoon onion powder, 1 teaspoon ground cumin, 2 teaspoons sweet paprika, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper. Cook, stirring regularly, until onions are softened and meat is fully cooked, for about 5-6 minutes. If needed, use the reserved pasta water to keep the sauteed meat moist. Set it aside.
  • To make the yogurt sauce, whisk together 1 cup of Greek yogurt, 2 cloves of minced garlic, 1 tablespoon of lemon juice, ½ teaspoon kosher salt in a bowl. Give it a taste and make sure it is seasoned to your liking. Set is aside.
  • Right before serving, melt 4 tablespoons butter in a small saucepan over medium heat. Add 1 teaspoon sweet paprika, ¼ teaspoon (or more) red pepper flakes and ½ teaspoon kosher salt. Stir and cook until butter is fully melted and bubbly.
  • To assemble, place the now-cooked pasta in a bowl. Top it off with 4 tablespoons of the yogurt sauce and ⅔ cup of the cooked beef. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the butter sauce. Repeat the same process for the rest of the bowls.
  • If preferred, garnish with a handful of cherry tomatoes, a tablespoon of dried mint (or fresh parsley) and a teaspoon of sumac, if using. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Reserved liquid: I always save some of the pasta water in case my pasta dries out while I am working on the sauce. In this recipe, you (most likely) will not need it since we work simultaneously, but still, it is a good backup in case you need it.
  • No olive oil for sauteing the meat: I stayed true to the TikTok viral recipe by not using oil to saute the beef as the meat releases its oils as you cook it. Initially, I was a bit skeptical, but she was right. As long as you keep stirring, the meat will eventually release some of its oils and brown nicely. Still, if you feel your meat can benefit from a bit of olive oil, feel free to use it.
  • Storage & Reheating: Store each component of the leftovers separately in airtight containers in the fridge for up to 2 days. When ready to serve, reheat the pasta, meat, and butter sauce and assemble as described in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 563kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 983mg | Potassium: 692mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1054IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-pasta/feed/ 29
Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

Key Ingredients:

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
  • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

How to make Muhammara?

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Expert Tips:

  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

Is This Recipe Spicy?

The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

Storage Instructions:

  • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
  • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
  • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
Crazy Feta https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/ https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/#comments Sat, 06 Jul 2024 14:45:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76598 I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular…]]>

I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular Cava restaurant chain. When I first had it, I knew I had to create a homemade crazy feta I could enjoy anytime I wanted. And I have to admit, I think this version is better than the original.

If you are into Cava and the taste of their delicious dips and spreads, you might also like other Mediterranean staples, including Tzatziki Sauce, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Harissa Sauce.

Cava feta dip served in a bowl with veggies and  pita chips from the top view.

What is Crazy Feta at Cava?

Cava is a popular Mediterranean fast-casual chain that opened in the DC area. It is known for its quick pick-up mezze bowls. Crazy feta is one of the featured dips, along with tzatziki, hummus, harissa, and roasted eggplant dip.

Cava’s crazy feta is made with feta, jalapenos, onions, and olive oil. The vegetables are roasted, and all the ingredients are whipped together until smooth.

Crazy Feta Ingredients

Cava feta dip requires just a handful of simple ingredients, which are easy to find at the grocery store. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image on each ingredient.
  • Jalapeno peppers: Look for two large jalapenos for the best flavor.
  • Onion: One yellow onion is all we need, but red onions could also work.
  • Garlic bulb: The roasted garlic head adds an incredible depth of flavor and a natural sweetness. I like to break the garlic bulb into garlic cloves for faster roasting or use already-made Roasted Garlic or Air Fryer Roasted Garlic.
  • Olive oil: Extra virgin olive oil provides a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the roasted veggies and feta cheese shine.
  • Feta cheese: Look for two 8-ounce feta cheese blocks (or feta bricks) in the cheese section of your grocery store, either made from cow’s milk, sheep’s milk, or a mix of the two.
  • Lemon: We need both the lemon zest and lemon juice, so zest the whole lemon before juicing.

How to Make Crazy Feta?

This crazy feta recipe is ready in 25-30 minutes, thanks to the quick roasting time. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
A collage of images showing how to make Cava feta dip recipe.
  1. Prepare vegetables: Place the sliced jalapenos, chopped onion, and peeled garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil, then season with Kosher salt and black pepper.
  2. Roast vegetables: Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through for even cooking. When pierced with a knife, the vegetables should be soft. Set aside to cool.
  3. Whip feta: In the bowl of a food processor (or blender) with the S-blade, add the feta cheese (broken into small pieces), olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated, scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed.
A food processor filled with feta, jalapeno, garlic and onion, before and after it is whipped.
  1. Make feta dip: Add the roasted vegetables to the feta mixture. Pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the bowl as needed. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  2. Serve: Transfer to your favorite serving bowl and drizzle it with a teaspoon of olive oil, if desired. Serve as an appetizer with pita chips, crackers, or veggies on the side (see more Serving Suggestions below).

How to Serve Crazy Feta?

Crazy feta is one of those recipes that is extremely versatile. The Mediterranean flavors take front and center served as a dip or spread in any of the following ways:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for the best Cava crazy feta dip recipe:

  • Adjust the heat level: If you prefer a spicy dip, leave the seeds and ribs intact on the jalapenos.
  • Cut the vegetables roughly the same size: Chopping the vegetables about the same size (jalapenos sliced in half, onion cut into large chunks) and slicing the garlic cloves in half ensures they cook quickly and evenly.
  • Control the texture with the food processor: I love a smooth and creamy texture, but you can make this jalapeno feta dip as chunky or smooth as you like.
  • Make it your own: Customize it in any way you like, such as adding sun-dried tomatoes in oil, a sprinkling of fresh herbs, or some roasted red pepper.

FAQs

Is Cava feta pasteurized?

Yes, according to its packaging (sold at Whole Foods), the feta cheese is made with pasteurized cow’s milk and sheep’s milk.

How many carbs are in crazy feta cheese?

This recipe serves eight people as an appetizer, with each serving offering 4 grams of carbs.

Other Cava-Inspired Dips and Spreads

If you try this Cava Feta Dip recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cava Copycat Crazy feta in a bowl served with pita chips and vegetables.
Print

Crazy Feta Recipe

If you are a fan of the Mediterranean food restaurant chain Cava, you are likely a fan of their Crazy Feta as well. If you have ever wanted to make it in your home kitchen, you have found the best copycat recipe. This quick and easy creamy feta dip is ideal for serving with pita chips and veggies or topping your favorite grain bowls and salads.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 serving
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 large jalapenos cut in half and deseeded
  • 1 medium sized yellow onion peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 1 bulb garlic peeled and sliced in half (10-12 cloves)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Feta Dip:

  • 16 ounces feta cheese 2-8 ounce blocks, crumbled
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the jalapenos, onion, and garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle with the kosher salt and pepper.
  • Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through the process to ensure even cooking. Vegetables should be soft when pierced with a knife. Remove from the oven and set them aside to cool.
  • Place the feta cheese, olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest in the food processor. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated. Scrape down the sides of the bowl as needed.
  • Add the roasted vegetables and pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the sides of the food processor bowl to incorporate all ingredients. Taste and adjust seasoning as necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and if preferred, drizzle with olive oil. Serve with pita chips, crackers or veggies on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2 cups of Crazy feta dip, ideal for serving eight people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Adding salt: Feta can be salty, so it’s best to taste the feta before adding any additional salt to the recipe.
  • Best when served at room temperature: While the dip should be chilled, the flavors are most prominent at cool to room temperature. If you have stored the dip for later, remove it from the fridge 20 minutes before enjoying it.
  • Storage & Make-Ahead Instructions: This Cava crazy feta recipe tastes better the longer all the ingredients have a chance to mingle in the fridge, making it a great make-ahead recipe. To make ahead and store, simply:
    • Make Ahead: Prepare the dip at least 1 hour before serving. Keep covered in the fridge.
    • Storage: Store leftover dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freeze: The leftovers of this feta jalapeno dip can be frozen. Simply place them in a freezer-safe container, cover them with a lid, and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 793mg | Potassium: 73mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 285mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/feed/ 3
Elote Dip https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/#comments Mon, 01 Jul 2024 20:45:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76149 Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad…]]>

Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad strikes an irresistible balance between heat and tanginess, while Corn Black Bean Salad has all the garden-fresh, zingy undertones you could want in a side dish.

Elote corn dip in a bowl garnished with lime with chips on the side.

What is Elote Dip?

Elote dip is a creamy, corn-based appetizer that gets its flavors from traditional Mexican street corn. This recipe’s original “street food version” starts by grilling corn on the cob and slathering it with a rich mixture of mayonnaise, sour cream, and lime juice. People then sprinkle it with ingredients like cilantro and chili powder to enhance its fresher, spicier notes.

The “dip form” of this recipe takes all of the same ingredients and flavors, transforming it into a scoopable appetizer—often served with a side of tortilla chips, as a condiment for tacos, or on top of other savory mains.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Wondering why this recipe for elote dip is so irresistible? With only a few simple ingredients, this dish packs all the creamy, fresh, and spicy flavors you love in Mexican street food.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Corn: Nearly any type of corn will work in this elote dip recipe. When fresh sweet corn is in season in the summer, I prefer buying it fresh. However, you can also make this dish with canned or frozen corn if it is out-of-season (like when serving it as a part of your Cinco de Mayo spread) or if you want to simplify your meal prep. 
  • Olive oil: We used extra virgin olive oil because of its milder flavor, but you can also use an equal amount of unsalted butter.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: To ensure an even infusion of flavor, finely mince or press your garlic before adding it to your recipe.
  • Mayonnaise: Most recipes for this sweet corn dip use mayo as the base when making the creamy elote dressing. However, if you want a more decadent option, you can also make this Mexican corn dip with cream cheese instead, though your recipe will likely have a thicker consistency.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream is vital to this recipe’s cool tanginess. However, you can make a more authentic elote dip recipe with Mexican crema or use plain Greek yogurt for a lighter version.
  • Fresh lime juice and zest
  • Seasonings: I opted for a basic mix of kosher salt, ground pepper, and chili powder to season my elote dip. However, you can use an authentic Mexican Tajin seasoning or Trader Joe’s Everything But the Elote Seasoning Blend (affiliate link) for a zestier, more robust chili taste. And if you like your dip spicier, a pinch of cayenne pepper would be a welcome addition.
  • Red onion: If you prefer a milder “onion” flavor, use green onions instead of red for this recipe.
  • Jalapeno: One fresh, finely chopped jalapeno is all you need to add fresh heat to this elote cheese dip. Though I prefer removing the seeds from my jalapenos before cutting, you can achieve a spicier blend by leaving some seeds in.
  • Cotija cheese or queso fresco: These two kinds of cheese are classic choices for this dip, but almost any Mexican cheese will work. Though not traditional, you can also use feta cheese, pepper jack cheese, or Parmesan cheese if you’re in a pinch.
  • Cilantro: Fresh, chopped cilantro is an easy way to give your dip a touch of freshness and color, but you can substitute it for parsley or omit it altogether if preferred.

How to Make Street Corn Dip?

This easy elote dip comes together in five simple steps, making it a boon for first-time cooks and expert chefs alike.

A collage of images showing how to make elote dip.
  1. Saute the corn: Pour the olive oil into a large, heavy-bottom skillet and heat over medium-high heat. Add the sweet corn kernels and, stirring frequently, saute until they turn a light golden color (7-10 minutes). Note: You may need to saute your corn in two batches to ensure you don’t overcrowd the skillet. Then, add the garlic to the pan and saute for 30 seconds, stirring constantly. Remove the garlic-corn mixture from the skillet, set it aside, and let it cool for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and ground pepper to a large mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  3. Assemble the dip: Add the cooled corn, red onion, jalapeno, and cilantro to the bowl with the dressing. Toss to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.
  4. Serve: Transfer the dip to a serving bowl, garnish with cotija cheese, and serve with a side of your favorite chips.

How to Serve this Mexican Street Corn Dip Recipe?

One of the best parts about this easy Mexican street corn dip is its versatility. It’s good enough to eat with a spoon, but you can also pair it with countless other dishes to make a flavorful, filling meal.

  • Chips on the side: An undeniable crowd-pleaser, this elote chip dip makes the perfect party appetizer when served alongside a bowl of tortilla chips. (Warning: Don’t expect to have any leftovers!)
  • Tacos and burritos: This creamy elote dip tastes amazing with taco recipes, balancing their savory flavor with a bright, smooth tang. In particular, I love serving it with juicy Flank Steak Tacos, smoky Brisket Tacos, and vegan Black Bean Quinoa Tacos. You can even use this easy dip as a burrito topping for an equally delicious Mexican meal.
  • Vegetable platter: Another delectable way to enjoy this roasted street corn dip is one of the healthiest. Serve this creamy dish alongside a platter of fresh veggies—especially bell peppers, carrot sticks, and cherry tomatoes—for an equally delicious and colorful snack platter.
  • Salads and taco bowls: This recipe is more than a tasty dip. When mixed into taco bowls and salads, it also makes a delicious elote salsa.
  • Grilled seafood: In the mood for a light, seaside menu? This easy elote corn makes an incredible topping for dozens of fresh fish mains, whether you’re craving savory-sweet Grilled Mahi Mahi, umami-rich Grilled Sockeye Salmon, or smoky Grilled Shrimp.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to make the best Mexican street corn dip recipe with these tasty tips. Below, you’ll find out how to prepare this dish just as you like—with maximum flavor and zero hassle.

  • Other ways to cook corn: In the recipe below, I sauteed my corn on the cob because it’s an easy way to achieve rich, tender flavors. However, you can also lend your elotes dip bolder, smokier notes by cooking your corn on the grill or in the oven. Alternatively, you can try Air Fryer Corn on the Cob or cook it in the microwave for a quick, indoor option.
  • Can be served warm, room temperature, or cold: You can serve this dish at any temperature you prefer. When served right away while the corn is still warm, hot elote dip is delicious with chips. Equally, after resting in the fridge for a few hours, its cold version makes a great appetizer.
  • It gets better as it sits: If you have time, I highly recommend making this recipe a day in advance and storing it in the fridge until it’s ready to eat. Just be sure to add fresh, delicate ingredients (like cilantro and cheese) right before serving to maintain their texture and taste.
Person serving a chip with Mexican elote dip.

You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of the classic elote recipe and flavors, you might also like:

If you make this Elote Dip recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Corn elote dip in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Elote Dip Recipe

Tangy, creamy, and smoky, this elote street corn dip will immediately add fresh, Mexican flavor to any menu. The best part is that you can make this authentic dish in less than 30 minutes with only a handful of ingredients!
Course Appetizer, Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 196kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 6 ears of corn husks remove and kernels cut from the cob*, about 4-5 cups
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed

For The Creamy Elote Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Greek yogurt or Mexican crema
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Dip:

  • ¼ cup red onion or green onions finely chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and finely chopped
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese or queso fresco
  • cup fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To cook the corn: In a large heavy-bottom skillet (such a cast iron skillet), heat olive oil over medium-high heat. Add the corn kernels and saute for 7-10 minutes, stirring frequently until lightly golden. Do not overcrowd the skillet. Saute in 2 batches if needed. Add the garlic and saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool for 5-10 minutes.
  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (big enough to mix the whole dip) until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble: Add the now-cooled corn, onion, jalapeno, cotija cheese, and cilantro to the bowl and toss to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and garnish with more cilantro. Serve with your favorite chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of dip that is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Corn: During the summer months, I prefer using fresh sweet corn for this recipe. On the other hand, when corn is not in season, I use canned (and drained corn) or frozen corn kernels. If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it. Either way, you will need 4-5 cups of corn kernels to make this recipe.
  • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your cheese before adding it to your Mexican street dip. Some varieties are saltier than others, so you might alter your seasoning depending on your cheese’s flavor profile. 
  • Adjust spiciness: My recipe for street taco dip is relatively mild, as I remove the seeds of my jalapenos before adding them to my mix. However, if you’re looking for an extra kick of heat, leave some seeds in or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store this elote corn dip recipe in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I don’t recommend freezing your dip, however, as the extreme temperatures will interfere with the dressing’s texture and taste.

Nutrition

Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/feed/ 1
Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

For The Pita Chips:

  • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

For The Topping:

  • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
  • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
  • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
  • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
Tahini dressing for nachos.

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
  • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

Optional Add-Ins

For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
  1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
  2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
  3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
  1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
  2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

FAQs

Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
Print

Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 246kcal

Ingredients

For the toasted pita chips:

  • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Toppings:

  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
  • 2 stalks green onions chopped
  • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • cup tahini shaken well
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
  • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
  • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
  • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
  • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
  • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
  • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
  • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
Turkish Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/#comments Wed, 19 Jun 2024 13:57:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=6266 There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply…]]>

There is a classification of recipes in Turkish cuisine called zeytinyağlı, which translates as “dishes braised in olive oil”. Simply put, it is seasonal vegetables like green beans, zucchini, or leeks are cooked in a good amount of olive oil along with summer tomatoes and onion and served at room temperature when their flavor is most prominent.

This Turkish beans recipe is essentially stewed string beans cooked in a warm skillet until soft, juicy, and melt-in-your-mouth tender. The result is very satisfactory as the low and slow cooking time produces super flavorful beans.

Turkish stewed green beans drizzled with yogurt sauce in a bowl.

I know many people enjoy making classic green bean dishes like Air Fryer Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans, but I hope you give this version a try.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Turkish style braised green beans require just a handful of simple ingredients. We will need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.
  • Fresh Green Beans: I used regular green beans you can easily find at the grocery store. However, the most popular green beans in Turkey are runner beans (çalı fasulye) and romano beans or flat beans (Ayşekadın fasulye). If you are lucky, you may be able to spot them at your local farmer’s market during the summer months. But you can use any green bean, including long beans, string beans, or Haricots Verts (French beans), in this recipe.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Onion: Diced onion adds a delicious savory flavor. Feel free to replace the onion with washed and diced leeks instead.
  • Tomato Paste: This is optional, but tomato paste adds a depth of flavor, and it’s how my mom always made them.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves give these string beans an extra punchy bite.
  • Tomatoes: I used canned diced tomatoes with their own juices, which is why this recipe doesn’t include any water. However, if you are using fresh tomatoes (about 2 medium-sized tomatoes), add about ¼ cup water.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper keeps the green beans front and center.
  • Sugar: Do not skip the sugar. This is the secret ingredient that brightens all the flavors and balances the bitterness in the vegetables.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill is classic, but fresh mint or parsley can be used instead.
  • Lemon Juice: A squeeze of lemon juice right before serving is optional but a welcome addition to brighten up the dish.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Meat: If you prefer more of a warm one-pot summer meal, you can brown ½ pound ground beef along with the onion and follow the rest of the recipe as written. Alternatively, you can use stew meat. If you go in that direction, be sure to dry the meat thoroughly, season it with salt and pepper, and sear it in the pot using a few tablespoons of olive oil until lightly browned but not fully cooked, 7-8 minutes. Remove onto a platter and follow the recipe as written. Add the browned stew meat back in after adding the green beans, and cook as directed.
  • Beans: It is not traditional, but you can toss in a can of drained and rinsed chickpeas (garbanzo beans) or white beans for an extra dose of plant protein.
  • Spices: You can add additional spices like cumin, red pepper flakes, Aleppo pepper, or paprika.
  • Cinnamon: Some variations of this Turkish bean dish include cinnamon, about ¼ teaspoon or so. My mom never added cinnamon, but I think a small amount would be a welcome addition.
  • Cheese: There is a similar recipe in Greece called fasolakia, which is often served with salty and tangy crumbles of feta cheese. We mostly serve it with a side of thick yogurt, but if you want to follow in the footsteps of the Greeks, you can crumble some feta on top.

How to Make Turkish Green Beans?

If you are ready to try something new, I can not imagine a better dish than this stewed green beans recipe. Luckily, it comes together in one pot in just a few easy steps. Simply:

A collage of images showing how to make Turkish style green beans recipe.
  1. Saute onion: In a medium saute pan or heavy pot (such as a Dutch Oven), heat olive oil over medium-high heat until warm but not smoking. Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, about 5-6 minutes.
  2. Add aromatics: Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for 1 minute.
  3. Add tomatoes and green beans: Next, stir in the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar. Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed.
  4. Cook low and slow: Cover and bring it to a boil, then reduce the heat to medium-low and simmer until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times while cooking.
Two images showing the finished dish.
  1. Garnish: Stir in the dill. Serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Serving Suggestions

In Turkish tradition, braised green beans and accompanying vegetable dishes are served as a course themselves, before or after a meaty main dish. However, the rich and luxurious textures and flavors from this green bean dish can be served with any of the following:

Turkish Green Beans served on an oval plate.

FAQs

What are Turkish green beans?

Turkish green beans, also known as zeytinyağlı taze fasulye, are fresh green beans cooked in a tomato sauce made of tomatoes, onions, garlic, and olive oil and slow-simmered until tender.

What type of green beans should I use?

Fresh, tender green beans are ideal, but any variety will work, such as string beans, haricots verts, runner beans, or flat beans. For this recipe, avoid frozen and canned green beans.

Is this dish vegan?

Yes, Turkish green beans are naturally vegan and vegetarian as they are made with extra virgin olive oil, green beans, tomatoes, onions, garlic, fresh herbs, and seasonings.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Also Like

If you try this Turkish Style Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Turkish green beans on a plate garnished with dill.
Print

Turkish Green Beans Recipe

This Turkish-style green beans recipe (Zeytinyagli Taze Fasulye) is a classic Turkish summer dish made by braising green beans with onions, tomatoes, and garlic in plenty of olive oil. It can be served as a side dish with meat or as a light meal by itself.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 226kcal

Ingredients

  • 5 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium-sized onion chopped (~1 cup)
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cab diced tomatoes (15-ounce can) or 2 medium tomatoes cut into small cubes
  • 1 pound fresh green beans trimmed and cut in half
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane sugar or coconut sugar
  • ¼ cup fresh dill or parsley

For Serving (Optional)

Instructions

  • Heat the oil in a medium-size saute pan or a heavy bottom pan (such as a Dutch oven) over medium-high heat.
  • Add the onion, and cook, stirring occasionally, until softened, 5-6 minutes.
  • Stir in the tomato paste and garlic and cook for another minute or so.
  • Add the diced tomatoes, green beans, kosher salt, black pepper, and sugar.
  • Give it a gentle stir to ensure that the green beans and tomatoes are evenly distributed in the pan. Put the lid on, bring it to a boil, turn the heat to medium-low, and cook until the beans are softened but still tender, 35-45 minutes. Be sure to stir it a few times during the cooking process.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Stir in the dill and serve with yogurt and lemon wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This dish makes 6-7 cups of braised green beans, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Preparing the green beans: We used fresh string beans from supermarkets. To prepare them for cooking, simply cut the stem ends off first, then cut them in half, making sure all the beans are roughly the same size. If you are lucky enough to find romano beans or flat beans, you will need to remove the string from the bean. First, snap one end off and pull it all the way down to remove the string. Then repeat on the other side.
  • Cooking times may vary: Keep in mind that the cooking duration may be different depending on the type of green beans you use. Start checking around 25-30 minutes. If they are still crisp, keep cooking until tender.
  • The best part of this recipe is that it stores well and can be made ahead making it ideal for your summer meal prep. Here are my best make-ahead and storage tips:
    • Make Ahead: The dish can be made up to 2 days in advance and stored, covered, in the fridge. They often taste better the next day. Simply remove from the refrigerator 30 – 45 minutes before serving.
    • Storage: Leftover green beans will keep for up to 4 days in an airtight container in the fridge. Enjoy them cold as a salad or at room temperature.
    • Reheat: If you prefer the green beans warm, reheat them in a skillet over medium heat until warm.

Nutrition

Calories: 226kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Sodium: 622mg | Potassium: 366mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 851IU | Vitamin C: 32mg | Calcium: 61mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-style-green-beans/feed/ 12
Beef Shawarma https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/#comments Wed, 12 Jun 2024 21:27:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75914 What is Beef Shawarma? Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It…]]>

What is Beef Shawarma?

Flavorful, tender, and rich, shawarma beef is a popular street food in the Middle East. It comes from slow-cooking layers of marinated steak on a vertical rotisserie or spit, then shaving the beef’s outer layer into thin slices. Usually, chefs serve the meat on breads like pita or lavash, topped with fresh veggies and drizzled with tahini sauce. However, it’s also common to see this dish as part of a grain bowl or beef shawarma platter.

Steak shawarma on a plate with pickles, tahini sauce, tomatoes and salad greens.

Though less traditional, you might also find a layered mixture of chicken and beef shawarma in some Middle Eastern countries.

Beef Shawarma Ingredients

Selecting the right ingredients is key to making the tastiest homemade shawarma. This ingredient list has everything you need, from the best meat to expert seasoning suggestions.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Beef: Flank steak and skirt steak are my favorite meats for shawarma due to their tender consistency and easy marination. You can also use ribeye steak for a more decadent finish, though this cut tends to be more expensive. No matter which cut you choose, just be sure to salt it before marinating to help break down its proteins and free up space for the juices to fill.
  • Shawarma beef seasoning: You can make homemade beef shawarma seasoning by combining ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom. Otherwise, you can simplify your meal prep by trying out a store-bought brand. Sadaf’s and NYShuk are my favorite brands.
  • Marinade: To make a marinade for beef shawarma, you’ll need:
    • Olive oil 
    • Fresh lemon juice 
    • Finely minced garlic
    • White vinegar: While it is not traditional, you can also use white or red wine vinegar as a substitute, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Onion: A thinly sliced onion helps make the meat more tender by breaking down its proteins. Additionally, onions have natural sugars that add a rich, savory flavor to the meat as it marinates.
  • Sauces: This recipe’s heartier flavors can easily be balanced by topping the meat with fresh condiments like my Yogurt Tahini Sauce, Lemon Tahini Sauce, Tzatziki, or even Hummus.
  • Vegetables: Traditionally, beef shawarma is served with fresh vegetables (such as sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and curly green lettuce) and pickled vegetables like dill Gherkins, red onions, or pickled turnips. However, this is where you can make it your own with whatever fresh or pickled vegetable you have on hand.

How to Make Beef Shawarma

This easy beef shawarma recipe is a great way to enjoy authentic Mediterranean eats any night of the week. These simple instructions will ensure you come out with a perfectly tender, tasty meal—all without a vertical spit!

A collage of images showing how to prepare shawarma meat.
  1. Prepare the shawarma meat: Pat dry the steak on both sides with paper towels, then slice it against the grain into thin strips (¼-inch wide, three inches long). Sprinkle the steak pieces with one teaspoon salt and set it aside. 
  2. Combine the beef shawarma spices: Add the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon to a medium mixing bowl. Blend the seasonings until thoroughly combined. Alternatively, you can use 3 tablespoons of store-bought shawarma seasoning.
  3. Marinate: Add the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma spice mix to a large bowl and whisk them together until fully incorporated. Then, add the beef strips and onions to the bowl, toss to coat, and cover the bowl. Refrigerate the mixture for a minimum of four hours or up to overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook and serve shawarma beef.
  1. Prepare the Lemon Tahini Sauce: Right before serving, in a small bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Stirring constantly, slowly add in the water until you reach your desired consistency. Taste for seasoning, adding more if necessary, and then set the sauce aside until ready to serve.
  2. Cook beef: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking to let it reach room temperature. Then, heat a large skillet, such as a cast iron skillet, on medium high heat and add the marinated steak and onions to the pan. Reduce the heat to medium and stir the mix occasionally as it browns, remembering not to overcrowd the skillet. Continue cooking until you achieve your desired doneness (4-6 minutes), then place the meat and onions on a plate. Cover the mix with a loose aluminum foil tent and let it rest for ten minutes.
  3. Serve: Transfer the now-rested meat to a large platter and serve it with tomatoes, cucumbers, pickles, and tahini sauce. If you plan on making shawarma wraps, spread the Tahini Sauce on the bread, layer it with your favorite accompaniments, and finish it with the cooked steak.

How to Serve Beef Shawarma? 

My favorite part about this homemade beef shawarma recipe is its versatility. Below, you’ll find countless ways to make this dish yours, whether you want to serve it by itself or turn it into a crowd-ready platter or a delicious meat shawarma sandwich.

  • Platter: Equal parts filling and flavorful, a beef shawarma plate is the ultimate weeknight dinner. Serve your meat with a helping of zesty Tabbouleh, flatbread, pickled veggies, and toum (Lebanese garlic sauce), and you’re guaranteed to get a five-star review from all your dinner guests (kids included!).
  • Sandwich: In the mood for a beef shawarma sandwich or pita pocket? Spread a piece of pita with my Tahini Yogurt Sauce, then add your steak slices, sliced tomatoes, pickles, and lettuce. If you want to feel like you are at a Lebanese restaurant, serve this dish alongside a plate of French fries for an authentic Middle Eastern dinner.
  • Wrap: You can quickly transform this dish into a delectable beef shawarma wrap by placing your meat, Pickled Red Onions, tomatoes, and green curly lettuce onto a slice of lavash. Then, drizzle your toppings with Lemon Tahini Sauce and wrap it tightly.
  • Bowl: Easy to eat and deliciously customizable, steak shawarma dinner bowls make meal planning a cinch. All you have to do is serve your shawarma beef, veggies, and fresh parsley atop a bowl of grains (Bulgur Pilaf and Rice with Vermicelli are my favorites!). You can even give your recipe an extra creamy finish by serving it with a side of Hummus, Baba Ganoush, or plain yogurt.
  • Salad: You can get your fill of fiber and protein by topping a bowl of fresh vegetables with this succulent beef shawarma recipe. In particular, this warmly-spiced beef makes a great pair with Lebanese fattoush and my Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad.
Beef shawarma sandwich drizzled with tahini sauce in someones hands.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Anyone can learn how to cook shawarma beef that’s worthy of being in a Middle Eastern restaurant. Below are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Cut meat against the grain: To prevent your shawarma from becoming chewy, I highly recommend cutting your beef against the grain. Doing so shortens the muscle fibers, making the meat more tender and easier to chew.
  • Don’t overcrowd the pan: When cooking steak shawarma, it’s best to avoid overcrowding your skillet to ensure that the meat is cooked evenly. Furthermore, basting the beef with the pan’s juices throughout the cooking process will ensure that the meat won’t dry out.
  • Let it rest: Do not skip the resting time, as it gives the meat time to reabsorb and equally distribute its flavorful juices. For the best results, I recommend letting this steak shawarma recipe rest for at least ten minutes before serving.

FAQs

What’s the difference between a gyro and shawarma?

Both shawarma and gyros come from slow-cooking layers of meat on a vertical roasting spit and shaving it into thin slices. However, the primary difference lies in their flavor profiles, as they use different spices during the marination process. For instance, the Greek gyro—often made of pork, lamb, or chicken—offers a brighter, more herby Mediterranean flavor, and you’ll usually find it served alongside light, creamy sauces like Tzatziki. By contrast, Middle Eastern shawarma—primarily made from beef and chicken—tends to have a warmer, more aromatic finish and is often accompanied by earthier, nuttier recipes, like Tahini Sauce and Hummus.

What is the best cut of beef for shawarma?

I recommend using flank steak, skirt steak, or sirloin tip (also known as beef flap steak) when making shawarma because they’re tender and easy to marinate. You may also use ribeye—a richer, more expensive cut—if it’s in your budget. While it is not traditional, you can use the shawarma seasoning to saute ground beef for an easy weeknight meal, introducing the flavors of shawarma in a simpler way.

What nationality is shawarma?

Shawarma originates from the Middle East, including countries like Turkey, Israel, and other Arabic areas. Because of the dish’s broad popularity, it’s also known by many other area-specific names, such as “Lebanese shawarma” and “Mediterranean beef shawarma.”

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Beef Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Beef shawarma on a platter with tahini sauce and vegetables.
Print

Beef Shawarma Recipe

Learn how to make the best beef shawarma at home with tender, juicy marinated beef, aromatic shawarma spices, and delicious toppings. Perfect for shawarma platters or stuffing into warm pita pockets for an authentic Middle Eastern experience!
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 30 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 668kcal

Ingredients

For The Beef

  • 2 pounds flank steak or skirt steak
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ¼ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ¼ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup white vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 small onion thinly sliced

Tahini Sauce

  • ½ cup Tahini paste
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 2 garlic cloves pressed or grated
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4-6 tablespoons water

Optional Wraps

  • 4 Pita bread or Lavash (or more)
  • ½ cup Pickled red onions
  • 2 fresh tomatoes sliced
  • 1 cucumber peeled and sliced thinly
  • 1 cup pickles sliced
  • 2 cups green curly lettuce roughly chopped
  • Slices of a lemon optional

Instructions

  • Pat dry the flank steak on both sides and cut it into 1/4-inch strips, each measuring 3 inches long (lengthwise), against the grain. Sprinkle with the kosher salt and set it aside.
  • Make the shawarma seasoning: In a medium bowl, mix the cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamon until thoroughly combined.
  • Make the marinade: In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, white vinegar, lemon juice, garlic, and shawarma seasoning until incorporated.
  • Add the flank steak strips and onions to the bowl and toss to fully coat.
  • Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours or overnight.
  • Make the lemon tahini sauce: In a bowl, whisk together the tahini paste, lemon juice, garlic, and kosher salt until blended. Slowly add the water while whisking until you reach your desired consistency. Adjust seasoning to taste. Set aside until ready to serve.
  • Cook the meat: Remove the flank steak from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. Heat a large skillet (a cast iron skillet works best) on medium-high. Remove the flank steak and onions from the bowl and place on the skillet. Reduce heat to medium and stir occasionally as it browns. Cook for 4-6 minutes or until you achieve your desired doneness. Do not overcrowd the skillet. You may have to cook in 2-3 batches. Once cooked, place it on a plate or platter, loosely tent it with foil, and let it rest for 10 minutes before serving.
  • To serve as a wrap: Spread the tahini sauce on the bread (or inside of a pita pocket) and layer it with sliced tomatoes, pickles, cucumbers, lettuce and beef shawarma. Drizzle with more tahini sauce and if preferred with a squeeze of lemon juice right before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 people if you serve it with the toppings/veggies, but if you decide to turn it into sandwiches/wraps, it will be enough for 6 servings.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: We used our own homemade shawarma seasoning mix, but if you prefer to use a storebought brand, I recommend using 3 tablespoons of seasoning.
  • The longer you marinate, the better: Technically, you can cook it after it has marinated for an hour, but like most meat recipes, the longer the beef stays in the marinade, the more delicious it becomes. If you have the time, I recommend marinating your meat overnight for the most profound flavor. This is one of those recipes where planning ahead pays dividends.
  • Store: You can store leftover steak shawarma in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 2-3 days.
  • Freeze: If you plan on preparing a few batches in advance, I highly recommend freezing the raw marinated meat (with the marinade) in a freezer-safe Ziploc bag until ready to use. However, you can also freeze the cooked meat in an airtight container for 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: To thaw your shawarma steak, place it in the fridge overnight and cook as directed in the recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 668kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 56g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Cholesterol: 136mg | Sodium: 1300mg | Potassium: 1273mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 6mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-shawarma/feed/ 1
Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/#comments Sun, 02 Jun 2024 17:12:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25252 If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have…]]>

If you are a fan of the flavors of elote, one of the most popular Mexican street foods, you have come to the right place! We have already shared Mexican Street Corn On The Cob, Mexican Street Corn Salad with Avocado, Air Fryer Elotes, Mexican Street Corn Soup and Elote Dip. This Mexican street corn pasta recipe is the newest addition to the collection.

A person is drizzling the elote pasta salad with chili lime dressing.

While I usually make this street corn macaroni salad during the summer months when sweet corn is in season, you can also make it using canned or frozen corn during the cooler months (i.e., during the football season and Cinco de Mayo celebrations). In this post, we cover everything you need to know, including ingredient substitutions, variations, making it with grilled (or sauteed) corn, and expert tips to guide you through the process.

Ingredients for Mexican Pasta Salad with Chili Lime Dressing:

The ingredients list for this pasta corn salad consists of a mix of fresh and store-bought ingredients. You will need two sets of ingredients: First, for the salad and second, for the chili lime dressing: 

For The Salad:

  • Sweet corn on the cob: You can make this salad by cooking the corn on the grill (or using a grill pan), sauteeing it in a skillet, or even cooking it in an air fryer. Our recipe below covers both methods of cooking. However, during the cooler months, when corn is not in season, you can use canned or frozen corn as well. 
  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil, like olive oil or avocado oil, but unsalted butter would also work.
  • Pasta: When making pasta salads, my favorite pasta shapes are fusilli, farfalle(bow-tie pasta), or cellentani. However, any pasta shape that can hold onto the dressing and mix well with other ingredients in the recipe would work here. If you are following a gluten-free diet, you can also use your favorite gluten-free pasta.
  • Jalapeno pepper: If you like the heat, keep the seeds on. If not, remove them before chopping the pepper into small pieces. Alternatively, you can use bell peppers if you prefer a milder flavor.
  • Onion: I used red onion, but green onions would also work for a lighter flavor. If you have them on hand, my Mexican pickled onions would also be a great addition.
  • Cilantro: Chopped fresh cilantro is a classic ingredient in any Mexican corn recipe, but if you are not a fan, you can use other fresh herbs like parsley or omit using it.
  • Cheese: The authentic elote recipe uses cotija cheese, so we used that, but you can also use queso fresco, shredded cheddar, or even crumbled feta cheese in a pinch.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For The Dressing:

  • Mayonnaise: Use a brand you like or make it at home
  • Sour cream: If you can find it, you can use Mexican crema (aka Mexican sour cream) instead of sour cream. 
  • Seasonings: I used a small amount of chili powder to complement the smoky and charred flavors of the corn, but it is optional. You will also need salt and pepper to season the recipe. If preferred, a cayenne pepper can also be added for some heat.
  • Lime zest and Lime Juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for the freshest flavors.

Optional Additions:

  • Cherry tomatoes: While it is not traditional, a handful of cherry tomatoes would be a lovely addition and make this grilled corn pasta salad a true summer salad. 
  • Garlic: A clove of minced garlic can be added to the creamy dressing, if preferred. If you prefer a lighter (less pungent) alternative, you can use a teaspoon of garlic powder as well.
  • Black Beans: Again, it is not traditional, but adding a can of drained and rinsed black beans would make this even more wholesome and filling.
  • Avocado: If you are an avocado lover, add a cubed ripe avocado to take this  Mexican corn pasta salad to the next level.
  • Grilled chicken: You can turn this sweet corn pasta salad into a delicious summer meal by adding some grilled chicken on top.

How To Make Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad?

While I prefer using grilled corn, you can make this street corn macaroni salad by sauteeing corn kernels in a skillet. Below are the steps to making it both ways:

Steps showing how to make elote pasta salad.
  1. Cook corn:
    1. Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    2. In a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  2. Cook the pasta: Meanwhile, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. You can reserve some pasta water just in case, but during our recipe testing, we didn’t think that it was necessary. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl. Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  3. Make the chili lime dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust your seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty!
Steps showing how to assemble Mexican pasta salad with corn recipe.
  1. Assemble the salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Serving Suggestions:

You can serve this grilled corn pasta salad by itself for a delicious pasta lunch or as a side dish with many of your vegetarian and meat dishes. Below are a few of my favorite dishes that you can pair it with:

  • Grilled seafood: The light and smokey flavors of Grilled Shrimp complement the creamy, spicy flavors of the salad. However, if you are feeding a crowd, you can also try my Grilled Sockeye Salmon for a well-rounded meal.
  • Tacos: The robust flavors of Grilled Flank Steak Tacos pair beautifully with this Mexican corn side dish, making it a summer feast. But if I am serving this salad during the cooler months, I pair it with my Slow Cooker Brisket Tacos for a meal that is perfect for a crowd.

Other Mexican recipes you might like:

If you make this Easy Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad recipe, I would appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Mexican street corn pasta salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad Recipe

This Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad is bursting with the flavors of fresh summer corn, jalapenos, red onion, and a creamy chili lime dressing. Ready in just 30 minutes, it's the perfect dish for feeding a crowd!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 353kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn:

  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil or melted butter
  • 6 ears corn – Husks removed – approximately 4 ½ to 5 cups of corn kernels or frozen or canned corn (see notes below)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For the Pasta:

  • 8 oz. dry uncooked pasta such as fusilli and farfalle (bowtie pasta)

For The Creamy Dressing:

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Mexican crema
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime (optional)
  • ¼ cup lime juice freshly squeezed from 1 ½ to 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Salad:

  • 2 medium jalapeno seeded and sliced/chopped
  • ½ cup red onion chopped finely
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro chopped – more to use as garnish
  • ½ cup cotija cheese crumbled

Instructions

  • When it comes to cooking the corn, you have two options:
    Grill Corn: Heat a gas grill to 400 degrees F. Peel back the husks of the corn and remove the silk. Brush them with the oil on all sides. Place them on the grill and cook for about 15-20 minutes, until lightly charred, turning them every 5 minutes to ensure even cooking. Let it cool for a few minutes, and then cut the corn kernels from the cob using a sharp knife.
    Cook it in a skillet: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil (or butter) in a large skillet over medium-high heat. Using a sharp knife, remove the corn kernels from the cob. Transfer them to the skillet and cook for 8-10 minutes or until slightly caramelized and charred in spots.
  • Cook the pasta: While the corn is cooling, season a big pot of water with a generous amount of salt and bring it to a boil. Add the pasta and cook until al dente, following the package instructions. Drain and set aside. Transfer the now-cooked pasta to a large bowl.
  • Add the now-cooked corn into the same bowl.
  • Make the Mexican Corn Dressing (Chili Lime Dressing): In a small bowl, whisk together mayo, sour cream, chili powder, lime juice, lime zest, salt, and pepper. Taste and adjust seasonings as necessary, keeping in mind that the cotija cheese for garnish is slightly salty.
  • Assemble the roasted corn pasta salad: Drizzle the dressing over the corn and pasta and toss to ensure they are evenly coated. Add in the jalapenos, onion, and cilantro. Stir to combine and garnish with chopped cilantro, if using. Taste your elote corn pasta salad for seasoning and add more if necessary.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 6-8 cups of pasta salad (the shape of the pasta you are using will change the volume), which is ideal for 6 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • What if I don’t have fresh corn? While I am a big fan of any pasta salad with fresh corn, to make this recipe year-round and still get that sweet corn flavor, you can use canned or frozen corn in place of the fresh. If you decide to do so, you can use:
    • Canned corn: For this recipe, you will need 3 (15 oz) cans of drained and rinsed corn.
    • Frozen corn kernels: You will need three (10 oz) bags. I like this option because the corn kernels are already off the cob, which saves you a step. Even better, there is no need to thaw. Simply add 1-2 minutes extra cooking time when sauteing the frozen corn in a skillet.
  • Be sure to salt the pasta water: Salting the cooking water allows the pasta to absorb some salt as it cooks, enhancing its flavor from the inside out so do not skip this step.
  • Toss while it is still warm: I know it’s tempting to add everything to the bowl and simply drizzle with dressing, but we’ve discovered that tossing the dressing with the corn and pasta while they’re still slightly warm allows them to better absorb the tangy, spicy flavors.
  • Serve it cold or warm: Like most pasta salads, this Mexican corn pasta salad can be served at room temperature, warm or cold. 
  • Make-Ahead: You can make this fresh corn pasta salad a day in advance. Simply assemble the pasta salad, but do not garnish with the cotija cheese or cilantro. Bring it to room temperature and store it in an airtight container. On the day you are going to serve, give it another gentle toss and let it come to room temperature. Add the cotija cheese and cilantro right before serving.
  • To Store Leftovers: Bring your Mexican pasta salad to room temperature and transfer it to an airtight container. As long as it is kept in the fridge, it should be good for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 49g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 14mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 403IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 81mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mexican-street-corn-pasta-salad/feed/ 26
Vermicelli Rice https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/#comments Thu, 30 May 2024 13:15:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75694 With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re…]]>

With so much rich, versatile flavor, this Lebanese rice pilaf recipe is just what your weeknight menu needs. If you’re craving even more rice and vermicelli recipes, my Chicken Rice Pilaf has a hearty yet fresh flavor that will satisfy any dinner party. Or, if you’re in the mood for a more robust, tomatoey side, my authentic Turkish Bulgur Pilaf is the perfect accompaniment to any meal.

Person fluffing freshly cooked Lebanese rice with vermicelli.

What is Vermicelli Rice?

Vermicelli rice—known as “riz bil sha’riyeh” in Arabic—is a classic Middle Eastern side dish made with three main ingredients: rice, vermicelli pasta, and oil. It may seem simple, but this basic pilaf recipe packs major flavor through its two-part cooking method: saute the pasta and then cook it with the rice.

Though some may add additional seasonings and ingredients to this recipe, its foundational roots run deep throughout Mediterranean and Arab countries, including countries like Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey. For this reason, people often refer to the recipe as Jordanian rice, Beiruti rice, Lebanese rice with vermicelli, or even a Syrian rice recipe. In Turkey, we call it “Sehriyeli Pilav.”

Rice with Vermicelli Ingredients

It’s hard to find a side dish with fewer ingredients than this rice vermicelli recipe. Not only does this side dish have an utterly delicious taste, but it’s also cost-effective—in fact, you likely have most of these ingredients ready in your home pantry!

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • White rice: Long grain rice is a ideal in this Mediterranean pilaf rice recipe because it’s fluffier than short-grain rice and doesn’t clump after cooking. I prefer to use Basmati rice, but you can also use another long-grain white rice or jasmine rice if desired.
  • Oil: Because of its rich yet neutral taste, I like to use extra virgin olive oil to saute my vermicelli. However, you can also use unsalted butter or a combination of oil and butter if you want a more full-bodied flavor. Ghee—a clarified butter common in Indian cuisine—is also an option to reduce the amount of lactose in your recipe.
  • Vermicelli: Vermicelli is a thin noodle similar to spaghetti but cut into smaller pieces —probably the reason people call it “angel hair pasta noodles” and “angel hair rice.” You should be able to find vermicelli in the “Middle Eastern” section of grocery stores, but you can also purchase vermicelli online (affiliate link.)
  • Liquid: To cook the basmati rice, you will need about four cups of liquid. I kept things simple by using water as the cooking liquid, but you can also enhance the savoriness of your final dish by using chicken stock, vegetable stock, or a combination of liquids instead.
  • Seasoning: This naturally tasty vermicelli rice recipe requires little seasoning. You only need salt, black pepper, and some fresh herbs (such as parsley or mint) to ensure your rice side is as fragrant and savory as possible.

Optional Add-Ins

While this Arabic rice recipe is quite simple, you’ll find variations that include optional add-ins, making each version unique to the region where it is prepared. Below are a few optional additions that can enhance the flavor and texture of the dish:

  • Spices: If you want to add deeper, warmer notes to this rice with vermicelli recipe, I recommend adding a pinch of ground cinnamon (or even a stick of cinnamon!) to the mix. You can also add some cardamom to give your seasoning a more floral taste.
  • Toasted Nuts: Adding toasted pine nuts is a great way to give this recipe extra nuttiness and a delectable crunch. You can also transform this dish into Mediterranean almond rice by adding toasted almonds instead.
  • Dried fruits: Dried apricots, raisins, or currants provide a sweet contrast to the overall savoriness of this rice recipe.
  • Vegetables: Incorporating sautéed onions, carrots, or peas can add both texture and nutrition.

How to Make Lebanese Rice?

Learning to make rice with vermicelli doesn’t need to be stressful. These foolproof instructions will walk you through every step, ensuring that it always comes out perfectly fluffy and flavorful.

Steps showing how to make rice with vermicelli.
  1. Rinse the rice: Pour the uncooked rice into a fine mesh strainer, rinse it with cold water until it runs clear, and drain it. Set the rinsed rice aside.
  2. Saute the vermicelli: Pour the olive oil into a medium-sized saucepan (with a lid), then heat it over medium heat. Add the vermicelli to the pot and, stirring constantly, saute until they turn a deep golden brown color (4-5 minutes). If necessary, adjust the heat level to avoid burning.
  3. Mix in the rice: Add the drained rice to the saucepan and saute it, constantly stirring it with noodles, for five minutes on medium-low heat. Once the rice thoroughly mixes with the vermicelli, season the grains with kosher salt and cinnamon (if using).
  4. Boil: Pour four cups of water into the pasta and rice mixture and bring it to a full boil. 
A collage of images showing how to make vermicelli rice pilaf.
  1. Simmer: Cover the saucepan and reduce the stovetop’s heat to low. Continue to simmer the mixture (without stirring!) for 15 minutes or until the grains absorb all the water.
  2. Let it rest: Remove your rice vermicelli pilaf from the heat and let it rest for five minutes. After resting, uncover the dish and fluff it with a fork.
  3. Serve: Taste the rice and vermicelli pilaf for seasoning and add more if necessary. If desired, garnish the mix with black pepper and fresh parsley.

What to Serve With This Dish?

Growing up in Turkey, my mom would serve this tasty side dish with a side of plain yogurt—a classic combination ideal, especially for kids when they need a quick after-school snack. 

However, there are many other delectable pairings to make, whether you’re looking for iconic Turkish or Lebanese dishes to serve with rice or a simple colorful salad to brighten up your weekday lunches.

  • Meat dishes: Aromatic and succulent, Chicken Shawarma, Beef Shawarma, and Chicken Tawook are excellent choices when you’re looking for a customizable spread. Or, if you want to pair your vermicelli rice with elegant Middle Eastern flavors, my Turkish Kofta will take any dinner party to the next level.
  • Stews & soups: This Lebanese vermicelli rice makes the perfect side dish for hearty stews. My Eggplant Beef Stew will delight your taste buds with rich, melt-in-your-mouth meat, while my Vegetable Beef Soup strikes the ultimate balance between light, herby, and savory flavors.
  • Salad: Fattoush Salad is a classic choice for anyone who loves a mix of crisp, herby, and filling flavors. Otherwise, you can serve a juicy and bold tomato salad like Piyaz on the side for a colorful, gourmet spread.
Rice with vermicelli on a plate with a spoon on the side from the top view.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

The best way to make this rice vermicelli dish is to use these pro-level pointers. With this easy guide, you can make a side as fluffy and savory as an authentic Lebanese restaurant.

  • Toast until golden brown: It’s essential that you toast your vermicelli long enough that it turns a light golden brown color, allowing it to develop a nutty flavor and tender texture before boiling. However, keep an eye on your vermicelli while sauteing it and stir it constantly to keep it from sticking to the pan or burning under the heat.
  • Rinse rice: You must rinse your rice under running water before adding it to this recipe to remove excess starch and unwanted debris. You may also soak the rice in hot water for 20 minutes before cooking it to speed up the cooking process, though I found this step unnecessary.
  • Ideal ratio: I find that the ideal rice-to-water ratio is one cup of rice for every two cups of water/liquid. Of course, this ratio may change slightly based on the specific ingredients you use and your desired end texture. However, this 1:2 ratio is a great starting point when making most vermicelli and rice recipes.
  • Let it rest: 5-10 minutes of rest is vital after cooking rice pilaf with vermicelli, as it gives the liquid time to evaporate and absorb into the grains once it’s done simmering. 
  • Use a kitchen towel to absorb moisture: In many Arabic countries, a common technique to ensure perfectly cooked vermicelli rice involves placing a clean kitchen cloth under the lid of the pot after the rice is cooked for 10-15 minutes before serving. This practice helps absorb excess moisture and prevents the rice from becoming too soggy. I didn’t choose to do this because I find that basmati rice tends to absorb liquid well, producing vermicelli rice that is perfectly fluffy and tender. However, if you use medium or short-grain rice, you may have to use this method to prevent rice from sticking.

FAQs

What’s the difference between vermicelli and rice vermicelli?

Despite their similar names, vermicelli and rice vermicelli aren’t the same thing. Vermicelli is popular in Italian and Middle Eastern cuisine, and it comes from a base of wheat flour and (sometimes) eggs. Because of this, it has the golden color of traditional Italian pasta and a thickness between angel hair pasta and spaghetti noodles. By contrast, rice vermicelli—a popular ingredient in Asian cuisine—comes from a mixture of rice flour and water, has a thinner shape, and is often white or slightly translucent.

What is vermicelli made out of?

Vermicelli noodles come from a mixture of wheat flour, water, and sometimes eggs. People then press this dough into a thin, angel hair-like shape and cook it in oil or water when ready to eat.

Is vermicelli rice healthy?

With proper portion control, vermicelli rice can offer some health benefits. For instance, basmati rice has a low glycemic index—an excellent choice for those watching their blood sugar levels. However, this recipe also uses oil and butter to saute its ingredients, so its fat levels may be higher, depending on your preparation method.

Are vermicelli gluten-free?

Vermicelli pasta isn’t gluten-free, as it contains wheat flour.

Other Rice Recipes You Might Like:

If you make your own Vermicelli with Rice following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Vermicelli rice on a plate with a spoon on the side.
Print

Vermicelli Rice Recipe

This vermicelli rice recipe combines toasted vermicelli with long grain rice for a fluffy and flavorful side dish. A staple in Middle Eastern cuisine, it is perfect for any main dish.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 338kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups long-grain rice such as Basmati rice
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ cup vermicelli
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 cups water chicken broth, or vegetable stock
  • 1/8 teaspoon cinnamon or a small cinnamon stick (optional)
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper optional
  • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley optional garnish

Instructions

  • Place the rice in a fine mesh strainer and rinse with cold water until it runs clear. Drain well and set it aside.
  • In a medium-sized saucepan, heat the olive oil on medium-high heat. Add the vermicelli and saute, stirring constantly, until golden brown, about 4-5 minutes.
  • Add the now-drained rice to the pot and saute, stirring constantly, for 5 minutes on medium-low heat until the rice is fully incorporated with vermicelli. Season with kosher salt and cinnamon, if using.
  • Add the 4 cups of water and bring the mixture to a full boil. Cover and reduce the heat to low.
  • Continue to simmer without stirring for 15-20 minutes until all the water is absorbed.
  • Remove from the heat and let it rest, covered, for 5 minutes. Uncover and fluff with a fork.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust as necessary. Garnish with black pepper and chopped parsley, if desired.

Notes

  • Yields: This vermicelli rice recipe makes 5-6 cups of rice, ideal for 6 servings as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Store: You can store your leftover vermicelli and rice pilaf in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Reheat: To reheat this dish, I recommend microwaving it in 30-second increments until warmed to your liking. You may also consider adding a splash of chicken stock or water to the mixture to keep it from drying out while reheating. Alternatively, you can put the leftovers in a saucepan (with a splash of water/broth) and heat on low-heat until thoroughly warmed.
  • Use boiling water: If you’re on a time crunch, you can also hasten the cooking process of this dish by using boiling water when adding it to the toasted vermicelli and rice. That way, you don’t have to spend extra time waiting for the water to come to a boil.
  • Gentle heat: As soon as your mixture comes to a boil, turn down the heat and bring it to a simmer. This way, the grains can absorb the liquid at a natural rate, and your pot won’t boil over once you add the lid. During the simmering process, I’d like to move it to the smallest burner, also referred to as the simmer burner, to ensure my rice cooks in gentle heat.

Nutrition

Calories: 338kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Sodium: 435mg | Potassium: 78mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 0.002mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vermicelli-rice/feed/ 1
Ayran – Turkish Salty Yogurt Drink https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/ https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/#comments Wed, 15 May 2024 20:46:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75384 What is Ayran? If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the…]]>

What is Ayran?

If you have visited Turkey or been to a Turkish restaurant, you have probably heard about the popular Turkish yoghurt drink, ayran. It is one of the most popular drinks we serve with any spicy meal, whether kabob or vegetables. Made up of only three ingredients: yogurt, water, and salt, a serving of Turkish ayran is considered one of the best ways to treat yourself on a hot summer day.

A glass of froth ayran in a glass from the front view.

While it originated from Turkey, many Balkan, Central Asia, Middle East, and Mediterranean countries, such as Greece, Bulgaria, Armenia, Iran, Lebanon, and Iraq, also serve this salted yogurt drink with minor variations. For example, the Iranian version of ayran, called doogh, is often served with fresh mint, while the Arabs make a similar version and call it laban. The Greek version, ariani, is also very similar to ayran.

If you are familiar with Indian lassi, you might recognize the similarity in the texture of both drinks. However, unlike ayran, lassi is usually served sweet, often flavored with sugar, honey, or fresh fruit. 

Ayran Ingredients

The good news is that this Turkish yogurt drink recipe uses only 3 simple ingredients you probably already have on hand. You will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Plain Yogurt: I recommend using plain whole milk yogurt with no added sugars. You can also use low-fat or no-fat yogurt, but low-fat yogurt may not achieve the traditional creamy consistency. On the other hand, you can use plain Greek yogurt (also known as strained yogurt), but since it is thicker, you will need to use more water to adjust its consistency.
  • Cold Water: To keep this Mediterranean yogurt drink super refreshing, using cold water is essential. Some recipes suggest using ice, but I don’t recommend it as it can dilute the drink, affecting its consistency and texture.
  • Salt: You can use kosher, table, or sea salt. 

Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions:

  • Mint: During the summer months, I usually add a few leaves of chopped fresh mint to my ayran recipe. You can, however, also use dried mint if that is all you have.
  • Sparkling water: Growing up, we never added sparkling water to ayran, but with carbonated drinks becoming more popular, I see many people making this yogurt drink with sparkling water instead of regular water. This simple substitution for water can make it more palatable for people who enjoy carbonated beverages and are looking for a unique twist on the classic Ayran Turkish drink recipe.
  • Cucumber: Again, it’s not traditional, but I’ve seen a few slices of cucumber added as a garnish to make it look appetizing and reiterate that it is a salty drink.

How To Make Turkish Ayran?

The best part about making this Turkish yogurt recipe is that it takes no more than 5 minutes. I prefer a whisk, but you can also use an electric blender. Whipping it up in a blender is especially handy if serving it to a crowd or making a large batch. Below are the steps to make it both ways:

A collage of images showing how to make ayran drink.
  1. Ensure a smooth texture: Place yogurt in a large bowl or measuring cup and whisk until it is smooth and free of lumps. 
  2. Whisk: Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined. Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary. Alternatively, you can put all of the ingredients in a blender and blend until fully combined.
  3. Chill: Tightly cover your yogurt milk drink in a glass bottle with a lid (or stretch film). Store in the fridge until ready to serve or for up to 2 days.
  4. Garnish & serve: Give it a good shake before pouring it into glasses, and garnish with fresh mint leaves if desired.

What To Serve with Ayran?

This Middle Eastern yogurt drink pairs wonderfully with several dishes, especially those with bold flavors and spices. Whether you’re having a meaty feast, a vegetarian delight, or a simple snack, ayran enhances the flavors and provides a refreshing balance to any dish it’s served with. Here are some delicious options to serve alongside this refreshing yogurt drink:

  • Kabobs: Whether you serve Shish Taouk, Chicken Shawarma, Doner Kebab, or Oven-Baked Beef Kabobs, ayran is the perfect accompaniment, providing a cooling and balancing effect.
  • Meat dishes: Popular Turkish dishes like Turkish Stuffed Eggplant (aka Karniyarik), Turkish Kofta Meatballs, Roast Rack of Lamb, Turkish Pasta, or lahmacun pair beautifully with this ayran yoghurt drink. The cold and refreshing drink cut through the richness of these hearty meat dishes (and spicy foods in general), enhancing the overall flavors.
  • Vegetarian Dishes: This drinkable yogurt drink pairs well with vegetarian dishes like Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, Spinach Borek, and Turkish Tabbouleh. Its tangy flavors complement the savoriness of these dishes, adding a refreshing touch to your meal.
  • Snack: If you want to transport yourself to Turkey within seconds, you need to do what Turks do: Serve ayran with simit (also known as Turkish bagel) for a simple yet satisfying snack. The chewy, sesame-coated bread and the cool, salty yogurt drink are delightful at any time of the day.
Middle eastern yogurt drink served in glasses and in a glass jar.

FAQs

What does ayran taste like?

Ayran has a refreshing, tangy flavor with a slight saltiness. The yogurt gives it a creamy texture, while the added water makes it light and easy to drink. 

Are ayran and kefir the same thing?

No, ayran and kefir are not the same things. Kefir is a fermented milk drink made using kefir grains, which contain a mix of bacteria and yeast, while ayran is made by mixing yogurt, water, and salt. They both have a tangy taste, but kefir offers a slightly effervescent texture due to the fermentation process.

What are the benefits of drinking ayran?

The traditional Turkish drink offers several health benefits. Since it is yogurt-based beverage, it is high in protein and a great source of essential nutrients, including calcium, potassium, and vitamin B12. Additionally, its salt content can help replenish electrolytes lost through sweat, making it particularly beneficial during hot weather or after physical activity. Lastly, the yogurt in ayran provides probiotics, improving gut health and aiding digestion.

Other Must-Try Turkish Recipes

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

A glass of Ayran Turkish yogurt drink from the front view.
Print

Ayran Recipe – Turkish Yogurt Drink

Enjoy the deliciously refreshing Ayran, a Turkish salted yogurt drink made from yogurt, water, and a pinch of salt. Serve it as an accompaniment to your favorite kabobs and meat dishes, or treat yourself to a healthy midday snack to cool off on a hot day.
Course Non Alcoholic Drink
Cuisine Turkish
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 75kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups whole milk plain yogurt unsweetened
  • 1 cup cold water
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add-Ins

  • A few leaves fresh mint chopped or dried mint

Instructions

  • Place yogurt in a bowl and whisk until smooth and no lumps remain.
  • Add water and salt to the bowl and whisk vigorously until combined and the texture is creamy and smooth.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • If preferred, add in some chopped mint for flavor. Pour into a glass jar, cover tightly with a lid, and chill until ready to serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 4-5 cups of ayran, ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Yogurt: While I highly recommend using whole milk yogurt, you can also use low- or nonfat yogurt, though it won’t be as creamy. Greek yogurt can also be used, but you should use more water (about 1/2 to 3/4 cup) to get the right consistency. 
  • Storage: This yogurt drink will keep fresh in the fridge for up to 2-3 days as long as it is kept in an airtight container (such as a glass jar with a tight-fitting lid). Be sure to shake well before serving.
  • Foam on top: The ayran served in most kebab restaurants has a layer of foam on top, filled with visible air bubbles. Many Turkish people consider frothy ayran a sign of freshness and consider it the best part of the drink. When making it at home, the way to achieve bubbles on top is to whisk or shake it vigorously.
  • Adjust consistency and taste: The ideal yogurt-to-water ratio is 2 to 1. In other words, to make 4 servings of this yogurt drink, I use 2 cups of yogurt and 1 cup of water. However, you can adjust the consistency to your preference by adding more or less of each ingredient. The same goes for the amount of salt you use.
  • Serve it chilled: This drink is best served cold. For the best results, make a batch and store it in a glass jar in the fridge. You can also put the ingredients in a cocktail shaker with a few ice cubes, shake it vigorously, and strain it into a glass. Be sure to strain out the ice to avoid diluting the drink.
  • Keep it in the fridge: Since ayran is a dairy-based drink, it should be stored in the fridge (At or below 40°F (4°C)) to prevent bacterial growth and spoilage.

Nutrition

Calories: 75kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 16mg | Sodium: 205mg | Potassium: 190mg | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 121IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 0.1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/ayran-turkish-yogurt-drink/feed/ 1
Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/#comments Fri, 10 May 2024 16:36:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75223 Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this…]]>

Middle Eastern chicken recipes are essential for anyone who loves savory, aromatic, and juicy flavors. After you try out this homemade chicken shawarma, you can take your cooking to the next level by making other iconic Middle Eastern recipes, like my tender Shish Tawook and tangy Greek Yogurt Marinade.

Can’t get enough of the shawarma goodness? Also, try our Beef Shawarma recipe.

Mediterranean chicken shawarma served with pickles, lettuce, onion and tomatoes on a plate.

What is Chicken Shawarma?

Chicken shawarma is a quintessential Middle Eastern dish and popular street food made by slow-cooking a large cut of meat on a vertical spit. Chefs then shave off thin slices of meat from the outer edge and add it to the final recipe, whether a chicken shawarma wrap, pita pocket, or bowl.

Technically, shawarma is an Arabic food native to countries like Syria and Lebanon. However, this slow-cooked vertical rotisserie technique has many other versions based on the country of origin. 

For example, I grew up in Turkey eating doner kebabs, which are similar to shawarma except with less seasoning, emphasizing the meat’s natural flavors. Another popular variation is the Greek gyro, which uses a more herbaceous seasoning mix and often includes other meats like pork, lamb, and chicken.

Chicken Shawarma Ingredients

You don’t need to be an expert in Arabic cuisine to make shawarma worthy of a restaurant. Below, I’ve outlined all the ingredients you’ll need to make this simple dish, whether you want to make a marinade for chicken shawarma or are looking for expert topping ideas.

  • Seasoning: When it comes to shawarma chicken seasoning, you have two options: If you’re in a time crunch, you can buy it at the store for an easy, premade mix (my favorite store-bought brand is New York Shuk (affiliate link). Or, you can follow in my footsteps and make your own by following my Shawarma Spice Mix Recipe. If you choose the latter, you’ll need the following ingredients:
    • Ground cumin
    • Ground coriander
    • Paprika
    • Garlic powder
    • Black pepper
    • Ground turmeric
    • Ground cloves
    • Ground cinnamon
    • Ground nutmeg
    • Ground cardamom
Shawarma chicken spices and marinade ingredients from the top view with text on the image.
  • Chicken: I prefer boneless, skinless chicken thighs for this recipe, as they tend to be more flavorful than other cuts. However, depending on your preference, you could also use skinless chicken breasts or a combination of breasts and thighs.
  • Marinade: To make a chicken shawarma marinade, you’ll need a simple mixture of:
    • Kosher salt
    • Fresh lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh cloves of garlic: Though it’s optional (the seasoning already has garlic powder), I’d like to add a few cloves of garlic to the marinade.
  • Toppings: One of the best things about this recipe is its easy customization with your favorite chicken shawarma toppings. Of course, you can choose whatever toppings you prefer. Still, if you want to serve your shawarma like I do, I recommend beginning with a sauce (like my favorite Yogurt Garlic Sauce or a classic Tzatziki), then adding tomato, lettuce, and turnip pickles. Furthermore, I also recommend using Middle Eastern bread—such as lavash, pita, or naan—as the dish’s base.

How to Make Shawarma Chicken?

True, a traditional chicken shawarma recipe usually involves slow-roasting the meat on a vertical spit. However, if you don’t have a rotisserie skewer on hand, don’t worry!

Below, you’ll find out how to make a homemade version of traditional shawarma in three easy ways (baked, grilled, and pan-seared)—all without sacrificing an ounce of delicious flavor.

A collage of images showing how to make chicken shawarma marinade.
  1. Make the chicken shawarma seasoning: Place the ground cumin, ground coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, ground turmeric, ground cloves, ground cinnamon, ground nutmeg, and ground cardamom in a large bowl. Mix the spices until thoroughly combined, then set them aside. 
  2. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken thighs, then sprinkle both sides with salt.
  3. Marinate: Place the chicken in a large bowl. Then, add the shawarma seasoning, lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic (if used) and combine. Cover the bowl with stretch film and let the meat marinate for three hours or overnight.
A collage of images showing how to cook shawarma chicken in the oven, on the stove and on the grill.
  1. Cook the meat: You have three choices when it’s time to cook your chicken:
    • To make an oven-roasted chicken shawarma, preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.), and arrange the marinated chicken on a baking sheet. Place the pan in the middle rack and bake the chicken for 18-20 minutes or until the thickest part of the meat registers 165 degrees F. with a digital thermometer. If you want more thoroughly browned chicken, move the pan to the top rack and broil it for 2-3 minutes, ensuring you keep a close eye on the meat.
    • To make chicken shawarma on the stovetop, heat a large skillet over medium-high heat until hot (cast-iron, stainless steel, or non-stick pans would all work in this variation). Place the marinated thighs on the hot skillet and cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Then, turn the chicken to their other side and cook for another three minutes or until the meat reaches 165 degrees F. Depending on the size of your skillet, it may be best to cook your chicken in two batches to avoid overcrowding.
    • To make grilled shawarma chicken, begin by preheating your grill to 450 degrees F. Then, scrape the grill grates to remove any food residue and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Once the grill is heated, place the chicken on the grates, close the cover, and cook the thighs for five minutes on one side. Finish the cooking process by turning the chicken pieces to the other side and continue grilling for 3-4 minutes or until your chicken is cooked.
Freshly cooked chicken shawarma recipe on a plate.
  1. Rest and serve: Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate, cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest for five minutes. Once rested, serve the meat with your favorite toppings and enjoy.

How to Serve Chicken Shawarma?

Want to make the most of this Lebanese chicken shawarma recipe? Not only can you customize your shawarma toppings, but you can also choose how you want to eat it—in a wrap, pocket, bowl, or beyond!

Chicken Shawarma wrap made two ways, one with flatbread and one in a pita pocket.
  • Make it a wrap: One of the most iconic ways to enjoy this chicken dish is to turn it into a Middle Eastern wrap. Simply place the chicken slices on a flatbread, like lavash or naan bread, or sliced pita bread to make a shawarma pocket. To lend it creamy, nutty notes, you can also spread your bread with tahini sauce, like my tangy Yogurt Tahini Sauce. For a zesty and herby twist, try my Schug Sauce or Lemon Tahini Sauce. Finally, top the wrap with fresh ingredients, such as tomatoes, lettuce, pink turnip pickles, and pickled red onion, and enjoy.
  • Chicken Shawarma Bowl: If you’re not looking to make a handheld meal, this chicken shawarma couldn’t be easier to transform into a fork-ready meal. Serve your chicken pieces atop a base of savory Bulgur Pilaf or tender vermicelli rice, then top it with sliced tomatoes, cucumbers, and a dollop of Hummus. Voila! A complete, hassle-free meal.

What to Serve with Chicken Shawarma?

There are countless ways to enjoy this quick chicken shawarma recipe. Whether you’re in the mood for a chicken shawarma pita wrap or a hearty bowl of greens, these ideas will take your basic recipe to the next level.

  • Tzatziki Sauce: Want a classic chicken shawarma sauce to serve with your succulent main? I’ve got you covered. Tzatziki strikes a delectable balance between light and tangy flavors, perfectly balancing the chicken’s savory, well-spiced flavors.
  • Tabbouleh: Flavorful yet filling, tabbouleh is a delicious grain that transforms your protein into a complete meal. Try your chicken shawarma alongside my Turkish Tabbouleh Recipe or Quinoa Tabbouleh for an irresistibly bright, Mediterranean taste. 
  • Salad: You don’t need a grain to turn this Greek shawarma into a tasty meal. Try using your chicken to top a crispy-fresh Greek salad or a juicy tomato salad, like my ten-minute Piyaz, and you’ll never be at a loss for quick lunch ideas again.
  • Drink: If you want to do it as they do it in the Middle East, skip the soda and serve it with the popular salted yogurt drink (aka ayran). This refreshing drink cools it down and helps balance the flavors of the spicy chicken.

How to Store and Freeze?

After trying this home shawarma, you won’t want to let a single bite go to waste. These foolproof storage tips will keep your chicken as fresh and flavorful as possible—just what you need for easy meal prep!

  • Storage: Planning to store this dish from the get-go? I highly encourage storing each shawarma ingredient—such as the meat, toppings, and bread—in separate containers to ensure the utmost freshness. Then, you can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. When ready to eat, reheat the slices and assemble your final dish just before serving.
  • Freezing: The best way to freeze this dish is to place your raw chicken and its marinade in an airtight container in the freezer. That way, you have a ready-made meal whenever the craving strikes. However, if you want to freeze leftovers, bring your chicken to room temperature and place it in an airtight container or freezer-safe bag with as much air removed as possible. Then, store it in the freezer until ready to thaw. 
  • Thawing & reheating: To thaw your frozen shawarma, begin by placing it in the fridge overnight. Then, reheat it in a preheated 350-degree F. oven for at least five minutes or until warmed to your liking. Once heated through, your chicken is ready to eat!

FAQs

Want to know more about this Arabic chicken shawarma recipe? Below, you’ll find answers to any remaining questions, from taste profiles to regional variations.

What does chicken shawarma taste like?

Rich, complex, and savory, chicken shawarma gets its big flavors from a warm and mildly spicy mix of traditional Middle Eastern ingredients, such as cumin, cloves, and cardamom. Furthermore, it’s traditionally cooked using a vertical spit, giving each slice a tender yet crisp finish that tastes amazing when added to dishes like Mediterranean wraps, bowls, and pita pockets.

What is the difference between shawarma and gyros?

In essence, the cooking process for shawarma and gyros is the same, as both use a vertical spit to slowly cook a large cut of meat in a rotisserie-like fashion. However, these two street foods call for slightly different seasoning mixes. For instance, Middle Eastern shawarma usually has a chicken base and a bolder mix of warm, fragrant spices. By contrast, gyros have a Grecian background and, as a result, have a lighter, more herby seasoning mix.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you make your own Easy Chicken Shawarma following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Chicken shawarma served with lettuce, tomatoes, pickles and garlic yogurt sauce on a plate.
Print

Easy Chicken Shawarma Recipe

Bring the Middle East home with this Easy Chicken Shawarma recipe. Boneless chicken thighs marinated with shawarma seasoning cooked to perfection and then served in warm pita pockets (or flatbread.) This is a feast anyone can make with this foolproof recipe.
Course Chicken, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading Time 8 hours
Total Time 8 hours 35 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 492kcal

Ingredients

For The Shawarma Seasoning

  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon ground coriander
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 teaspoon ground turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon ground nutmeg
  • ½ teaspoon ground cardamom

For The Marinade:

  • 2 lbs. Boneless skinless chicken thighs about 8 chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 cloves garlic minced (optional)

To Serve (optional):

Instructions

  • Add ground cumin, coriander, paprika, garlic powder, black pepper, turmeric, cloves, cinnamon, nutmeg, and cardamom in a large bowl. Mix until thoroughly combined. Set it aside.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels and sprinkle them with salt on both sides.
  • Transfer them into the bowl with the spices.
  • Add lemon juice, olive oil, and garlic if using. Stir to combine.
  • Cover it with stretch film and marinate it for 1 hour or overnight.

To bake in the oven:

  • Preheat your oven to 425 degrees F. (218 degrees F.). Arrange the marinated chicken on the sheet pan and place it in the middle rack. Bake for 18-20 minutes or until a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of a chicken registers 165 degrees F. If you prefer your chicken shawarma to be on the browned side, move the sheet pan to the top rack and broil for 2-3 minutes (while watching it closely).

To cook on the stovetop:

  • Heat a large skillet (cast iron, stainless steel, or non-stick would all work) over medium-high heat until hot. Place chicken thighs on the skillet. Cook the first side for 4-5 minutes or until lightly charred. Turn and cook the other side for another 3 minutes or until the chicken is fully cooked (until it reaches 165 degrees F.) Depending on the size of your skillet, it is best to do this in two batches instead of overcrowding the pan.

To grill:

  • Preheat your grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Clean grill grates and brush them generously with vegetable oil. Place the chicken on the grill, close it with the cover, and cook for 5 minutes on the first side. Turn the chicken and cook for another 3-4 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. when an instant-read thermometer is inserted in the thickest part of the meat.

Cooking it on a vertical skewer pan (or the make shift version*)

  • Assemble a vertical skewer pan according to the packaging instructions. Prepare the chicken as directed in the recipe.
  • Preheat oven to 375 degrees F. Thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, stacking the pieces tightly, and rotating each one as you go. This helps the stack hold together and ensures even cooking. If there’s any marinade left in the bowl, spoon it over the stack.
  • Transfer it onto a baking sheet and pop it in the oven. Bake for 1 ¼ to 1 ½ hours or until the thickest part of the stack registers 165 degrees F, basting it with a spoon halfway through the baking process.
  • Remove from the oven, let it rest, and slice before serving.

To serve:

  • Transfer the cooked chicken shawarma onto a plate. Cover with foil and let it rest for 5 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare your garnishes. Make a batch of our yogurt tahini sauce (or tzatziki), slice a few tomatoes, and chop some lettuce.
  • Slice chicken into ½-inch strips, reserving the juices.
  • To make a shawarma wrap, spread your bread with a generous amount of tahini sauce and top it off with shawarma chicken, tomatoes, and lettuce. Alternatively, use pita bread: slice it in half to use the pocket, filling it with the sauce, meat, and vegetables. Drizzle the wrap with the leftover juices and more tahini sauce over the top, and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 6 people generously with about 1 ¼ chicken thighs per person. The nutritional values below include the toppings and they are per serving.
  • Shawarma Seasoning: If you prefer not to make your own shawarma seasoning, you can buy it from the store. Our favorite brand is NYShuk (affiliate link) and we recommend using 2 tablespoons of shawarma spice per pound of meat.
  • Marinating time: While it requires some advance prep, I highly recommend marinating your meat in shawarma chicken spices before cooking. This is the secret to making the best chicken shawarma recipe. The marination process allows the seasoning to fully infuse the meat with smoky, savory flavors, ensuring each bite has the same depth and complexity. For best results, marinate your chicken for at least one hour or overnight before cooking.
  • High-heat cooking: High heat is a must in this recipe, whether baking, grilling, or cooking your chicken on the stovetop. Properly heating your cooking vessel helps sear the outside of the meat, create a crispy edge, and lock in the juices—a similar taste to what a traditional roasting spit would make. 
  • Let the meat rest: Another great way to get the most flavorful chicken shawarma is to rest 10-15 minutes after cooking. Doing so allows the meat reabsorb and evenly distribute its juices, giving each slice a succulent, bold flavor.
  • Storage: You can store your cooked shawarma chicken in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. 
  • Make-shift vertical spit: Alternatively, you can make your own “make-shift” vertical skewer pan. To do so, take a large onion, cut it in half, and run a skewer through the flat side, creating a sturdy base. Transfer it onto the baking sheet, and then thread the marinated chicken onto the skewer, just like you would with the vertical skewer pan. Please watch the how-to video for a visual.

Nutrition

Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 150mg | Sodium: 1316mg | Potassium: 579mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1420IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 142mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-shawarma-recipe/feed/ 3
Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/#comments Thu, 09 May 2024 15:35:36 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=75139 Ingredients You’ll Need While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are…]]>

The Art of Using Greek Yogurt in Savory Recipes

Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

When I first moved to the US over 20 years ago, my friends would tease me for adding plain yogurt to almost everything. Growing up in Türkiye, that was just how we ate. 

I still can’t imagine a savory meal without a scoop of yogurt on the side.

While the US has finally embraced yogurt as a breakfast staple, there is a whole world of savory possibilities for this ingredient. And let me tell you, we haven’t even scratched the surface of what it can do.

This Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce is the perfect place to start.

Here is why this recipe works where others fail:

  • Room-temperature ingredients are key: I know it’s tempting to grab the yogurt right out of the fridge when you’re in a hurry, but please take the chill off first! If you drop ice-cold yogurt into a hot pan, it basically “panics” and seizes up, which is how you end up with that grainy, separated mess. Just let all your ingredients sit on the counter for 10-15 minutes while the water boils. Giving it a little head start at room temperature is the easiest way to guarantee your sauce stays nice and silky.
  • Low & controlled heat is key to preventing curdling: Many creamy sauces require a rolling boil to thicken and become creamy. Yogurt, however, is prone to curdling because it has a lower fat-to-protein ratio than heavy cream. The “secret” here is to keep the heat low and only warm the sauce until it’s silky and combined.
  • The Umami Balance: While you can mimic the texture, you often run into a taste issue. Greek yogurt is naturally tangy, and it can be overwhelming on its own. My solution here is Parmesan cheese. I use it not only to tame the tangy flavor of yogurt but also to round out its acidity with its salty umami notes. This is why I can confidently say this sauce is a good alternative to a rich, creamy traditional Alfredo.
  • Starch as the Emulsifier: Instead of using a roux or flour, we use starchy pasta water to bind the yogurt and cheese. This way, the sauce won’t slide off the pasta or separate.
  • A “Lighter” Decadence: You get a similar, satisfying mouthfeel to a traditional cream sauce, with a protein boost and none of the heavy feeling afterward.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While you’ll find the full ingredient list and exact measurements in the recipe card below, here are a few helpful notes to keep in mind as you gather everything.

Flat lay of ingredients for Greek yogurt pasta sauce including fettuccine, a bowl of yogurt, garlic cloves, and fresh parsley on a marble surface.

Pasta: I usually reach for a long pasta (like fettuccine and spaghetti), as it pairs well with creamy sauces, but any pasta you enjoy will work.

However, penne or similar shapes work just as well. If you are following a gluten-free diet, feel free to use your favorite gluten-free pasta. And for a veggie-packed option, my zucchini noodles are also a great alternative.

Greek yogurt: Be sure to use plain, full-fat Greek yogurt and let it come to room temperature before starting. Low-fat or nonfat yogurt is more likely to curdle and doesn’t have the same silky consistency because it doesn’t have enough fat.

Short on time? I get it, if you are making it for a quick weeknight dinner, it is likely that you won’t have the time to take out the yogurt in advance. A good shortcut is to put the yogurt in a jar and soak it in a bowl of warm water for 5 minutes.

Butter: I use unsalted butter so I can control the seasoning more precisely. Olive oil can also be used, but I prefer the depth of flavor you get with butter.

Garlic: Fresh garlic is best for this recipe. Peel and mince it finely so it softens quickly without browning. For a lighter garlic flavor, you can use ¾ to 1 teaspoon garlic powder.

Parmesan cheese: Pick up a block of Parmigiana Reggiano (and grate it yourself) or buy the grated cheese containers near the cheese section. Pecorino Romano can be a great substitute if need be.

Red pepper flakes (optional): A small pinch adds a gentle heat; you can leave them out if you prefer a milder dish.

Nutmeg (optional): If you are making this as an Alfredo sauce alternative, add a pinch of nutmeg to mimic the classic Alfredo sauce.

How to Make Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

Making this pasta sauce with Greek yogurt recipe is simple and takes no more than 20 minutes from start to finish. 

The key is gentle heat and a little patience when warming the yogurt. Here’s how I make it:

Side by side image showing fettuccine boiling in a pot and a hand reserving a cup of starchy pasta water for the sauce.

Step 1 – Cook the pasta: Start by bringing a large pot of generously salted water to a boil. Add the pasta and cook according to the package directions until al dente, about 12 to 14 minutes. 

Pro Tip: Your pasta should have a slight bite. If you cook it too long, it will likely get mushy when mixed with the sauce.

Step 2 – Reserve the pasta water: Before draining, carefully reserve 1 cup of the pasta cooking water (you won’t need all of it, but it’s good to have extra). 

This starchy water is essential for loosening the sauce later and helping it coat the pasta smoothly. Drain the cooked pasta and set it aside.

Two-panel image showing garlic sautéing in butter and shredded Parmesan cheese being whisked into a creamy Greek yogurt base.

Step 3 – Sauté the garlic: Return the now-empty pot to the stove and melt the butter over medium-low heat. Add the minced garlic and cook for about 1-2 minutes, just until fragrant. Adjust the heat as needed to avoid burning the butter or garlic.

Step 4 – Make the yogurt sauce: Reduce the heat to very low. Add the full-fat, room-temperature Greek yogurt and Parmesan cheese. Stir constantly for 1-2 minutes, just until the yogurt is gently warmed and the cheese has fully melted.

Do not let the sauce simmer, boil, or bubble. The yogurt should warm slowly. Add the reserved pasta water gradually, 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring continuously, until the sauce loosens and reaches your desired consistency. This starchy water is what helps emulsify the yogurt and cheese into a velvety sauce that clings to the noodles.

Pro Tip: This process, adding warm pasta water gradually into cool yogurt, is called tempering, and it is critical to making this recipe work. If you add it in large quantities without whisking, the proteins in the sauce will “panic,” and your yogurt pasta sauce will likely curdle.

This is also a good time to season with salt and black pepper to taste.

A collage of images showing cooked fettuccine being tossed in yogurt sauce and the final garnished pasta in the pot.

Step 5 – Add the pasta to the yogurt sauce: Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss with kitchen tongs until all the noodles are evenly coated with the sauce.

Step 6 – Garnish and serve: Transfer the pasta to a serving bowl and finish with chopped fresh parsley, red pepper flakes (if using), and extra Parmesan cheese. Serve while it is still warm.

A large bowl of creamy fettuccine made with a Greek yogurt pasta sauce, topped with fresh parsley and red pepper flakes.

Troubleshooting Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce

If you follow this yogurt sauce for pasta recipe as written, you should not run into any issues. That said, if something looks off, here are a few ways to fix things:

How to fix a broken sauce?: Remove the pan from the heat and whisk in a small amount of additional Greek yogurt, about 1 tablespoon, until the sauce comes back together.

Sauce looks grainy: This usually means the heat was too high. Lower the heat and continue stirring gently. The sauce should be warmed through, not cooked for a long time or allowed to bubble.

It’s too thick. How do I thin it out?: Add more reserved pasta water, no more than 1 tablespoon at a time, stirring well between each addition until the sauce loosens to your liking.

Greek yogurt alfredo sauce mixed with cooked noodles in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Greek Yogurt Pasta Sauce Recipe

This creamless Greek yogurt pasta sauce is silky-smooth and ready in just 20 minutes. It's a protein-packed alternative to Alfredo that uses a simple trick; slowly whisking in warm pasta water-to keep the yogurt from curdling at low heat. A budget-friendly, five-ingredient meal that feels fancy but is easy enough for a busy weeknight.
Course Dinner, Vegetarian Pasta
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 375kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces fettuccine pasta or other pasta, such as spaghetti
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled and minced
  • 1 cup plain whole milk Greek yogurt at room temperature
  • cup shredded parmesan cheese plus more as garnish
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt plus more for the pasta cooking water
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • ½ cup parsley roughly chopped
  • 1/8 teaspoon red pepper flakes optional

Instructions

  • Bring a large pot of generously salted water to a boil and cook the pasta according to the package directions to al dente, about 12-14 minutes.
  • Reserve 1 cup pasta water then drain the pasta. We won't need all of it, but it is good to have enough. Set aside.
  • Place the now-empty pot on the stove. Add the butter and melt over medium heat.
  • Whisk in the garlic and cook for 1 minute or until translucent. Lower the heat, if needed, to avoid browning.
  • While still on low heat, add in the Greek yogurt and parmesan cheese. Cook, stirring constantly, for a minute or two just until the yogurt is warmed through and the cheese is melted. Add the reserved pasta water as needed, 1 tablespoon at a time, to thin and smooth out the sauce.
  • Season the sauce with salt and pepper. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  • Add the drained pasta to the pot and gently toss to ensure all the pasta is coated with the sauce.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and top with parsley, parmesan cheese and red pepper flakes, if preferred. Serve!

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of pasta sauce, which, when mixed with cooked pasta, serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Use full-fat yogurt: This recipe requires thick, whole-milk Greek yogurt, so I do not recommend substituting it with regular yogurt. The proper fat-to-protein ratio and warming it over low heat prevent the sauce from curdling.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.
  • Reheat: Gently warm it in a large skillet or pan on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. The sauce will thicken as it sits in the fridge, so add a splash of water to restore it to a smooth consistency.
  • Optional mix-ins: This sauce is a great base for added vegetables. To keep it quick, sauté a handful of baby spinach or sliced mushrooms in a bit of olive oil in the pot before starting Step 3, then set them aside. Once your pasta and sauce are combined, simply fold the veggies back in for an easy veggie-packed pasta dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 375kcal | Carbohydrates: 46g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 80mg | Sodium: 909mg | Potassium: 295mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1007IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 240mg | Iron: 2mg

How to Store and Reheat

Here are my best tips for storing and reheating this creamy yogurt-based pasta sauce:

  • Storage: Store any leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. 
  • Reheating: Gently reheat the pasta on the stovetop over low heat, stirring frequently. Add a splash of water as needed to loosen the sauce and restore its smooth consistency. Do your best to avoid letting it simmer for too long or boil.
  • Microwave: I do not recommend reheating this sauce in the microwave on high heat, as it can cause the yogurt to separate. If you do use the microwave, reheat in short 15-20 second intervals at low power, stirring in between.
  • Freezing: You can technically freeze Greek yogurt sauces, but I do not recommend it. If you have to, then be sure to store the pasta sauce separately, as cooked pasta loses its texture when thawed.

What to Serve With This Recipe

So you made this Greek yogurt pasta sauce and mixed it with some spaghetti, and now you want to turn it into a whole meal? Well, I am glad you asked because I have a few great suggestions:

Other Savory Yogurt Recipes

If you enjoy cooking with yogurt in savory dishes, there are so many delicious ways to use it beyond pasta sauce.

Below are a few yogurt-based recipes that I think you’ll enjoy:

  • Five-minute Creamy Salad Dressing (or Sauce): This Greek Yogurt Dressing is creamy, easy to make, and comes together in less than 5 minutes. It tastes better than store-bought dressing and is delicious drizzled over salads, grain bowls, or roasted vegetables.
  • The most loved Turkish Breakfast: If there is one dish that instantly takes me back to my childhood, it’s Turkish Eggs. Silky poached eggs are served over garlicky yogurt and finished with a warm chili butter sauce.
  • Tangy Meal Prep Solution: This Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade is bright, tangy, and incredibly versatile. Made with Greek yogurt, lemon, and fresh herbs, it works beautifully whether you grill, bake, or pan-cook the chicken.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-yogurt-pasta-sauce/feed/ 9
Black Bean and Corn Salad https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/#comments Fri, 26 Apr 2024 13:44:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=19714 Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need…]]>

Below, I’ll show you how to make this corn and black bean salad ahead of time (just what you need to prepare for a big gathering!), as well as how to make a homemade lime dressing you’ll want to add to all your favorite salads, veggie sides, and proteins.With such a vibrantly fresh, citrusy flavor, it’s no wonder why this black bean corn salad is such a hit.

Mexican black bean and corn salad in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients

Packed with fresh and bright flavors, every element of this simple bean salad will delight your taste buds, from its zingy lime vinaigrette to its crisp veggie base.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • For the Dressing:
    • Fresh lime juice
    • Lime zest
    • Garlic: You’ll need one fresh garlic clove to give this dressing a delectably bold, complex finish. After peeling your garlic, press or finely mince it to ensure it thoroughly and evenly infuses the mixture.
    • Olive oil
    • Seasoning: I use a savory, earthy mix of ground cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper to season this simple corn and bean salad recipe. If preferred, a pinch of chili powder can also be added.
  • For the Salad:
    • Black beans: You can cook raw black beans from scratch or use canned black beans for this salad. If you opt for a canned version, be sure to drain and rinse them under cold water before adding them to your mixture.
    • Corn: Any type of corn will work for this easy bean and corn salad recipe. If you’re making this dish during the summer, you can use fresh sweet corn off the cob, air-fried corn (be sure to cut the kernels after cooking), or grill the corn beforehand if you’re in the mood for a smokier flavor profile. Also, if you’re in a pinch and don’t have any fresh corn on hand, you can use frozen corn or canned corn kernels—as long as you thaw, drain, and rinse them beforehand.
    • Cherry tomatoes
    • Bell peppers: You can use any color of bell pepper for this recipe. Though I used red peppers, yellow, orange, or green bell peppers would also add a deliciously fresh crispness to your mixture.
    • Red onion: Chopped red onion is my favorite way to bring out the subtle Mexican flavors of this dish. However, if you’re aiming for a milder taste, you may also use scallions.
    • Avocado: Creamy avocado is there to balance the crisper taste of this recipe’s fresh produce. However, you can omit it from your recipe if you’re not a fan.
    • Fresh cilantro: I love using cilantro leaves to add a fresh, peppery edge to my corn and black bean salad recipe. However, you’re welcome to omit this ingredient (or substitute it with fresh parsley!) if you don’t like its taste.
    • Cotija cheese (optional): If you want to add more light, creamy notes to your salad ingredients, cotija cheese offers a soft, milky flavor you’ll love. Sprinkle your salad with this cheesy addition after mixing.

How to Make Black Bean Salad with Corn

It takes almost no time to whip up this avocado corn black bean salad. In just four steps, you’ll have a crowd-pleasing dish you can use as a side, appetizer, or quick snack any day of the week.

Steps showing how to make mexican corn and black bean salad.
  1. Prepare the lime dressing: In a small bowl, add the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  2. Make the corn and bean salad: Place the black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro into a large mixing bowl.
  3. Drizzle and toss: Drizzle the bean salad with the lime dressing and gently toss it until evenly combined.
  4. Taste and serve: Taste the salad for seasoning, add more if necessary, and serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store?

There’s a reason why this simple black bean and corn salad is one of my favorite foods. Not only can you make it ahead of time, but you can also store it throughout the week for stress-free meal prep.

  • Make ahead: You can make this quick black bean and corn salad one day in advance. Not only does this early prep minimize kitchen hassle, but it also gives the salad ingredients enough time to mix and infuse their flavors. That said, I still recommend adding the avocado just before serving so the ingredient maintains its color, taste, and texture.
  • Storage: Have leftovers? Don’t worry! You can store this easy salad in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

Serving Suggestions for this Corn Salad with Beans

Like my other salad recipes, this easy black bean salad is a great side dish for any meal, from summer BBQs to Mexican dinners. Plus, it also works as a hassle-free snack or appetizer if you need a quick addition to your weekday menu.

Below are just a few of my favorite ways to serve this fan-favorite recipe.

  • With chips on the side: Easy and quick, I love serving this simple salad alongside a bowl of tortilla chips—perfect for weeknight get-togethers or midday munching. Or, if you’re in the mood for a heartier snack, my Cheesy Spinach Quesadilla exquisitely balances this salad’s bright flavors with rich, gooey deliciousness.
  • Grilled fish: If you plan to serve this dish as a summer corn and bean salad, it’s time to fire up the outdoor grill! My Grilled Shrimp Skewers and Grilled Mahi Mahi strike a delectable balance between buttery, smoky, and light flavors—an ideal pairing for this salad’s zesty undertones.
  • Grilled chicken or beef: Looking for a meatier meal? This recipe makes a great black bean and corn side dish for all your favorite meaty mains. In particular, this tender-crisp side is a delectable accompaniment for my creamy yet savory Avocado Burger and tangy Yogurt Marinated Chicken.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Corn Salads You Might Also Like:

Black bean corn avocado salad in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Black Bean and Corn Salad Recipe

This colorful, fresh, and festive Black Bean and Corn Salad is loaded with vegetables and drizzled with a delicious lime dressing. Ready in 15 minutes, it can be served as a side dish or a light lunch that you can make as a part of your meal prep.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 143kcal

Ingredients

For the lime dressing:

  • cup lime juice freshly squeezed; from 3 limes
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest from one lime
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the salad:

  • 2 cans black beans rinsed and drained – (15 oz each)
  • 3 ears fresh corn shucked; ~ 2 ¾ cups (or 1 8.5-oz. can whole kernels, drained)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes halved
  • 1 red bell pepper chopped; 1 cup/120 g
  • ½ medium red onion chopped; 1 cup/88 g
  • 1 avocado cubed
  • cup cilantro divided and chopped

Instructions

  • To make the dressing, combine the lime juice, lime zest, garlic, olive oil, cumin, kosher salt, and black pepper in a bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  • To make the corn and bean salad, place black beans, corn, cherry tomatoes, bell pepper, red onion, avocado, and chopped cilantro in a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle the salad with the prepared dressing and give it a gentle toss.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This black bean salad recipe makes 5-6 cups of salad ideal for serving six people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Chop everything small: The key to making the best black bean and corn salad recipe is to chop all your veggies into small, uniformly-sized pieces. Not only will your salad be easier to eat, but this small, even size will also ensure that each bite has a more even balance of flavors. This is especially important if you plan to serve it with chips on the side or a topping for tacos.
  • Let it marinate: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting it rest for a few hours before serving (or even waiting until the next day!). Doing so will give the lime dressing time to fully infuse the vegetables and let the veggies’ flavors mix with each other. Just wait until the last moment to add your cubed avocado.
  • Serve it chilled or at room temperature: I prefer this recipe to be served cold, so I usually refrigerate it for a few hours before serving. But you can also serve it at room temperature.
  • Corn: You can use any corn you like. During the summer months, I usually use fresh sweet corn. I like them raw, but if you want, you can also sauté it lightly. If your grill is on, feel free to grill your corn after spreading it with oil (butter and olive oil would work). Of course, you can also use a can of corn (drained and rinsed) and frozen corn (thawed.)
  • Storage: You can store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days. Just be sure to stir the mixture and taste it for seasoning, as the ingredients may separate or change flavor during storage.

Nutrition

Calories: 143kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 432mg | Potassium: 334mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 923IU | Vitamin C: 40mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/black-bean-and-corn-salad/feed/ 30
Chicken Chickpea Curry https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-curry-with-gentle-spices/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-curry-with-gentle-spices/#comments Thu, 15 Feb 2024 18:04:08 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2726 I have been making this chicken chickpea curry for the last couple of years and I like to think of…]]>

I have been making this chicken chickpea curry for the last couple of years and I like to think of it as comfort food at its finest. Thanks to warming spices, plenty of protein, and filling fiber, it’s a complete weeknight meal that is not only delicious but packed with great nutrition too.

If you are a fan of similar chicken stews and soups, be sure to also check out my Crock Pot Chicken Stew and Chicken and Vegetable Soup.

Chicken and chickpea curry in a bowl served with rice and lime wedges on the side.

Ingredients

This spicy chicken and chickpea curry includes budget-friendly ingredients thanks to its use of canned goods. Those, plus a few delicious fresh veggies, and you have yourself an exceptional homemade curry. We will need:

  • Chicken: You can use boneless, skinless chicken breasts for lighter calories or chicken thighs for a richer flavor. The key is to cut the meat into chicken pieces for fast cooking and caramelized edges.
  • Oil: I used olive oil but avocado oil would also work.
  • Onion: Yellow onion or white onion both work.
  • Bell peppers: Use any color bell pepper that you like. If you are short on time, you can also use canned green chilies instead.
  • Fresh garlic: A few fresh garlic cloves give it a punchy, aromatic flavor.
  • Fresh ginger: Peel and grate the ginger fresh at home for a warm, spicy kick.
  • Spices and seasonings: Use your favorite store-bought curry powder, along with a simple mix of Kosher salt and black pepper. Hot curry powder usually includes the addition of cayenne pepper but if yours doesn’t have it, you can add a pinch of cayenne pepper, if preferred.
  • Tomatoes: We used a can of fire-roasted diced tomatoes for more depth of flavor, but regular canned diced tomatoes would also work.
  • Coconut milk: Full-fat creamy coconut milk provides the creamiest, richest texture. I would avoid light coconut milk for this recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Use one can of chickpeas (aka garbanzo beans), just make sure to rinse and drain beforehand. You can use dried chickpeas and cook them yourself if you have the extra time.
  • Baby spinach: A few handfuls of fresh spinach give it color and nutrition. Fresh kale is a great leafy green substitute.
  • Lime and lime juice: Fresh lime juice gives it a nice, zippy pop. Reserve a few fresh lime wedges for squeezing at the end. In a pinch, lemon juice would also work.
  • Fresh herbs: Finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves are divine in many curry recipes. Fresh mint leaves or fresh parsley would be a nice addition, too.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view with text on each ingredient.

Optional Add Ins & Substitutions

  • Vegetables: Toss in some cubed sweet potatoes or bite-sized cauliflower for extra color, fiber, taste, and nutritional value. However, please keep in mind that, depending on the vegetable you are adding, the cooking time might be longer. 
  • Chicken broth: The consistency of this curried chicken and chickpeas is more like a stew than a soup. If you prefer a thinner consistency, add some Homemade Chicken Stock or your favorite low-sodium store-bought chicken broth.
  • Turmeric paste: If you have Homemade Golden Paste hanging about in your freezer, you can also use a tablespoon or two in addition to the curry powder, or replace it with the curry powder altogether.
  • Tomato paste: Consider adding 1 tablespoon of tomato paste when you saute the ginger and garlic for extra depth and richness.
  • Garam Masala: Alternatively, you can substitute curry powder with garam masala for more of an Indian curry flavor.

How to Make Chicken Chickpea Curry?

Chicken curry and chickpeas is a complete one-pot meal (no extra dishes required) ready from start to finish in no time. In other words, a superhero weeknight dinner. Here’s how I like to do it:

  1. Prep chicken: Pat dry chicken with paper towels and cut it into 1-inch small cubes.
  2. Season chicken: Place the cubed chicken in a large bowl and season all over with Kosher salt and black pepper.
A collage of images showing how to make chicken curry with chickpeas and coconut milk.
  1. Saute chicken: Heat 1 teaspoon of olive oil in a Dutch oven or large pot over medium-high heat. Sear half of the chicken cubes until lightly golden brown and almost cooked through, turning once with tongs. Transfer the now-semi-cooked chicken onto a plate. Repeat the same process starting with oil and the remaining chicken.
  2. Saute vegetables: Reduce to medium heat and in the now empty pot, add the olive oil, chopped onion, and red bell pepper. Saute until softened, stirring occasionally, about 4-5 minutes.
  3. Add spices and aromatics: Add garlic, curry powder, and fresh ginger and saute, stirring constantly, until the garlic is soft and the spices are fragrant, about 2-3 minutes.
  4. Stir in liquids: Return the chicken (and its juices) to the Dutch oven, along with the diced tomatoes (with juices), coconut milk, and chickpeas. Stir, making sure to scrape the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon. Season with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon black pepper.
A group of images showing how to make chickpea chicken curry in a pot.
  1. Boil, then simmer: Bring the chicken garbanzo curry to a boil, then cover, and reduce to low heat. Simmer for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  2. Add the greens: Remove the lid and add the spinach and lime juice. Stir and simmer until the spinach is wilted, about 2 minutes. Taste for seasoning and add more as desired.
  3. Garnish and serve: Finish with cilantro. Serve with wedges of lime on the side.

How to Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

This chickpea chicken curry can be stored in the refrigerator and freezer and makes an exceptional meal for meal prep. Here is how I like to store this chickpea curry with chicken:

  • Storage: Cool to room temperature, then transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the chicken curry with chickpeas overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a large pot over medium heat until simmering. The chickpea and chicken curry will naturally thicken over time. Add a splash of water or chicken stock to bring it back to the right consistency.

What to Serve with Chicken Garbanzo Curry?

Here are some of my favorite ways to serve this chicken chickpea recipe, all of which complement the culture, flavor, and textures.

Expert Tips

The process of making this chicken garbanzo bean recipe is quite straightforward. However, during our recipe tests we learned a few tips to help you to make the best chicken chickpea curry right at home. 

  • Saute chicken in two batches: Searing the chicken in two batches gives more space for the chicken to create caramelized, crispy edges. Plus, all those caramelized bits sitting at the bottom of the pot create so much flavor.
  • Toast the spices: In traditional Caribbean and Indian curries, the spices (i.e. curry powder) and flavorings (i.e. fresh ginger) are toasted for an extended period to really bring out the natural oils and flavors. To replicate this technique, toast the spices for at least 2-3 minutes, until abundantly fragrant, making sure to keep stirring so the spices do not burn.
  • Keep it over a gentle simmer: Cook the chicken with garbanzo beans over a gentle simmer to allow the flavors to meld together. This keeps the chicken juicy while creating an intense and richer taste.
  • Let it rest: Just like so many chicken and chickpea recipes, the flavors intensify the longer they marry together. In other words, chicken chickpea curry is a fantastic make-ahead recipe for the next day and many days after.

FAQs

How many calories are in vegetable and chickpea curry?

One serving of this curry chicken with chickpeas is 556 calories, not including any additional bread or sides.

What is chickpea curry made of?

Chickpea curry with chicken is made with chicken breasts (or thighs), onions, bell peppers, ginger, garlic, curry powder, diced tomatoes, coconut milk, chickpeas, and baby spinach. It makes great use of fresh and pantry ingredients.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other One Pot Chicken Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Chicken Chickpea Curry recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Chicken chickpea curry served with a bowl with naan bread and rice on the side.
Print

Chicken Chickpea Curry Recipe

This One-Pot Chicken Chickpea Curry is a weeknight stew recipe that is perfect for when you need an easy yet super flavorful meal. Serve it with a bowl of rice, naan bread, and/or roasted veggies for a gluten-free and dairy-free meal that is guaranteed to please.
Course Chicken Recipes
Cuisine Indian
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 556kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken:

  • 1 ¼ pounds boneless skinless chicken breasts or chicken thighs
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper plus more for seasoning
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil divided

For The Curry:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup onion chopped
  • 1 red bell pepper (medium size) chopped (about 1 cup)
  • 3 cloves garlic minced or pressed
  • 2 tablespoons curry powder
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger peeled and grated (1 inch)
  • 1 can fire-roasted diced tomatoes 15-ounce can
  • 1 can full fat coconut milk 14-ounce can
  • 1 can chickpeas 15-ounce can – drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups fresh baby spinach 3 ounces – (loosely packed)
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice fresh squeezed
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro chopped
  • 1 lime cut into wedges

Instructions

  • Pat dry chicken with paper towels and cut it into 1-inch small cubes.
  • Place the cubed chicken in a large bowl. Sprinkle 1 teaspoon of the kosher salt and ½ teaspoon ground black pepper onto the chicken and mix to incorporate.
  • Heat 1 teaspoon of the olive oil in the Dutch oven over medium-high heat.
  • Sear half of the chicken cubes turning once until they are lightly golden brown and almost cooked through. Transfer the now-semi-cooked chicken onto a plate. Repeat the same process starting with oil and chicken for the rest of the cubed chicken.
  • To make the curry, add 1 tablespoon of olive oil to the pan. Add the chopped onion and red bell pepper and saute for 4-5 minutes, stirring frequently until softened.
  • Add the garlic, curry powder, and fresh ginger and saute for 2-3 minutes, stirring constantly, until the garlic is soft and fragrant.
  • Return the chicken (with its juices) to the Dutch oven and add the diced tomatoes (with juices), coconut milk, and chickpeas. Stir, scraping the bottom of the pan with a wooden spoon.
  • Season with 1 teaspoon kosher salt and ½ teaspoon black pepper.
  • Bring to a boil, then cover and reduce the heat. Simmer for 10 minutes, stirring occasionally.
  • Uncover and add the spinach and lime juice. Stir and simmer until the spinach is wilted, approximately 2 minutes. Taste for seasoning and season with salt and pepper as needed.
  • Garnish with cilantro if desired. Serve with wedges of lime on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This chicken curry recipe yields around 6-7 cups of curry that is ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Toast the spices: In traditional Caribbean and Indian curries, the spices (i.e. curry powder) and flavorings (i.e. fresh ginger) are toasted for an extended period to bring out the natural oils and flavors. To replicate this technique, we recommend sauteeing the spices and veggies for at least 2-3 minutes, until abundantly fragrant, making sure to keep stirring so the spices do not burn.
  • Storage: Cool to room temperature, then transfer to a large airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Freeze: Cool completely, then transfer to a freezer-safe airtight container. Label, date, and freeze for up to 2-3 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw the chicken curry with chickpeas overnight in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a large pot over medium heat until simmering. It will naturally thicken over time. Add a splash of water or chicken stock to bring it back to the right consistency.
  • To Serve With: As you can see in the pictures I served my curry with brown rice and naan bread, but this stew can also be served by itself.

Nutrition

Calories: 556kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 32g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 25g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 84mg | Sodium: 863mg | Potassium: 1024mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 2928IU | Vitamin C: 57mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 9mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-curry-with-gentle-spices/feed/ 16
Slow Cooker Sticky Chicken Wings https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-sticky-chicken-wings/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-sticky-chicken-wings/#comments Wed, 07 Feb 2024 21:13:42 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5651 Whenever my husband asks for chicken wings, I usually make my Oven Baked Chicken Wings recipe. However, last night I…]]>

Whenever my husband asks for chicken wings, I usually make my Oven Baked Chicken Wings recipe. However, last night I decided to give these crockpot chicken wings a try, and let me tell you, they are seriously addicting. Crispy, crunchy, juicy, sweet, savory, spicy, you see what I mean. Finger lickin good.

But what I love most about these chicken wings in the slow cooker is that they are a healthy chicken wing recipe (no deep frying in sight), sweetened with natural sugars (no refined sugar or oil), and virtually hands-off (thank you, Crock Pot).

Slow Cooker Asian Chicken Wings on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

Slow cooker chicken wings are made with basic pantry staples, which you probably already have in your pantry and fridge. We will need the following ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Fresh chicken wings: When buying chicken wings at the grocery store, look for a party mix pack with both chicken drumsticks and flats. If the store only has whole chicken wings available, you’ll want to halve them at the joint and remove the wingtip when you get home. Frozen wings can also be used, but you will have to thaw them overnight in the fridge.
  • Ginger: Don’t be shy with the ginger. The recipe card states 3 tablespoons of fresh ginger (2-inch piece), and that is intentional. Fresh ginger gives these sticky chicken wings a welcome spicy kick.  Also, for best results, make sure your ground ginger for the glaze is fresh and fragrant.
  • Garlic: A few fresh garlic cloves in the dry rub give it a nice punchy flavor. Feel free to add a pinch of garlic powder or onion powder to the glaze for extra savory flavor.
  • Coconut sugar: Most recipes call for light or dark brown sugar, but I love coconut sugar here for its natural sweetness. That sweet and savory flavor just can’t be beat.
  • Soy sauce: I used regular soy sauce, but if you prefer a low-sodium soy sauce, feel free to go for it. If you prefer no soy, swap it out for coconut aminos.
  • Cayenne pepper: A nice kick of cayenne pepper gives it the spice we need. A few grinds of fresh black pepper would also be a nice addition.
  • Water: Water thins out the glaze to a brushable consistency.
  • Tomato paste: Tomato paste adds a special tang, depth, and color. I like to buy tomato paste in a squeeze tube or glass jar so that it lasts longer.
  • Sesame seeds: Sesame seeds really ride home that Asian sticky chicken wings appeal and complement the flavors of soy, coconut, and ginger.
  • Garnish: Garnish the wings with thinly sliced scallions for a punchy finish. Optional garnishes include fresh cilantro or a drizzle of hot sauce, like Sriracha sauce.

How to Make This Recipe?

The best part about this slow cooker chicken wings recipe is that it is a set-it-and-forget-it meal, which means you can go about your day while the sweet, tangy scent of sticky chicken wings wafts around your home. After that, a quick glaze and broil, and you are good to go. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

Person showing the steps to making the recipe.
  1. Prep chicken wings: If you’ve purchased whole chicken wings, cut them in half at the joint and remove the wingtip (If this is your first time working with whole wings, check out my post on How To Cut Turkey Wings, which is very similar to chicken wings). Pat dry all sides of the chicken wings with paper towels.
  2. Make the rub: In the insert of your slow cooker, stir the fresh ginger, garlic, coconut sugar, soy sauce, and cayenne pepper together until incorporated.
  3. Toss with rub: Place the dried chicken wings into the insert of the slow cooker and toss with the rub until evenly coated.
  4. Slow cook: Cover with the lid and cook on low until all the fat from the chicken wings renders and the chicken is tender, about 3-4 hours. Stir once or twice during the cooking process for even cooking.
A collage of images showing how to prepare and glaze the slow cooker chicken wings.
  1. Remove cooked chicken wings: Remove the cooked wings from the slow cooker with a slotted spoon. At this point, the chicken should be cooked all the way through, but you can double-check by inserting a meat thermometer into the thickest part of a wing without touching the bone (the internal temperature should reach 165 degrees F or above). Discard the liquid in the slow cooker.
  2. Prep equipment: Adjust the oven rack to the middle position. Place a sheet of parchment paper on a large baking sheet. Generously spray a wire rack with cooking spray and place on the prepared baking pan. Preheat the broiler to HIGH.
  3. Make the glaze: In a small bowl, whisk together the water, tomato paste, coconut sugar, soy sauce, cayenne pepper, and ground ginger until combined.
  4. Sauce the wings: Place the chicken wings in a single layer on the prepared wire cooling rack. Generously brush half of the sauce on top of the wings. Place the baking tray on the middle rack of the oven.
Glazed and garnished chicken wings in a side by side collage.
  1. Broil: Broil until the wings are crisp with a light char, about 8 minutes. Watch carefully to avoid burning. Flip each wing with a pair of tongs and brush with the remaining sauce. Continue to boil for 3 minutes more or until caramelized.
  2. Garnish: Sprinkle with toasted sesame seeds and green onions, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

These Slow cooker sticky chicken wings are best served the day they are made; however, if you are making a big batch for a crowd or just want to enjoy leftovers as a weeknight meal, here are my best storage tips:

  • Storage: Leftover wings will keep in an airtight container lined with parchment paper for up to 4 days in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat the crockpot Asian chicken wings in a low oven, about 250 – 300 degrees F, for 10-15 minutes, or until warm. Setting the oven temperature lower than usual prevents the meat from overcooking.

What to Serve with Slow Cooker Chicken Wings?

The slow cooker method allows me to cook a big batch of sticky wings, which means this is my go-to appetizer for parties, potlucks, and the unofficial holiday here in the U.S. – the Super Bowl. Since I think these Asian-style chicken wings deliver enough flavor on their own, I do not serve them with a dipping sauce like blue cheese dressing or ranch dressing.

With that being said, I love to serve these alongside a plethora of finger foods, snacks, and appetizers, including:

Sticky chicken wings garnished with sesame and green onions on a plate.

Expert Tips

  • Dry the wings thoroughly: Do not skip drying the chicken wings first. Dry chicken wings ensure the rub sticks to the meat.
  • Rub may not look like enough: When initially mixing the rub ingredients, it may not look like enough, but trust me on this one. The chicken cooks in the rub as well as its own juices, creating luscious, flavorful meat every time.
  • Pay attention to oven rack position: An oven rack in the center of an oven is approximately 12 – 15 inches away from the broiler. We don’t want the chicken wings too close to the heat source because that will burn the skin and dry out the meat.
  • Use a wire rack: A wire rack set inside a baking sheet is crucial because it allows the high-temperature heat (500 degrees F) of the broiler to circulate around the meat, creating crispy skin without overcooking the meat. Parchment paper also makes cleanup a breeze.
  • Broiler cooking time may vary: My chicken wings were crisp and caramelized after 10-12 minutes total broiling time, but when my neighbor tested this recipe, it took a full 15 minutes in the oven. Start checking at the 8-minute mark until you see pockets of char, then flip and finish. As with all broiling recipes, watch closely.

FAQs

What makes sauce stick to chicken wings?

The key to getting the sauce to stick to the chicken wings is super dry chicken wings. Thoroughly pat dry with paper towels before mixing with the rub.

How long can chicken stay in CrockPot on low?

Chicken wings will reach their internal temperature (165 degrees F) after 3-4 hours on low in the slow cooker, but they can go as long as 4-5 hours.

How do you make chicken wings not soggy?

Finish them under the broiler on a wire rack set inside a baking sheet. This elevated surface allows heat to circulate around the entire surface area of the chicken, creating beautifully crispy skin.

If you try this Slow Cooker Sticky Chicken Wings recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from CooksCountry.com

Slow Cooker Sticky Chicken Wings on a plate from the top view.
Print

Slow Cooker Sticky Chicken Wings Recipe

Slow Cooker Sticky Chicken Wings are marinated in a blend of fresh ginger, garlic, coconut sugar, soy sauce, and cayenne pepper, then cooked in a crock pot until tender. A quick broil caramelizes the skin for a crispy finish. This easy, hands-off recipe is perfect for Game Day, parties, and beyond.
Course Slow Cooker Recipe
Cuisine Asian Cuisine
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 4 hours 30 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 344kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken:

  • 3 pounds chicken wings halved at joint and wingtip removed

For The Rub:

  • 3 tablespoons 2 inch piece of fresh ginger peeled and finely chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic peeled and roughly chopped
  • cup coconut sugar
  • 1 tablespoon soy sauce
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional

For The Glaze:

  • 2 tablespoons water
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • cup coconut sugar
  • 1 tablespoon soy sauce
  • Pinch cayenne pepper
  • ½ teaspoon ground ginger

As Garnish:

  • 2 teaspoons sesame seeds toasted – optional
  • 1 tablespoon scallions chopped, optional

Instructions

  • Pat dry all sides of the chicken wings*. Set aside.
  • To make the rub: Place the fresh ginger, garlic, coconut sugar, soy sauce, and cayenne pepper into the insert of a slow cooker. Stir to incorporate all the ingredients.
  • Place the dried chicken wings into the insert of the slow cooker and toss to distribute the rub. At first, you might think that there is not enough rub, but as long as you make sure that all of the wings are coated thoroughly with the rub, you should be fine.
  • Cover and cook on low until all the fat from the chicken wings renders and the chicken is tender about 3-4 hours. If you can, stir once or twice during the cooking process.
  • Using a slotted spoon, remove the wings from the slow cooker onto a plate. Set it aside. Discard the liquid in the slow cooker.
  • Adjust the oven rack to the middle position. Place a sheet of parchment paper on the baking tray. Spray the wire rack with cooking spray and place on the prepared pan. Set it aside.
  • Preheat the broiler to high.
  • To make the glaze: Whisk together the water, tomato paste, coconut sugar, soy sauce, cayenne pepper, and ground ginger in a bowl.
  • Place the chicken wings, skin side up, in a single layer on the prepared wire rack.
  • Generously brush half of the sauce on top of the wings. Place the baking tray on the middle rack of the oven.
  • Broil until the wings are crisp with a light char, approximately 8 minutes. Watch carefully to avoid burning.
  • Using tongs, flip each wing and coat it with the remaining sauce. Continue to broil for 3-4 minutes until caramelized.
  • Top with toasted sesame seeds and green onions, if desired. Serve and enjoy!

Notes

  • Yields: Depending on the size of your chicken wings, this recipe yields 22-30 chicken wings that are ideal for 6 servings. The calorie information below is per serving. 
  • Dry the wings thoroughly: Do not skip drying the chicken wings first. Dry chicken wings ensure the rub sticks to the meat.
  • Pay attention to oven rack position: An oven rack in the center of an oven is approximately 12 – 15 inches away from the broiler. We don’t want the chicken wings too close to the heat source because that will burn the skin and dry out the meat.
  • Use a wire rack: A wire rack set inside a baking sheet is crucial because it allows the high-temperature heat (500 degrees F) of the broiler to circulate around the meat, creating crispy skin without overcooking the meat. Parchment paper also makes cleanup a breeze.
  • Broiler cooking time may vary: Keep a close eye on your wings while they are under the broiler. My wings were done after 10-12 minutes but depending on your oven, yours might be slightly longer or shorter.
  • Storage: Leftover sticky wings can be kept in an airtight container for up to 4 days in the fridge.
  • Reheat: Reheat your wings in a low oven, about 250 – 300 degrees F, for 10-15 minutes, or until warm. Setting the oven temperature lower than usual prevents the meat from overcooking.

Nutrition

Calories: 344kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 24g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 502mg | Potassium: 270mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 272IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooker-sticky-chicken-wings/feed/ 6
Shredded Chicken Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/#comments Tue, 06 Feb 2024 16:36:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16128 No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the…]]>

No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the next level. In that case, you can pair it with dozens of other delectable Mexican recipes, such as my creamy Basic Guacamole Recipe or my sweet-and-spicy Easy Street Corn.

Or, if you’re in the mood for another savory and succulent meat dish, my Slow Roasted Chicken Wings strike the perfect balance between crispy, flavorful skin and tender meat. No matter what you choose, you can easily spice up the day with a pitcher of my Easy Pineapple Margarita Recipe.

Pulled chicken nachos garnished with corn, avocados, and tomatoes on a sheet pan.

Chicken Nachos Ingredients

There’s no need to empty out your wallet to make this easy shredded chicken nachos recipe. You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this authentically delectable, restaurant-quality dish.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Chicken: Nearly any shredded chicken would work when making pulled chicken for nachos, whether you want to use boneless chicken thighs or boneless chicken breasts. In terms of preparation, I roasted my chicken in the oven with a coating of spices, then shredded them while warm to achieve the most attuned seasoning profile. However, if you prefer a more hands-free method, you can also make nachos with rotisserie chicken or cook your chicken in a crock pot.
    You can even use leftover chicken if you have some on hand or make a grilled chicken nachos recipe for a smokier, summer-fresh flavor. Regardless of your cooking process, just be sure you have 4-5 cups of shredded chicken before assembling your nachos. That being said, however, you can also substitute this recipe’s chicken for sauteed ground beef if you’d prefer a savorier, more pronounced meat flavor.
  • Oil: Though I use olive oil to cook chicken for nachos, any other flavorless vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, would work.
  • Seasoning: I’ve found that the best seasoning for chicken nachos is a basic, smoky, and piquant mix of chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper. Alternatively, you can use your favorite pre-made taco seasoning if you’re in the mood for a quicker seasoning solution.
  • Enchilada sauce: Though an optional addition, I love adding enchilada sauce to my shredded chicken nachos, as it adds a savory, light richness to the mixture. You can use any store-bought brand you prefer (my favorite is Siete Red Enchilada Sauce -affiliate link) or make your enchilada sauce from scratch.
  • Tortilla chips: When selecting a chip for this chicken nacho bake, I highly recommend picking thick, sturdy, restaurant-style tortilla chips. This chip style better withstands baking and won’t get as soggy as other varieties. Furthermore, if you have the time, you can also make homemade tortilla chips for a fresher, more customizable taste. However, I don’t recommend making chicken nachos with Doritos and any other commercially seasoned chips, as they are relatively flimsy and won’t withstand the moisture of the wetter ingredients.
  • Cheese: To ensure an even distribution of cheese throughout your nachos, you must use shredded cheese. I use Monterey Jack cheese due to its buttery flavor and highly meltable composition. However, you can use Pepper Jack cheese, mozzarella, or Colby Jack, as well, to achieve a spicier, creamier, or tangier flavor profile. Or, you can even use a blend of cheeses for a more full-bodied taste, with some of my favorites being a Mexican blend cheese and Cheddar Jack (a mix of cheddar cheese and Monterey Jack).
  • Black beans: Black beans are a great way to add a tender, mildly sweetheartiness to chicken and cheese nachos. Don’t have any black beans in the pantry? You can use pinto beans instead, giving your nachos a creamier, earthier taste.

What to Put on Chicken Nachos?

The sky’s the limit when it comes to toppings and customizing this loaded chicken nachos recipe. However, these classic toppings—zesty, creamy, and bright—are my favorite ingredients to give this dish an authentic Mexican taste.

Topping ideas for homemade nachos with chicken from the top view.
  • Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes: This easy salsa recipe is my go-to when making easy chicken nachos. Not only does this sauce boast robustly bright flavors, but it also comes together in just ten minutes! No time to make salsa? Sliced or diced tomatoes would also work.
  • Guacamole: Creamy, garlicky, and tangy, guacamole is a no-brainer when it comes to nachos. One taste of this simple side and the entire bowl will disappear in seconds.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of heat, jalapenos are just what you need to lend a kick of spice to your chicken cheese nachos. If you prefer a crisper, fresher, and more colorful topping, I recommend using fresh jalapeños. However, if you’re in the mood for a softer texture and a more tart flavor, pickled jalapenos are the way to go.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream—smooth, light, and tangy—makes an excellent addition to the savory, meatier base of this Mexican chicken nachos recipe. Serve this ingredient as a dippable side or a dollop on top, and your guests will be licking their fingers clean.
  • Corn: This mildly sweet and tender addition adds a beautiful pop of color to these sheet pan nachos.
  • Olives: If you’ve ever found yourself reaching for the table salt to add extra flavor to your meal, this ingredient is for you. Black olives are briny, salty, and brilliant at giving these chicken nachos a savory depth. 
  • Squeeze of lime juice: My favorite way to balance the hearty composition of pulled chicken nachos is to add a little bit of lime juice to the mixture. This addition adds a bright, acidic element to the recipe, ensuring every ingredient comes to life.
  • Mexican Pickled Red Onions: Tangy, citrusy, and oh-so-flavorful, pickled onions are a great way to enliven your nachos with equal tenderness and crunch.

How to Make Chicken Nachos with Shredded Chicken?

There’s a reason why this easy nachos recipe is such a classic. My step-by-step instructions take the stress out of menu planning, requiring minimal effort and zero hassle. If you are using leftover or rotisserie chicken, you can skip the first six steps and start assembling your nachos.

  1. Prep the oven: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to prepare and cook chicken to make nachos.
  1. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken, then transfer them onto a baking sheet. I use a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet (also known as a half-sheet pan) to fit all my poultry comfortably.
  2. Season the chicken: Drizzle the chicken with olive oil and sprinkle both sides with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
  3. Bake: Add the seasoned chicken to the oven and let it roast for 15-20 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F.
  4. Shred: Remove the cooked chicken from the oven, then shred it using two forks.
Images showing how to assemble shredded chicken, tortilla chips and cheese to make nachos.
  1. Add enchilada sauce (optional step): Drizzle the shredded chicken with the enchilada sauce, and broil the mixture for two minutes. When done, remove the chicken from the oven and set it aside.
  2. Prepare the baking sheet: Turn down the oven’s temperature to 350 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  3. Assemble the first layer: Spread your first layer of tortilla chips on the lined pan. Top them off with half of the shredded cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken.
  4. Build the second layer: Place a second layer of chips on top of the first, followed by the remaining black beans and shredded chicken.
  5. Bake: Put the chicken nachos in the oven and bake them for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese melts thoroughly.
Chicken cheese nachos topped of with nacho toppings from the top view.
  1. Add the toppings: Top off your baked nachos with your preferred toppings and serve while still hot.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat? 

It’s no secret that homemade chicken nachos—crunchy, flavorful, and melty—taste best on the day you make them. Therefore, I recommend assembling the dish right before serving to achieve maximum crispiness.

Need more time for day-of preparation? Not to worry: These expert make-ahead and storage tips will ensure you can cut your prep time in half and don’t have to forfeit a single bite of this chicken nacho recipe.

  • Make ahead: The best way to kickstart your meal prep is by making the shredded chicken for nachos ahead of time and cooking and shredding it in advance. That way, you only need to assemble and bake the nachos just before you want to serve it. Also, you can plan out and prepare your toppings ahead of time to simplify serving the day of.
  • Storage: To store your pulled chicken nachos, first let them come to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film. You can then put them in the fridge until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. I also suggest removing any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness. Then, you can re-add them to the nachos when ready to serve.

What Tastes Good with Chicken Nachos? 

Versatile, snackable, and utterly irresistible, chicken black bean nachos are one of the best dishes to make if you love putting your unique spin on new recipes. Below, I’ve assembled essential recipes to serve with your savory bake, transforming this simple dish into a five-star menu.

  • Dips and salsas: One of the most iconic pairings, salsa exquisitely balances the heartier base of roast chicken nachos with light, bright, and tomatoey flavors. Pico de gallo is an effortless go-to for this dish, though you can also add notes of tropical, juicy flavors by making my Pineapple Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa. Or, you can whip up an easy Hummus Dip for an even creamier, umami-rich condiment.
  • Tacos: When you think of Mexican cuisine, chances are you immediately think of tacos—a savory, fresh, and flavor-filled dish anyone can customize to their liking. With my recipe for Brisket Tacos, you can fill your plate with smoky, melt-in-your-mouth flavors. Or, try pairing your nachos with Quinoa Black Bean Tacos for a vegan-friendly dish that has all the zesty, creamy taste you could want from your favorite Mexican food.
  • Salads: Want to add a lighter, more nutritious edge to your nachos? Serve them alongside a bowl of Black Bean and Corn Salad for a zesty, veggie-packed side, or spoon out a serving of Mexican Street Corn Salad (AKA “esquites”) for a dish that’s equal parts spicy, tangy, and creamy.
  • Margaritas: What party menu is complete without a sweet, boozy treat? My Easy Pineapple Margarita and Blueberry Margaritas are just what you need to give this classic drink a sweet, fruity spin. You can even blend up a Strawberry Basil Margarita to balance your juicier notes with a gourmet, herby finish.
Person with a chunk of pioneer woman nachos in her hand.

Expert Tips

Authentic Mexican chicken nachos are at your fingertips when learning from these pro-level tips. Below, you’ll find everything you need to make crisp, gooey, and savory nachos, from proper layering to serving suggestions.

  • Layer evenly: When making sheet pan chicken nachos, it’s vital that you evenly distribute the cheese across the chips to prevent uneven and/or soggy nachos. If you plan on making more than two layers, I recommend keeping the middle layer to a minimum (except for the cheese, of course!). I also suggest draining your black beans and chicken before adding them to your nachos to keep them from becoming soggy.
  • Don’t skimp on shredded cheese: The secret to making restaurant-style nachos is to be generous when it comes to the cheese. Though four cups of cheese may sound like a lot, it’s the key to giving each chip a balance of crisp, gooey, and rich flavors so you don’t end up with bland or topping-less bites in your final dish.
  • Make it your own: The beauty of making homemade nachos with chicken is that you can customize it any way you like. Use this easy recipe as a starting place, and then feel free to mix and match the dish with what you have on hand. Remember, too, that this recipe is pretty forgiving, so it’s up to you what you want to add to your mixture.
  • Drain properly: I think it’s safe to say that no one enjoys soggy nachos. Therefore, the best way to prevent sogginess is to thoroughly drain each of your ingredients (besides the cheese and chips) before layering them into your recipe. In particular, I recommend draining the shredded chicken, beans, and wet toppings before making this simple chicken nachos recipe.
  • Add the toppings right before serving: For best results, I recommend adding your fresher toppings to your dish right before serving. Otherwise, these additions (like guacamole or pico de gallo) may lose their texture and flavor, resulting in a wet, flavorless layer.
  • Serve right away: Gooey, succulent, and flavorful, baked chicken nachos taste stellar when they’re warm. That’s why I always suggest serving this dish immediately when the cheese is still melty, and the ingredients are hot.

FAQs

You don’t have to be a professional Mexican chef to make chicken nachos in the oven. I answer all your remaining questions in this easy guide, ensuring your dish comes out exquisitely layered and delightfully crisp.

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

The best chicken nachos recipe is one that doesn’t turn soggy after adding your favorite toppings. To ensure your nachos remain as dry and crisp as possible, fully drain all the ingredients—besides the cheese and the chips—before adding them to your recipe. You may also consider keeping any wet ingredients to a minimum to reduce their chances of releasing excess liquid. Finally, using a sturdy chip—such as a restaurant-style tortilla chip—is the key to reducing sogginess, as they tend to be thicker and less absorbent than other varieties.

What order do you layer nachos in?

In general, I recommend beginning each layer of your nachos with chips, topped with cheese, and other heat-friendly toppings (such as black beans). Then, each layer should have the same combination of chips, cheese, and beans. After removing your nachos from the oven, you may then add your fresh toppings—such as guacamole and tomatoes—to ensure they maintain their flavor and texture. Despite these instructions, however, remember that this dish is highly forgiving, so don’t worry if you miss an ingredient in a layer or want to play around with your ingredients.

Other Game Day Recipes You Might Also Like

Once you learn how to make shredded chicken nachos, you’ll be itching for more tasty dishes to serve at your next game-day party. These lip-smacking recipes will ensure everyone gets their fill with a perfectly savory, seasoned, and snackable taste.

If you try this Shredded Chicken Nachos recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Sheet-Pan Chicken Nachos Recipe Photographed from the top view from a closer view.
Print

Healthy Game Day Recipe Idea – Shredded Chicken Nachos

Here is a reader-favorite football food recipe idea: Tortilla chips layered with cheese, black beans, tomatoes, avocado, and other veggies for a drool worthy Shredded Chicken Nachos perfect for any party. Take it out of the oven, serve warm, and accept the compliments.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 998kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken

  • 1 ½ lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 1/2 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup enchilada sauce

For The Nachos

  • 8 cups tortilla chips
  • 4 cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese or mozzarella
  • 1 14 oz can black beans, drained and rinsed

As Toppings (optional)

  • 1 cup guacamole
  • 1 cup tomatoes diced or sliced
  • 1 cup fresh or canned corn drained if using canned
  • 1/4 cup jalapenos fresh/sliced or pickled

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees.
  • Pat dry chicken with paper towels. Transfer them onto a baking sheet (I used a half-sheet—AKA a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet.).
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper on both sides.
  • Roast in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Remove from the oven. Shred the now-cooked chicken using two forks.
  • Drizzle them with the enchilada sauce and broil for 2 minutes. Remove from the oven and set it aside.*
  • Turn the oven temperature down to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread tortilla chips on a sheet pan in a single layer. Top them off with half of the cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken ensuring that they are distributed evenly.
  • Continue with a second layer of chips, cheese, beans, and shredded chicken.
  • Bake for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese is fully melted.
  • Right before serving, top it off with your favorite nacho toppings and serve while still hot.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields nachos that is ideal for 8 servings when served as an appetizer. The below calorie information is per serving and does not include any of the optional toppings.
  • Chicken: While we roasted the chicken to make nachos, this recipe would also work with any cooked leftover chicken or store-bought rotisserie chicken. All you have to do is to shred it before assembling. You’ll need about 4-5 cups of shredded chicken to make this easy chicken nachos recipe. Additionally, if you are cooking your own chicken, you can use skinless chicken breasts instead of chicken thighs as well.
  • Enchilada Sauce: Broiling chicken with enchilada sauce is an optional step and can be skipped if you want to make it faster or you do not have enchilada sauce on hand. 
  • Drain: To prevent your nachos from becoming soggy, be sure to drain black beans very well before layering with chips and cheese.
  • Make Ahead: This recipe tastes best on the day that it is made. However, you can make the chicken ahead of time and have it ready for assembly. Once you have the chicken cooked, all you need to do is to layer it as written in the recipe.
  • Storage: Before refrigerating your nachos, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film or aluminum foil and store them in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Reheat: We recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. Be sure to remove any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness.

Nutrition

Calories: 998kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 60g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 1213mg | Potassium: 608mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1128IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 560mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/feed/ 15
Almond Flour Tahini Cookies https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/ https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/#comments Thu, 14 Dec 2023 16:54:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=3058 Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory…]]>

Tahini is an ingredient I grew up with since it is a staple in Middle Eastern cooking. The creamy, savory depth of tahini adds balance and rich texture to an otherwise simple grain-free, dairy-free cookie.

If you love baking with Almond Flour, you are in for a treat because we have so many almond flour cookie recipes in our archives. Gingerbread Cookies with Almond Flour, Almond Flour Peanut Butter Cookies, and Almond Butter Almond Flour Cookies are just a few to name. 

Tahini Almond Flour Cookies served on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the top view.

Ingredients

These sesame tahini cookies require nothing more than a handful of simple ingredients that are easy to find at grocery stores. We will need:

Ingredients for tahini sesame seed cookies from the top view.
  • Almond flour: Either make your own almond flour or purchase blanched almond flour (affiliate link) from the store or online. If you are in a pinch, an equal amount of almond meal is a great alternative.
  • Kosher salt: Kosher salt balances the sweetness and enhances the flavor of these sesame cookies with tahini. Sea salt can also be used.
  • Baking soda: Baking soda tenderizes and lifts the cookies ever so slightly.
  • Tahini: Also known as ground sesame seeds or sesame seed paste, one of my favorite brands of tahini is Soom (affiliate link). Just make sure to stir the tahini really well before using as the oils tend to separate easily. Additionally, make sure to purchase a sugar-free tahini for this recipe.
  • Maple syrup: The key is to use a liquid sweetener here, which can either be maple syrup, agave syrup, or honey. Keep in mind that the almond sesame cookies will be darker and a little bit sweeter if you use honey. I would not recommend coconut sugar here.
  • Sesame seeds: Sprinkling the cookies with a pinch of sesame seeds is an optional step, but I think one that you do not want to miss. You can toast sesame seeds yourself or buy toasted seeds from the store.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While I usually stick to the main ingredients, you can easily have fun and get creative with some of the optional additions below:

  • Chocolate Chips: Omit the sesame seeds and toss in ½ cup dark chocolate chips or chocolate chunks for tahini chocolate chip cookies.
  • Vanilla Extract: Add 1 teaspoon vanilla extract to the tahini almond flour cookies for extra flavor.
  • Ground Spices: Add warmth with the addition of ¼ – ½ tsp of cinnamon, cardamom, ginger, or nutmeg.

How to Make Sesame Cookies with Almond Flour?

These healthy tahini cookies come together in no time at all. You’ll be amazed at how fast you’ll be enjoying this freshly baked tahini cookie recipe. Below are the steps you need to follow to make them:

  1. Line baking tray: Line a cookie sheet with parchment paper. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C.)
A collage of images showing how to make the cookie dough for sesame tahini cookies.
  1. Mix dry ingredients: In a large bowl, whisk together almond flour, salt, and baking soda. 
  2. Add wet ingredients: Gently add in the tahini and maple syrup to the bowl.
  3. Stir: Mix until fully combined. At first, you might feel like there is not enough liquid in the cookie batter, but it will come together as you mix it.
Person showing how to portion, roll and arrange almond tahini cookies before baking them.
  1. Roll cookies: Scoop the cookie dough using a small cookie scoop (we used #40). Alternatively, use a tablespoon and measure out 2 tbsp of cookie batter per cookie. Roll into a ball between the palms of your hands. 
  2. Flatten cookies: Arrange the cookies on the prepared baking sheet, spacing 1 inch apart. Gently press down the cookie balls until each is 1-inch thick. 
A collage of images showing tahini almond flour cookies on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Top with sesame seeds: This step is optional, but if you prefer, lightly brush the tops of the cookies with a very small amount of tahini paste (1 teaspoon or so) and sprinkle with toasted sesame seeds.
  2. Bake: Bake for 12-14 minutes or until lightly brown with crisp edges. Rotate the baking sheet halfway through for even browning.
  3. Cool: Allow the cookies to rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Then, transfer to a wire rack to cool completely before serving.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

We think that these vegan sesame cookies are best on the day that they are baked. Therefore, we recommend baking them in small batches and storing them in a cookie jar. Here’s how I like to store them:

  • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Storage: Flourless tahini cookies will keep in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
  • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. 

Expert Tips

  • Stir the tahini: A jar of tahini tends to separate very easily. Give it a good stir with either a knife or thin spatula until smooth and pourable.
  • Texture of the dough: After you add in the liquid ingredients and start mixing it, you might think that there is not enough liquid in the batter to hold the dough together. However, please resist the urge to add more liquid. You will realize that it will come together as you continue to mix it.
  • They don’t spread: Unlike other cookies made with all-purpose flour, sugar, and butter, these tahini sesame cookies do not spread when baked. However, we still advise you to arrange them 1 inch apart from each other to make sure they don’t touch each other during the baking process.
Refined sugar free tahini cookies on a small plate from the top view.

FAQs

Is sesame tahini paste gluten-free?

Yes, sesame paste is naturally gluten-free as it is only ground sesame seeds.

Is tahini vegan friendly?

Yes, tahini is vegan since the only ingredient is sesame seeds.

What can I replace the tahini with?

Tahini gives these cookies a special savory, nutty flavor that is hard to replicate. However, if you can’t find tahini, another great alternative is any of the other nut butters, like almond butter, cashew butter, peanut butter, or sunflower seed butter. Keep in mind, the cookies will taste different, so it’s best to use tahini if you can.

Can you freeze tahini cookies?

Raw tahini cookie dough balls can be frozen for up to 3 months. First, flash-freeze them on a baking sheet for 1 hour. Then, transfer to a freezer bag or airtight container. When you are ready to bake them, follow the instructions on the recipe card as written. No need to thaw them.

More Recipes with Tahini:

If you try this Almond Flour Tahini Cookies recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Almond flour tahini cookies on a plate with a person taking one cookie from the plate.
Print

Almond Flour Tahini Cookies Recipe

Almond Flour Tahini Cookies are deliciously nutty, soft, and chewy and flavored with rich tahini. Vegan, gluten-free, refined-sugar-free, these tahini cookies are ready in less than 30 minutes.
Course Dessert
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 14 minutes
Total Time 29 minutes
Servings 16 cookies
Calories 130kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 2 cups almond flour 220 g.
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1/3 cup tahini aka sesame paste – well stirred and at room temperature + 1 teaspoon to brush the cookies
  • 1/3 cup maple syrup or honey*
  • 1 tablespoons sesame seeds toasted (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. (176 C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the almond flour, kosher salt, and baking soda.
  • Gently stir in the tahini and maple syrup. Mix until well incorporated. At first, it will feel like you do not have enough liquid, but as you continue to mix the dough, it will come together.
  • Using a small cookie scoop (see equipment section for the cookie scoop we used), portion the cookie dough. Alternatively, you can use a tablespoon measure and measure out 2 tablespoons of cookie batter (per cookie) and gently roll them into a firm roll in between the palms of your hands. Arrange the cookies on the prepared sheet pan, making sure that they are at least 1 inch apart.
  • Gently press down to flatten the ball so that it is 1 inch thick.
  • Lightly brush the cookies with a teaspoon of tahini and lightly sprinkle them with toasted sesame seeds on top.
  • Bake for 12-14 minutes until lightly brown on top, rotating the baking sheet halfway through for even heat distribution and browning.
  • Remove from the oven and let the cookies rest on the baking sheet for 5 minutes. Transfer onto a wire tack to cool and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 16 cookies. Nutritional values below are per cookie.
  • Using honey instead of maple syrup: If you prefer to use honey instead of maple syrup, you can substitute for the same amount. Honey will definitely add more sweetness to this cookie. It will also cause the cookie to brown faster, so you should reduce the baking time to 10-12 minutes or until lightly browned.
  • Make Ahead: Tahini cookie dough can be made in advance and tightly wrapped in plastic wrap. Store in the refrigerator for 1-2 days, or freeze for up to 1 month.
  • Storage: We find that these cookies are best on the day that they are made, so we recommend baking them in small batches. However, you can store leftovers in an airtight container at room temperature for 3 days.
  • Freeze: Flash-freeze the raw almond tahini cookies on a baking sheet for 1 hour, then transfer them to a freezer bag. Freeze for up to a month. Bake as directed in the recipe. There is no need to thaw them. However, you may have to add a few extra minutes to the baking time if you bake them right out of the freezer.

Nutrition

Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 92mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 0.2mg | Calcium: 49mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/tahini-cookies-with-pistachios/feed/ 5
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush)…]]>

What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
  • Use it as a topping: A dollop of baba ganoush is an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowl and pairs beautifully with honey harissa chicken or grilled harissa chicken.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Curried Brown Rice https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/ https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/#comments Mon, 14 Aug 2023 21:47:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=673 Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I…]]>

Curry brown rice is a super simple, versatile, and delicious side dish you can serve with any main dish. I love to make this on a Monday evening to enjoy with dinner, and then pack up the rest to have a hearty side for the week. If you are interested in cooking brown rice dishes, also check out our Brown Jasmine Rice Recipe.

Curried brown rice garnished with sunflower seeds and raisins on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this curried rice with raisins are so simple and full of ingredients you probably already have hanging about in your pantry. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Extra virgin olive oil
  • Onion: You can use both yellow and white onion in this recipe. Be sure to chop it finely.
  • Bell pepper: Use more savory green bell pepper or sweeter yellow or red bell pepper.
  • Curry powder: My favorite store-bought curry powder is Simply Organic Curry Powder (affiliate link), which is what I use for many Indian rice recipes.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Brown Basmati rice: Brown basmati rice is a long grain aromatic rice easy to find in the rice or global section of major grocery stores. My favorite brand is Pride of India (affiliate link.) If brown basmati rice is unavailable, brown jasmine rice is a great substitute.
  • Vegetable stock: Use Homemade Vegetable Stock, low sodium store-bought vegetable broth, or opt for Chicken Stock if not concerned about keeping it vegetarian.
  • Kosher salt
  • Raisins: Raisins provide a nice pop of sweetness, but the trick is to soak them beforehand (more on this below). If you can get your hands on sultanas or dried currants, either one would be a great substitute.
  • Sunflower seeds: Be sure to purchase unsalted sunflower seeds.
  • Citrus juice: This recipe can use fresh lemon juice or lime juice interchangeably.
  • Fresh herbs: Go for fresh parsley, fresh cilantro, or a mix of both to suit your taste.

Optional Add-Ins / Variations

  • Jalapenos: One small seeded and diced jalapeno can be added along with the bell pepper to add a nice spicy bite.
  • Homemade curry powder: If you don’t have curry powder on hand, make your own by mixing together 2 Tablespoons each ground coriander and ground cumin, 1.5 Tbsp ground turmeric, 2 teaspoons ginger, 1 tsp ground cinnamon, and ½ teaspoon each ground black pepper, ground cardamom, ground nutmeg, and cayenne pepper. Use 1 teaspoon for this recipe and store the rest in your spice cabinet.
  • Extra spices: Up the curry flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon of cumin seeds.
  • Coconut milk: If you want to turn this dish into a coconut curried brown rice, replace 1 ¾ cups of the vegetable stock with one (13.5 ounces) can of coconut milk, and use 1 ¼ cups of vegetable stock to total 3 cups of liquid.
  • Craisins: Swap out the raisins for dried cranberries instead.
  • Nuts: Toasted slivered almonds or cashews are a great substitute for sunflower seeds.
  • Green peas: Add 1/2 cup frozen green peas while the rice is resting for some color and extra protein.

How to Make Curried Brown Rice?

If you have ever wondered how to spice up brown rice, this easy curry rice recipe will get you there. Here’s how to make it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make curry rice.
  1. Rinse rice: Place brown basmati rice in a colander and thoroughly rinse under cold water.
  2. Saute aromatics and curry powder: Heat the olive oil over medium-high heat in a medium saucepan for about 1 minute. Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until vegetables have softened. Add garlic and saute for 1 minute.
  3. Toast rice: Pour in the rinsed basmati rice and fry rice gently, stirring constantly, for 7-8 minutes.
  4. Add the stock: Pour in the vegetable stock, cover, and bring to a boil. Once the rice has come to a boil, reduce the heat to low. 
A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.
  1. Cook rice: Simmer for 45-55 minutes or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Turn off the heat and allow it to rest, with the lid on, for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Soak raisins: While the rice is cooking, place the raisins in a heat-proof small bowl and cover with hot boiling water. The raisins will plump up as the rice is cooking.
  3. Add mix-ins: After the rice has rested, fluff it with a fork. Drain the raisins and fold them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  4. Finish and serve: Drizzle with lemon or lime juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if desired. Finish with fresh parsley or cilantro and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat Leftovers?

Brown rice with curry powder is a wonderful make-ahead side dish and one that I make regularly in my kitchen. To meal prep and store for later, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prep on a Sunday or Monday evening to enjoy dinner throughout the week. Simply place it in meal prep containers with your choice of cooked meat and/or vegetables in individual portions.
  • Store: Place leftover rice in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. We do not recommend freezing.
  • Reheat: Place the rice on a microwave-safe plate, add a splash of water or broth, place a damp paper towel on top, and reheat in the microwave in 30-second increments until warmed through.

Serving Suggestions

Brown rice curry is a delicious and hearty side dish that can be paired and enjoyed with a number of different meals. You could try serving it with:

Brown rice curry in a Dutch oven from the top view.

Expert Tips

  • Rinse rice: Rinse the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cold running water for about 1-2 minutes or until the water runs clear. This removes excess starch and ensures the rice does not become too sticky.
  • No need to soak: While it is customary to soak brown basmati rice for 30 minutes prior to cooking, we found the rice texture to be just as tender and pleasing without soaking beforehand.
  • Fry in oil: Toasting or ‘frying’ the rice in olive oil and curry spices helps to prevent the rice grains from clumping or sticking. It also evenly distributes the flavors onto the rice grains, making each bite as delicious as the next.
  • Use the right ratio of liquid to rice: We found the best ratio of liquid to brown basmati rice to be 2:1. If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments to the cooking time until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Increase curry spices: You can adjust the curry to your desired taste. Adding more may also change the color of the rice.
  • Do not stir: As soon as you add the vegetable stock to the pot, refrain from stirring, as this can cause the rice grains to break, resulting in a stickier product.
  • Allow the rice to rest: The key to fluffy rice is to allow the rice to rest once it is done cooking. Leave the lid on and steam the rice for 10-15 minutes to allow the moisture to distribute evenly.
  • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste and add more salt if needed.

FAQs

Can you add butter to brown rice?

Yes, butter can replace olive oil in just about all brown rice recipes. Heat and melt butter in the pan just as you would the olive oil.

What can I add to brown rice for taste?

A few aromatics, like onions, peppers, and garlic, along with warming spices, in this case, curry powder, add flavor, spice, and plenty of taste to brown rice.

Should I soak my brown rice before cooking?

Although it is usually recommended to soak brown rice before cooking, we simply rinsed the rice in a fine mesh strainer under cool running water for 1-2 minutes, and the rice came out perfectly.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Whole Grain Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Curried Brown Rice recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Freshly cooked Curried brown rice recipe on a plate.
Print

Curried Brown Rice Recipe

This Curried Brown Rice is an easy-to-make side dish that can be served along with any of your favorite meat, poultry, or vegetarian dishes. Packed with sweet, salty, and crunchy flavors, this brown rice recipe is sure to be a crowd-pleaser.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Indian
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Resting time 10 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 335kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 medium onion chopped
  • 1 medium yellow red or green bell pepper, seeded and chopped
  • 1 teaspoon curry powder
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 ½ cups Brown Basmati Rice thoroughly rinsed
  • 3 cups vegetable stock or water
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ½ cup raisins
  • ½ cup raw sunflower seeds unsalted
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice or lime juce, add more to taste
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley or cilantro, chopped

Instructions

  • In a medium size saucepan or Dutch oven, heat the olive oil over medium-high heat.
  • Add onion, pepper, and curry powder and saute, stirring frequently, for 4-5 minutes or until softened.
  • Add the garlic and saute for one more minute.
  • Stir in the basmati rice and cook, stirring constantly, for 5-6 minutes.
  • Pour the vegetable stock in, put the lid on, and bring to a boil. As soon as it is boiled, turn the heat down to low, and let it simmer for 45-55 minutes* or until all the liquid has been absorbed. Remove from the heat and let it rest for 10-15 minutes.
  • Meanwhile, place the raisin in a ramekin and pour some hot boiling water over it. Let it plump up while the rice is cooking.
  • When ready to serve, fluff the rice with a fork. Drain the raisins and stir them in, along with the sunflower seeds.
  • Drizzle it with the lemon juice. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Sprinkle it with fresh parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 4 to 5 cups of brown rice. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Rinsing the rice is important as it helps remove any additional starch. The best method is to place the rice in a mesh strainer and rinse it under cold water, stirring with your fingers or spoon.
  • If there appears to be excess liquid in the pot, add 5-minute increments until all the stock is absorbed. Remove from the heat when done.
  • Any leftovers can be refrigerated in an airtight container for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 335kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Sodium: 866mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 881IU | Vitamin C: 28mg | Calcium: 37mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/curried-brown-rice/feed/ 9
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#comments Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed…]]>

Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 2
Salmon Coconut Soup https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/ https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/#comments Thu, 27 Jul 2023 23:52:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11826 I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon…]]>

I am always looking for new and interesting ways to incorporate more seafood into my life, and this coconut salmon soup keeps me on my healthy eating journey. If you are a serious salmon lover, make sure to check out my Oven Baked Sockeye Salmon, Slow Baked Salmon, and Grilled Sockeye Salmon, too.

Salmon coconut soup garnished with cilantro in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Thai salmon soup are broken down into two parts for ease – Thai coconut broth and salmon soup. Here’s a look at what we need for each one:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Thai Coconut Broth

  • Vegetable Broth: One quart of either low sodium store bought or homemade vegetable stock (or Vegetable Scrap Stock) will work. Chicken Stock is another option, but I find the vegetable stock to work better with the salmon.
  • Coconut Milk: Use one full-fat can of unsweetened coconut milk, shaken or blended until smooth.
  • Aromatics: These include fresh ginger, shallots and garlic, all minced to the finest texture.
  • Lime Zest: Lime zest offers that extra bit of zing and adds a sour note to the overall flavor.
  • Lemon grass: If using fresh lemongrass stalks, remove the tough outer layers, smash it gently to release its oils and slice the bottom white portion (the dark green portion can be discarded). If you can’t find fresh lemongrass, 1 Tablespoon storebought Lemongrass paste is a great substitute.

Salmon Soup

  • Wild Salmon Fillet: Wild Alaskan salmon or wild sockeye salmon are both delicious here. Feel free to leave the skin on or remove the skin depending on your preference. Also make sure to check parts of the salmon for pin bones before slicing them into 1-inch pieces. If using frozen salmon, thaw overnight in the refrigerator.
  • Coconut Oil: Coconut oil rounds out the coconut flavor, but olive oil, sesame oil, or avocado oil can also be used.
  • Yellow Onion
  • Pepper: Red peppers, yellow or orange bell pepper all work here.
  • Fresh Ginger
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Coconut Milk: Use another can of coconut milk, blended or shaken until smooth.
  • Broccoli: For best results, make sure to cut the broccoli head into small florets, or bite size pieces.
  • Lime: A final squeeze of fresh lime juice at the end brightens the richness of the coconut broth and gives it a tangy finish.
  • Maple Syrup: Maple syrup balances the heat from the ginger. Brown sugar or coconut sugar will also work.
  • Garnish: Garnish each bowl of soup with freshly sliced green onion, fresh cilantro and jalapeno slices or serrano chiles just before serving.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Umami: For an extra dose of umami, you can add 1 teaspoon of fish sauce, soy sauce, or coconut aminos near the end of cooking.
  • Mushrooms: Toss in a handful of thinly sliced shiitake, button, or oyster mushrooms along with the broccoli for even more fiber, vegetables, and flavor.
  • Curry Paste: To make this more of a coconut curry salmon soup, add 1 Tablespoon red or yellow curry paste while sauteing the garlic and ginger.
  • Chilli Paste: Another common ingredient in Thai cuisine, feel free to add 1 tsp – 1 tbsp of your favorite chili paste depending on your desired spice level. If you can get your hands on Thai chiles, a little goes a long way.
  • Noodles: You can cook some vermicelli noodles on the side, divide it in bowls and pour the soup over for more of a filling meal.

How to Make It?

Whether you call it salmon belly soup or salmon chowder, this delicious and nutritious meal comes together in under 1 hour. Here’s how I like to do it from start to finish:

A collage of images showing how to make salmon coconut soup recipe.
  1. Make the Thai coconut broth: In a medium-sized saucepan, add the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt. Bring to a boil over high heat, then reduce the heat to medium-low and allow to simmer for 30 minutes.
  2. Discard solids: Strain the broth through a fine mesh strainer, either into a medium bowl or a large container. Set aside until ready to use.
  3. Prep salmon: While the stock is simmering, pat the salmon dry with a paper towel. Sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Saute aromatics: In a large stock pot or large Dutch oven set over medium heat, add the oil and heat for 1 minute. Then, add the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
A collage of images showing how to poach salmon in coconut broth.
  1. Add liquids: Once the aromatics are softened and fragrant, add the reserved broth and extra can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil, then reduce to medium-low heat and let simmer for 15 minutes.
  2. Add broccoli: Stir in the broccoli florets during the last 5 minutes of simmering time.
  3. Add salmon: At the last minute, add the pieces of salmon and let it cook for 1 minute, then turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook as the soup settles.
  4. Finish: Add the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and adjust to your liking.
  5. Garnish: Ladle into soup bowls and top with scallions, a handful of cilantro leaves, and sliced jalapenos. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store & Reheat Leftovers?

Since poached salmon soup is technically made in two parts, you can prepare the coconut lemongrass broth ahead of time and keep it in the fridge until the day you are ready to serve. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the stock 1-2 days in advance and store in an airtight container in the fridge. With the stock already prepared, the recipe should only take about 20 – 30 minutes from start to finish.
  • Store: Leftover salmon soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.

What to Serve it With?

This fish coconut soup is a gorgeous meal that can be served any night of the week. While it is a complete meal all on its own, you can serve it with:

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this Salmon Coconut Soup is pretty straightforward there are a few things that we recommend paying attention to for the best results. Here are a few things to pay attention to:

  • Cut the broccoli into small pieces. Smaller pieces make for a faster cooking time, which means your broccoli will be tender, not crunchy.
  • Do not overcook the salmon. For best results, add the salmon at the very last minute of simmering and immediately turn off the heat. The salmon will continue to cook in the residual heat from the soup. 
  • Taste test as you go. The key to Thai cuisine is its use of salty, sweet, spicy, sour, and umami flavors. Taste and adjust the seasonings as you go for a delicious and well-balanced meal.
Salmon coconut soup in bowls with bread on the side.

FAQs

What is creamy salmon soup made of?

This coconut salmon soup recipe starts with a coconut lemongrass broth as the base. The addition of onions, peppers, garlic, ginger, more coconut milk, salmon, and broccoli make it a complete dish.

How to cook salmon in coconut milk?

Salmon is a delicate, flaky fish that only needs 1 minute in simmering broth, especially if you are cutting it into small cubes. Immediately remove it from the heat as the residual heat from the coconut milk broth will continue to cook the salmon.

What does coconut soup taste like?

Salmon coconut soup is a Thai-inspired meal that strikes the right balance of salty, sweet, spicy, sour and umami. As always, taste test and adjust the seasonings to your liking.

Other Seafood Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Salmon Coconut Soup recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Salmon and coconut soup in a bowl garnished with cilantro.
Print

Salmon Coconut Soup Recipe

This Salmon Coconut Soup recipe is a comforting soup made with a Thai style coconut broth that is flavored with ginger, lime and lemongrass. Easy to make, this coconut fish soup is bright, aromatic and packed with a combination of sweet, spicy, sour and salty flavors.
Course Soup
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 4 servings
Calories 402kcal

Ingredients

For the Thai Coconut Broth:

  • 4 cups vegetable stock
  • 1 can full-fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger minced
  • 1 shallot minced
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest 1 lime
  • 1 stalk lemongrass thinly sliced or storebought Lemongrass paste
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For the Soup:

  • 1 ½ pounds salmon filets any residual bones removed, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon freshly ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon coconut oil or olive oil if you prefer
  • 1 medium yellow onion diced
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper diced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 3 cloves garlic finely minced
  • 1 can full fat coconut milk – 13.5 ounces
  • 1 cup broccoli florets rinsed and cut into small pieces
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon maple syrup
  • 2 limes quartered

Garnishes:

  • 2 scallions thinly sliced
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno thinly sliced

Instructions

  • To make the Thai Coconut Broth: Place the vegetable stock, coconut milk, ginger, shallot, garlic, lime zest, lemongrass, and salt in a medium-sized saucepan. Bring it to a boil on high heat, then turn it down to medium-low and let it simmer for 30 minutes.
  • Strain the broth into a bowl and discard the solids. Set the broth aside.
  • Meanwhile, start working on the chowder ingredients. Pat the salmon dry using paper towels. Season with salt and pepper.
  • Heat the oil in a stock pot over medium heat. Add in the onion and peppers and cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 4-5 minutes. Add in the grated ginger and garlic and cook for approximately 1 minute.
  • Add in the broth that was set aside along with the second can of coconut milk. Bring the mixture to a boil and let it simmer for 15 minutes.
  • Add in the broccoli florets in the last 5 minutes of the simmering time.
  • At the last minute, add in the cubed salmon and let it cook for a minute, and turn the heat off. It should continue to cook with the help of the residual heat.
  • Stir in the lime juice and maple syrup. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Garnish with chopped scallions, sliced jalapenos, and torn fresh cilantro leaves. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • This recipe is adapted (with minor changes) from Clean Soups: Simple, Nourishing Recipes for Health and Vitality cookbook.
  • Store: Leftover soup will keep in the fridge for up to 3 days in an airtight container.
  • Reheat: Reheat in a saucepan on the stove over medium-low heat until steamy and warmed through.
  • Freezing: We do not recommend freezing this soup as the poached salmon will not thaw well. However, you can certainly make the coconut broth, bring it to room temperature, and freeze it by itself to make this soup at a later time.
  • Make Ahead: You can make the broth a day or 2 in advance and refrigerate it in an airtight container.
  • This recipe was tested with the salmon skin on and removed – there was no difference in taste or the salmon staying intact.
  • Make sure that the broccoli florets are cut small so that they can cook quickly.
  • Add the salmon at the very last minute. If you let it simmer too long, it will be overcooked and lose most of its flavor.
  • Be sure to taste the soup and adjust the seasoning accordingly. You may even have to add a bit more maple syrup and lime juice if you are a fan of those spicy, sweet, and sour flavors.

Nutrition

Calories: 402kcal | Carbohydrates: 35g | Protein: 36g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 1249mg | Potassium: 1149mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 837IU | Vitamin C: 44mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/salmon-coconut-chowder/feed/ 12
Shish Tawook https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/ https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:46:50 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67581 What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From? Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish…]]>

What is Shish Tawook and Where Does It Come From?

Also referred to as “chicken tawook” and “shish taouk”, Shish tawook is a traditional Turkish dish made by threading marinated chicken on skewers and cooking them over a grill. Unsurprisingly, the word “shish” translates to “skewer,” while the word “tawook” means “chicken” in Turkish. Together, the name means “chicken threaded on a skewer.”

This recipe’s classic meat marinade—a mixture of yogurt, tomato paste, and spices—dates back to the Ottoman Empire, which ruled much of the Middle East from the 1300s to the 1900s. Since its inception, this recipe has been claimed by many countries in and around the Middle East, including Turkey, Lebanon, and Egypt.

Chicken tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh served by a person from the top view.

Though popular in its countries of origin, shish tawook has made a considerable mark on American culture—becoming a popular dish in Mediterranean, Lebanese, and Middle Eastern fast food restaurants in the US. 

List of Ingredients

This shish tawook recipe comes together with two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for chicken shish tawook from the top view.
  1. Shish tawook marinade: To make this Middle Eastern chicken marinade, you will need:
    • Greek yogurt: I like the thick creamy texture of full-fat Greek yogurt, but you can also use plain yogurt.
    • Lemon zest and freshly squeezed lemon juice
    • Olive oil
    • Fresh garlic cloves 
    • Tomato paste: This is mostly for color than flavor and can be omitted if preferred. 
    • Seasonings: You will need warm spices like ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, and basic seasonings like kosher salt and black pepper. Optionally, you can also add in a pinch of cayenne pepper for some heat.
  2. Chicken: You can use boneless skinless chicken thighs or boneless skinless chicken breasts for this shish chicken kebab recipe. Regardless of which one you use, it is important to make sure they are cut in equal sizes.

In terms of equipment, you will need either metal or wooden skewers to thread your kabobs.

How to Make Shish Taouk?

The recipe for shish taouk makes authentic Middle Eastern cuisine easy for cooks at any level. Follow the instructions below for a juicy chicken dish that is guaranteed to impress:

A collage of images showing how to make shish tawook recipe.
  1. Prep the chicken: Remove any residual skin and fat from your chicken, then slice it into one-inch chunks. Transfer your sliced chicken cubes into a large bowl, and set it aside.
  2. Make the yogurt marinade: In a mixing bowl, mix yogurt, fresh lemon juice, lemon zest, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and black pepper. Whisk until the ingredients thoroughly blend.
  3. Add the chicken: Pour the marinade over the chicken and toss the mixture until each piece of chicken has an even coating of marinade. Cover the bowl with plastic wrap and remove as much air as possible. Transfer the meat to the fridge and marinate the chicken for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  4. Prepare the skewers: If you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, soak them in water for 30 minutes before assembling the chicken kebabs. 
Person showing how to cook lebanese chicken kabobs in a collage of images.
  1. Preheat the grill: Set the burners to medium-high, and let it preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Use tongs to dip a wad of paper towel into the olive oil and thoroughly wipe the grates.
  2. Assemble the skewers: Thread the meat through the skewers, tapping off any excess marinade. If you have any thin pieces, fold them before threading to ensure even cooking. Do not overcrowd the meat as you thread the skewers. Leaving a little room between each piece will help each chicken piece cook evenly.
  3. Cook: Place the chicken skewers onto the oiled grate in a single, even layer. Cover the grill and cook for 12-15 minutes, rotating the skewers every five minutes. This rotation will evenly brown your meat and give the dish its signature grill marks. Check doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) in a few of the chicken pieces. They are fully cooked if they reached 165 degrees F.
Person covering freshly cooked Middle eastern grilled chicken with foil.
  1. Rest and serve: Place a sheet of aluminum foil loosely over the grilled chicken skewers and let it rest for 10 minutes. Serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Chicken shish tawook is a godsend for easy meal prep and leftover storage. Whether you make it for a weeknight meal or a summer party, you won’t let a single bite go to waste with these helpful tips:

  • Make ahead: The best part about Middle Eastern marinated chicken is that its flavor deepens the longer it sits. You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. Then, assemble your chicken kabobs and grill them as written in the recipe below.
  • Storage: When done eating, let your chicken reach room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: You can reheat the leftover shish chicken kabobs using three different methods:
    • In the oven: Place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes.
    • On the stovetop: Heat your chicken in a skillet with a bit of oil over medium-high heat until heated through. 
    • In the microwave: For a super-quick reheating method, place your leftovers in a microwave-safe container and microwave them for 1-2 minutes—checking every 30 seconds—until warm. If your meat is too dry, add a splash of water to the container before heating.

What to Serve with Shish Tawook?

You won’t believe how many menus you can design around this Middle Eastern Grilled Chicken recipe. This collection has everything to help you create a feast in your own kitchen:

Chicken tawook sandwich served with tzatziki in a lavash bread.
  • Make it a sandwich or wrap: Nothing hits the spot better than a shish tawook sandwich. Simply remove your grilled chicken from its skewers, lightly grill a slice of pita bread or lavash, spread a sauce on top, and add your chicken. In Turkey, I’ve seen people make a chicken tawook wrap by spreading the pita with creamy hummus, then topping it with cooked chicken, sliced tomatoes, and red onions (or sumac onions for a zestier taste). Then, it is drizzled with a yogurt-based sauce such as yogurt dill sauce or tahini yogurt sauce
  • Turn it into Lebanese chicken kabobs: Want to make it as they do in Lebanese restaurants? Spread your lavash (or pita bread) with Lebanese garlic sauce, toum, and then place the shish tawook on top along with lettuce, pickles, and tomatoes. If you have never made this Lebanese recipe, this homemade toum garlic sauce recipe is my favorite one. 
  • Serve over rice or tabbouleh: Whip up a pot of simple rice for an easy weeknight fix. Or, for a more traditional pairing, serve this Middle Eastern chicken skewers recipe alongside Lebanese Rice with Vermicelli, Turkish Tabbouleh, or Tabbouleh with Quinoa with a helping of cool tzatziki or a serving of Turkish yogurt drink ayran on the side.
  • Simple salad on the side: Packed with protein and herby flavor, this chicken kebab recipe balances perfectly with a garden-fresh salad. Prepare an authentic Middle Eastern menu with a Turkish White Bean Salad or Fattoush Salad. You can also add tasty, crisp flavors to your table with my Yogurt Coleslaw or any of my other delicious summer salads.

Expert Tips

This five-star Middle Eastern meal is pretty straightforward and quite easy to make. Below are a few helpful tips to help you make the best chicken shish tawook on your first try:

  • Don’t skimp on the marination: Sufficient marination is the key to the tender, juicy chicken in this recipe. Like my Yogurt Chicken Marinade, the yogurt and lemon juice in this recipe’s marinade tenderizes the meat and infuses it with rich, tangy flavors. To ensure your chicken comes out as juicy as possible, I recommend letting it sit for at least 4 hours— up to 24 hours—before cooking.
  • Cut the chicken into equal sizes: Be sure to slice your chicken into even, one-inch chunks before threading them on the skewers. Evenly-sized chicken cubes will allow each skewer to cook at the same rate.
  • Thread loosely: Thread your tender chicken chunks loosely on their skewers to avoid crowding and uneven cooking. I also recommend leaving 1-2 inches on the ends of your skewers so you can easily remove the chicken pieces from the skewers.
  • Oil the grates: To avoid sticking and burnt meat, thoroughly oil your grill grates before cooking your shish taouk. Furthermore, once you add the chicken skewers to the grates, turn them a few times to ensure even cooking.
  • Check for doneness: The best way to check your shish tawook’s doneness is to insert a digital meat thermometer into the center of a piece of chicken. USDA recommends cooking chicken until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F. before serving.
  • Let the chicken rest: Once you remove the chicken skewers from the grill, let it rest under a sheet of aluminum foil for 5-10 minutes before serving.
  • Don’t have a grill?: If you don’t have access to an outdoor grill, you can use an indoor grill pan to prepare your chicken shish tawook on the stovetop. You can also make a slightly different version of this recipe in the oven using my recipe for Oven-Baked Chicken Kabobs.
  • Add vegetables to the skewers: The authentic shish tawook recipe is not made with vegetables. However, if you prefer, you can use quick-cooking vegetables such as onions, mushrooms, and green bell peppers as you thread the chicken.

FAQS

What is the difference between chicken shawarma and tawook?

The difference in shish taouk vs. shawarma lies in marination and cooking. Though both dishes originate in the Middle East, chicken shawarma doesn’t usually include yogurt in its marinade, resulting in a deeper flavor profile. Also, chicken shawarma comes from slow-cooking stacks of shawarma spiced chicken slices on a vertical rotisserie and slicing off the outer layer.

What is the difference between chicken mishwi and chicken tawook?

To identify chicken mishwi vs. tawook, you’ll want to look at the method of assembly and cooking process. Chicken mishwi refers to chicken grilled on charcoal, whereas shish tawook is made by cooking cubed chicken on skewers.

What is the difference between shish kebab and shish tawook?

Though both refer to dishes cooked on a skewer, shish kebabs can include any meat, including beef, chicken, or seafood. Shish kabobs may also have veggies, like bell pepper or onions, for extra freshness and fiber. Meanwhile, shish tawook refers to skewered kebabs made with marinated chicken.

Can shish kabobs be cooked in the oven?

Yes! To cook shish tawouk in the oven, line a sheet pan with parchment paper and arrange your marinated chicken pieces. Bake the meat for 15-20 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping halfway through. Finish the cooking process by broiling the chicken for one minute on each side, up to two minutes in total.

How can I turn this into a chicken maroosh recipe?

Popularized by a Philadelphia-based restaurant, chicken maroosh is a version of shish tawook served on a hoagie roll rather than on pita or lavash. Top your hoagie with charred onions, tomatoes, pickles, and garlic sauce for an authentic maroosh recipe.

What are some other names used to describe this recipe in Middle Eastern restaurants?

Nowadays, people in the U.S. refer to this dish in dozens of different ways, including “sheesh tawook”, “chicken taouk”, and “shistaouk.” I’ve even heard it marketed as “Chickabob” in some Lebanese restaurants in the US.

Other Middle Eastern Recipes You Might Also Like

If you love this shish taouk recipe, I have dozens of other classic recipes for you to try. You won’t be able to resist these fan-favorite dishes’ mouthwatering Middle Eastern flavors.

If you try this Shish Tawook recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Shish tawook placed on a bed of tabbouleh and served with yogurt sauce.
Print

Shish Tawook Recipe

Experience authentic Shish Tawook, tender, juicy Middle Eastern chicken skewers grilled to perfection. Marinated in yogurt, garlic, lemon, and spices, this grilled chicken recipe is simple yet bold and flavorful.
Course Chicken Recipes, Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Marinading Time 4 hours
Total Time 4 hours 30 minutes
Servings 9 skewers
Calories 181kcal

Ingredients

Chicken

  • 2 pounds boneless and skinless chicken thighs or chicken breasts, cut into 1-inch cubes

For The Marinade

  • ¾ cup whole milk Greek yogurt or plain yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • ¼ cup lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil plus more for the grill
  • 6 garlic cloves minced
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional

Instructions

  • Prepare the chicken: Remove any residual skin or fat from the chicken; pat dry and transfer the chicken pieces to a bowl and set aside.
  • Prepare the marinade: In a mixing bowl, whisk together the yogurt, lemon zest, lemon juice, olive oil, garlic, ground cumin, dried oregano, paprika, tomato paste, salt, and pepper so that all are incorporated.
  • Pour the marinade over the chicken and mix well, ensuring all the chicken pieces are thoroughly coated. Cover it tightly with plastic wrap, removing as much air as possible. Place it in the fridge and marinate for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight.
  • If using wooden skewers, begin soaking them in water for 30 minutes prior to assembling the marinated chicken. Remove the marinating chicken from the fridge 20 minutes before grilling.
  • When ready to grill*, turn burners to medium-high and let them preheat for 10 minutes or until it reaches 400 degrees F. Using tongs, dip a wad of paper towel into the extra olive oil and then generously wipe the grates*.
  • Meanwhile, remove the chicken from the marinade and thread the chicken pieces through the skewer. Tap off any excess marinade. If you have a thin piece, fold it as you thread it so it will cook evenly. Do not pack the pieces too tight, as this can lead to uneven cooking.
  • Place the skewers on the oiled grate in a single layer. Cover and cook for approximately 12-15 minutes, rotating every 5 minutes so that you achieve a nice browning with grill marks. If you have a meat thermometer, check doneness by inserting it into one of the chicken skewers. If the internal temperature reached to 165 degrees F., your shish tawook should be cooked.
  • Remove the skewered chicken from the grill and tent with aluminum foil for at least 10 minutes before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 8-9 skewers of shish tawook with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The nutritional information below is per skewer.
  • Cook on the stove top*: If you do not have a grill, you can cook your skewers in a grill pan on the stove. It takes about 15-20 minutes to cook them on the stove.
  • Do not skip the oiling of the grill grates: This is an important step to ensure that the chicken releases easily (and in one piece) when cooked. If you skip this step (or do not oil them well) the chicken skewers will stick to the grates and it will be difficult to flip them.
  • Make ahead: You can marinate your chicken for up to 24 hours before cooking. When ready, assemble and cook them as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature. Then, remove the meat from the skewers and store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheating: To heat in the oven, place your leftovers on a sheet pan and warm them in a preheated 325 degrees F. oven for 10-15 minutes. And to warm it up on the stovetop, place your chicken in a skillet (or a grill pan) with a bit of oil over medium-high heat and cook until heated through. 
  • Serving suggestions: These chicken skewers can be served with cooked grains, summer salads, or in lavash bread. I served them over a bed of tabbouleh and with a side of tzatziki.

Nutrition

Calories: 181kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Cholesterol: 97mg | Sodium: 383mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 196IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 40mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/shish-tawook/feed/ 6
Chicken Kabobs in Oven https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/#comments Thu, 25 May 2023 19:42:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67579 Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite…]]>

Baking chicken kabobs is one of the most flavorful ways to prepare juicy, seasoned chicken all year round. A favorite protein among many, these baked chicken skewers make the perfect meal with fresh zesty marinade, succulent meat, and easy cleanup. Even better, when you give this delicious recipe a quick broil at the very end, your chicken kabobs will taste very similar to its grilled version.

If you are a fan of cooking kabobs in the oven, be sure to also check out our Oven Baked Beef Kabobs recipe.

Baked chicken kabobs served with rice and pita on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need to Make Baked Chicken Skewers

You’ll need two sets of simple ingredients to make oven-cooked chicken kabobs:

Ingredients for chicken shish kabob in oven from the top view.
  • Marinade: The seasoning for chicken shish kabobs is inspired by my Mediterranean
    seasoning
    . You’ll need the following:
    • Olive oil
    • Lemon zest and fresh lemon juice
    • Spices and herbs: Dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and ground black pepper.
  • Chicken: You will need two pounds of boneless, skinless chicken breasts or chicken thighs sliced into one-inch chunks.
  • Vegetables: It is optional, but you can easily turn these into chicken vegetable kabobs by including veggies such as red onions, green bell peppers, and yellow peppers.

In terms of equipment, you’ll need metal, bamboo, or wooden skewers to assemble the kabobs.

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

  • Marinade: If you prefer a tangier, creamier taste, you can use my Greek Yogurt Chicken Marinade. Or, if you’d like to make an Asian-inspired meal, you can opt for my soy sauce-based chicken teriyaki marinade instead.
  • Vegetables: The best part of cooking chicken skewers in the oven is playing around with what fresh veggies to use. In addition to onions and peppers, I recommend using quick-cooking vegetables such as button mushrooms, baby bella mushrooms, zucchini, or cherry tomatoes. 
  • Spices: Feel free to get creative by adding your favorite spices to the marinade. Earthy and flavorful spices like ground cumin and smoked paprika pair beautifully with the rest of the marinade ingredients.
  • Fresh herbs: A sprinkle of chopped fresh parsley or dill is an easy way to give these oven-roasted chicken skewers a gourmet finish.

How to Cook Chicken Shish Kabobs in the Oven?

Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is a quick and tasty way to enjoy five-star Mediterranean fare all year round. No grill, no problem! Simply follow the instructions below:

A collage of images showing how to bake chicken kabobs in oven.
  1. Prepare the chicken kabob marinade: In a large bowl (one that is big enough to accommodate all the chicken pieces), whisk together the olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, Kosher salt, and black pepper. Set it aside.
  2. Dry and cut the chicken: Dry chicken breasts using a sheet of paper towel on both sides. First, cut them into strips and then each strip into 1-inch cubes. 
  3. Marinade: Add the cubed chicken to the bowl of marinade, and toss to ensure each piece of chicken receives an even coating. Cover the bowl of chicken with plastic wrap. Press down on the layer to remove any air, and seal the bowl tightly. Place the meat in the fridge for at least one hour or for up to 12 hours.
  4. Soak the skewers: If you are using wooden skewers, soak them in water 30 minutes before cooking.
  5. Remove the chicken: 20 minutes before assembly, take the marinated chicken out of the fridge.
  6. Preheat the oven: Set the oven to 450 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Set the prepared sheet pan aside.
A collage of images showing how to make skewered chicken in oven.
  1. Assemble the kabobs: Loosely thread the pieces of chicken on each skewer, discarding any excess liquid. If desired, alternate the chicken chunks with onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken.
  2. Place the kabobs on the sheet pan: Arrange the assembled kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet, ensuring not to crowd the skewers. 
  3. Bake the chicken kabobs: Place the skewered chicken in the oven and bake for 16 minutes, flipping it halfway through baking. When rotating the chicken kabobs, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to rotate the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones. 
  4. Broil: Switch the oven to the broil setting and cook the chicken kabobs for one minute on each side, not exceeding a total of two minutes. Check for doneness by inserting a meat thermometer (affiliate link) into the center of one of the chicken chunks. When the meat reaches an internal temperature of 165 degrees F., remove the kabobs from the oven.
  5. Rest and serve: Loosely cover the oven-roasted kabobs with a sheet of aluminum foil, and let them rest for 5-10 minutes. Once the resting process finishes, serve!

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

Oven-baked chicken kabobs are excellent for anyone who enjoys easy meal prep. Prepare these kabobs, and simple meals will be ready throughout the week.

  • Make ahead: To transform this chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, prepare your chicken marinade up to two days in advance. Store the chicken and marinade in an airtight container in the fridge, and assemble your chicken kabobs when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your baked shish kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. You can also reheat your chicken kabobs in the microwave for 1-1½ minutes (checking every 30 seconds), until they are warmed thoroughly.

What to Serve with Baked Chicken Kebabs?

When you bake chicken skewers, you’ll unlock countless delectable menus fit for a restaurant. This simple collection has everything to satisfy your table, from savory grains to crisp salads. 

  • Rice and grains: Jasmine rice is a simple classic, while other seasoned options—such as my Herbed Quinoa, Simple Wild Rice Pilaf, and Tabbouleh—perfectly capture the herby, hearty taste of a Mediterranean menu.
  • Pasta: Tender, filling, and simple, orzo is one of my favorite sides to prepare when I bake kabobs in the oven. Looking for a richer, more decadent pairing? Buttery Garlic Pasta is the ultimate crowd-pleaser for sophisticated pasta sides.
  • Yogurt Sauce: Nothing complements baked chicken shish kabobs like a creamy, tangy, and irresistibly rich dipping sauce. My authentic Tzatziki is a classic pairing, while my Dill Yogurt Sauce is a quicker alternative that you can put together in 5 minutes.
  • Salads: If you want a delicious, low-carb pairing, any of my easy quinoa salad recipes will do the trick. Or, if you’re looking for a simple green salad, my Spring Mix Salad and Caprese Pasta Salad only require a handful of pantry-ready ingredients for a garden-fresh side.
Baked chicken skewers in a sheet pan from the top view.

Expert Tips

Cooking chicken kabobs in the oven is an easy way to prepare Instagram-ready meals all week. With these simple tips, your chicken will always come out perfectly juicy and flavorful.

  • Don’t skimp on the marinade time: Thorough marination is the key to giving this baked shish kabob recipe its robust, herbaceous taste. I recommend a minimum of an hour or up to twelve hours for maximum flavor.
  • Soak the skewers: I prefer metal skewers because they heat up quickly, resulting in evenly cooked chicken pieces. However, if you are using bamboo or wooden skewers, be sure to soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before assembling your chicken kabobs to prevent them from burning while cooking.
  • Thread the skewers loosely: When assembling your chicken kabobs, thread them loosely and leave room at both ends so you have something to hold onto while eating. I also recommend shaking off any excess liquid to avoid creating a liquid bath in the baking tray. Finally, discard any extra marinade, as its contact with raw chicken will introduce unwanted bacteria to the mixture.
  • Flip halfway through the baking process: Flipping your baked kebabs will ensure they cook evenly on both sides of the meat. 
  • Finish under the broiler: Keep a close eye on your chicken kabobs while they finish under the broiler. Broilers cook very quickly, and over-cooking your chicken skewers may result in burnt or dry meat. If you’re not a fan of using a broiler, bake your chicken kabobs for an extra five minutes instead. Though, keep in mind that broiled chicken tastes very similar to its grilled version.
  • Uniform-sized chicken: It is important to cut the chicken in equal sizes to ensure even baking. If your pieces are different sizes, they’ll cook unevenly, giving you a mix of over- and under-cooked kabobs. If some portions of your chicken are thinner than others, feel free to fold them during the threading process to make them match the size of their fellow pieces.
  • Check for doneness: I recommend using a meat thermometer (affiliate link) to ensure that they are fully cooked. Poultry should reach 165 degrees F. before it’s safe to eat.
  • Do not skip the resting time: The key to juicy chicken kabobs is to let the skewers rest after removing them from the oven. Cover the baked chicken kabobs with foil for 5-10 minutes so that the meat can reabsorb its juices and ensure maximum flavor.

FAQs

Can you cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

Yes! Oven-roasting chicken skewers is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. Not only is this process much easier than grilling, but it also gives your chicken a juicy, tender texture and an irresistibly delectable taste.

How to cut chicken breast for kabobs?

Cut your boneless chicken breast into one-inch chunks before threading them through the skewers. Uniform pieces will ensure that your skewers bake evenly.

How long to cook chicken kabobs in the oven?

I recommend baking your chicken shish kabob for 15-16 minutes at 450 degrees F., flipping it halfway through the cooking process. Then, broil your kabobs for one minute on each side to give them a crisp, golden-brown exterior.

What are the ideal temperature and bake time for cooking chicken kabobs in the oven?

The ideal temperature and time is 450 degrees F. for 15 minutes. However, with a two-minute broil, you can cook your skewers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 35-40 minutes. Or, roast your chicken kabobs at 375 degrees F. for 30-35 minutes and finish with a two-minute broil.

How long to broil chicken skewers?

You should broil chicken kabobs for one minute on each side to ensure optimal browning. However, keep an eye on your chicken during this process to keep them from burning under the broiler’s heat.

How to make chicken kabobs without skewers?

If you don’t have any skewers on hand, you can easily prepare deconstructed chicken kabobs in the oven. First, line a sheet pan with parchment paper, add your marinaded chicken cubes and vegetables, and roast the sheet pan chicken kabobs, flipping the meat and veggies once during baking.

Other Baked Chicken Recipes You Might Like

If you try this Baked Chicken Kabobs recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Oven baked chicken kabobs on a sheet pan from the top view.
Print

Chicken Kabobs in Oven Recipe

No grill? No problem! Baking chicken kabobs in the oven is the best way to cook kabobs without a grill. With this easy recipe, you can enjoy juicy and flavorful chicken skewers all year long.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Gluten Free, Halal
Prep Time 4 hours 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Total Time 4 hours 40 minutes
Servings 8 skewers
Calories 209kcal

Ingredients

For The Marinade

  • ¼ cup olive oil or avocado oil
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt plus more for seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For the Kabobs

  • 2 lbs boneless skinless chicken breast or boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into 1-inch chunks
  • 1 red onion quartered and sliced into 1-inch thick then separated into single layers
  • 2 green bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces
  • 2 yellow bell peppers seeded and sliced into 1-inch pieces

Instructions

  • Make the marinade: Whisk together olive oil, lemon zest, lemon juice, dried thyme, dried oregano, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (one that is large enough to accommodate all the chicken.)
  • Place the cubed chicken into the bowl. Toss to make sure all of the chicken is evenly coated with the marinade.
  • Cover the bowl with plastic wrap, pressing down to remove any air, and seal tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least an hour but up to 12 hours.
  • If you use wooden or bamboo skewers, soak them in water for at least 30 minutes before cooking kabobs in the oven.
  • When ready to assemble, start by preheating the oven to 450 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Loosely thread the chicken chunks on the skewer tapping off any excess marinade, and alternate with the onion and peppers. For 2 pounds of chicken, you should have 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. If your chicken is thin, you can fold it when threading on the skewer so all pieces cook evenly.
  • Place the kabobs on the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. If desired, sprinkle them with ½ teaspoon kosher salt and ¼ teaspoon black pepper.
  • Bake for 16 minutes, rotating once during baking. When rotating the skewers, I recommend removing the sheet pan from the oven as it is easier (and safer) to flip the skewers, especially if you are using wooden ones.
  • At the end of 15 minutes, switch the oven to broil and broil* the chicken kabobs for 1 minute on each side (no more than 2 minutes total.) This step helps brown the chicken. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer into one of the cubes. It should be done when it reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Remove kebabs from the oven, cover loosely with aluminum foil, and let it rest for 5 to 10 minutes. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 8 skewers, with each skewer having 5 pieces of cubed chicken. The approximate nutritional values listed below are per skewer.
  • Broiling: * Broiling chicken kabobs at the last minute help mimic the flavors of grilled chicken kabobs. However, if you prefer not to broil them, I recommend extending the cooking time in the oven to 20 minutes or until the internal temperature of the chicken reaches 165 degrees F.
  • Make ahead: To transform this baked chicken skewer recipe into an easy 30-minute meal, marinate the chicken up to two days in advance. Store it in an airtight container in the fridge and thread your skewers when you are ready to bake them.
  • Storage: Let your kabobs reach room temperature before storing them. Then, place the skewers (or, if you prefer, you can remove the meat from the skewers) in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Your leftover kabobs will stay fresh for 2-3 days.
  • Reheat: You can reheat the leftovers in a preheated 350 degrees F. oven for 10-12 minutes or until heated through. If they look dry, you can lightly brush the chicken pieces with a teaspoon of olive oil before placing them in the oven. Alternatively, you can warm them up in a grill pan until heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 209kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 25g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 461mg | Potassium: 519mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 104IU | Vitamin C: 62mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-kabobs-in-oven/feed/ 12
Mediterranean Lemon Chicken https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/ https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/#comments Tue, 09 May 2023 17:05:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14063 Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and…]]>

Chicken gets an upgrade in this gorgeous lemony Mediterranean chicken recipe. All you need is your favorite Dutch Oven and a little under an hour. Get ready for a delicious Mediterranean-inspired feast that is also gluten-free and low-carb diet friendly.

And if you are looking for more Mediterranean-inspired chicken recipes, you might like Chicken with Bulgur, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Chicken Pita Wraps.

Baked Mediterranean chicken with lemon is in a skillet from the top view.

Ingredients

Mediterranean baked chicken wouldn’t be complete without a simple list of ingredients. All we need is a handful of ingredients, including:

Ingredients for this recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Chicken: Any chicken would work here, including bone-in chicken thighs, bone-in chicken breasts, skinless chicken thighs, boneless skinless chicken breasts, or a mix and match of any of those listed.
  • Olive oil
  • Potatoes: Yukon gold potatoes are my favorite, but any waxy yellow or red potato would also work.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves are the best and add tons of savory flavor.
  • Chicken broth: Either pick up a box of your favorite low-sodium chicken stock from the store or use your own Homemade Chicken Broth.
  • Olives: I used Castelvatrano green olives for their buttery richness, but any green olive, Kalamata olives, or black olives would all work. Omit the olives completely if you are not a fan, or swap them out for artichoke hearts instead.
  • Lemon: Use fresh lemon juice for the best flavor, and add some fresh lemon slices during cooking so that the flavor of the lemon rind infuses into the chicken. If you really want to amp up the lemon flavor, have a few extra lemon wedges on the side for serving.
  • Thyme: Fresh thyme is best for its special citrus-piney aroma, but dried thyme can also be used.  Fresh oregano is another popular herb to serve in this lemon chicken with olives recipe. However, keep in mind that the flavor is very strong when compared to dried oregano. Use 2-3 sprigs of fresh oregano or 1 tablespoon dried oregano.
  • Seasonings: We are using basic kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper for this recipe. However, if you have some on hand, you can sprinkle the chicken with our Mediterranean Chicken Seasoning.

How to Make Mediterranean Lemon Chicken?

This easy chicken with lemon and olives recipe comes together in one skillet, making this a healthy chicken dinner you can make any night of the week. Simply:

Person showing how to season chicken thighs in a collage of photos.
  1. Season chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs (or chicken breasts)  with a sheet of paper towel. Season all over with salt and pepper.
A collage of images showing how to make this healthy lemon chicken recipe.
  1. Brown chicken: Set an oven-proof skillet over medium heat and add the olive oil. Place chicken, skin-side down, and sear until golden brown on the first side, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and continue cooking the chicken on the other side for another 3-4 minutes.
  2. Add vegetables and broth: Scatter the potatoes and garlic evenly over the chicken and pour in the chicken broth. Turn it up to medium-high heat and bring to a boil.
  3. Add olives, lemon and herbs: Once the chicken broth has come to a boil, add the olives, lemon slices and thyme.
  4. Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven and bake for 20-25 minutes or until the chicken is cooked through. 
  5. Serve: Serve the pieces of chicken, scooping some of the sauce and lemon slices directly on top for a delicious meal.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers

This Mediterranean Chicken Bake can be stored in the fridge and reheated to enjoy throughout the week. Here’s how to do it:

  • Storage: Bring your lemon chicken to room temperature. Transfer into an airtight container and store in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.

What to Serve It With?

This Lemon olive chicken recipe is a full meal by itself when served with a glass of white wine. However, you can easily turn it into a feast by pairing it with one of the dishes below:

Mediterranean chicken bake served in plates garnished with lemon slices.

Expert Tips

With one bite of this Mediterranean lemon chicken, you will understand why we believe that this recipe will become a staple in your weekly menu. Below are a few helpful tips to ensure that your chicken is cooked to perfection and bursting with flavor:

  • Use an ovenproof skillet: I used my Le Creuset Braiser (affiliate link), which I use for just about all of my one-pot meals. It goes from stovetop to oven in a flash. However, if you do not own an ovenproof skillet, first brown the chicken in a cast-iron skillet (or large nonstick skillet), then transfer to a small baking dish (or baking sheet) to finish cooking in the oven. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Make it your own: Play around with the combination of olives and/or herbs to give it your personal touch. Fresh parsley, fresh dill, fresh basil, or a combination of all three would make an excellent addition.
  • Check for doneness. The cooking time will vary based on the thickness of the chicken. Your chicken is fully cooked when the internal temperature registers 165 degrees F on an instant-read thermometer when inserted at the thickest part of the meat without touching the bone.
  • Serving Suggestion: Be sure to scoop some of the juices in the pan directly over the chicken when serving. I also garnish it with bruised olives and a few caramelized lemon slices for a visually stunning meal.

Other Weeknight Chicken Dinners You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mediterranean Lemon Chicken recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean lemon chicken bake in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Mediterranean Lemon Chicken Recipe

This Mediterranean Lemon Chicken is the dictionary definition of a wholesome and visually appealing dinner made in one-pot. Ready in less than an hour, it is the perfect weeknight dinner or weekend feast.
Course Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 25 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 583kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 1/4 pounds bone-in skin on chicken thighs or chicken breasts
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 2/3 pound Yukon gold potatoes washed and halved (or quartered, depending on the size)
  • 6 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 cup chicken broth
  • ½ cup large pitted green olives such as Castelvatrano
  • 1 lemon sliced
  • 6-7 sprigs of fresh thyme

Instructions

  • Prep chicken: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. Pat dry chicken thighs with paper towels. Season well with salt and pepper on both sides.
  • Brown chicken: Heat olive oil in an oven-proof skillet set over medium heat. Sear the chicken, skin-side down, until browned, about 4-5 minutes. Flip and cook the other side for another 3-4 minutes. Do your best not to move them so much. Chicken should release once it is properly seared.
  • Add vegetables and broth: Add in the potatoes and garlic and spread them around the chicken. Pour in the chicken broth. Bring it to a boil.
  • Add the rest: Add in the olives. Distribute the slices of lemon and thyme evenly over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Bake: Transfer the skillet to the oven. Bake until chicken is fully cooked and tender, 20-25 minutes.
  • Serve: Serve immediately alongside your favorite rice, bulgur, quinoa, or salad.

Video

Notes

  • Yield: Depending on the size of your chicken thighs, this recipe yields 5-6 thighs with plenty of potatoes to serve with on the side. 
  • Do not skip the browning of the chicken: While it might come as an extra step, searing the chicken helps build flavor and give the overall dish a deeper and more complex taste. Plus, the leftover little bits of the caramelized meat at the bottom of the pan mixed with potatoes create rich, savory flavors as they bake in the oven.
  • Plating: When plating, be sure to drizzle the juices over the chicken and potatoes.
  • Storage: Bring the leftovers to room temperature before storing them. Once cooled, transfer them into an airtight container and store them in the refrigerator for 3-4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat individual portions in the microwave in 30-second intervals. Or, reheat in a skillet on the stove, with plenty of the chicken juices or a splash of water, until warmed through.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Braised Chicken with Potatoes, Olives and Lemon recipe with minor changes.

Nutrition

Calories: 583kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 40g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 212mg | Sodium: 969mg | Potassium: 874mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 240IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 51mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mediterranean-lemon-chicken/feed/ 34
Slow Cooked Beef Brisket Tacos https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/#comments Tue, 02 May 2023 17:24:22 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7564 Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter.…]]>

Whether you’re planning a Cinco de Mayo party, a Tex-Mex-themed gathering, or looking for a tasty weeknight dinner doesn’t matter. These crock pot brisket tacos will delight your tastebuds with their fresh, smoky taste. Top them with my Easy Guacamole, or serve them alongside my fan-favorite Mexican Street Corn for an authentic Mexican meal. Add a pitcher of Pineapple Margaritas, and you’ll never be at a loss for party ideas again!

Person squeezing lime over beef brisket tacos.

Ingredients

To make these easy slow-cooker beef brisket tacos, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

For the Slow Cooker Brisket

Made with the most flavorful and fresh ingredients, this is easily the best brisket taco recipe for Mexican food lovers. Crowds will go wild for this simple recipe’s rich, seasoned taste.

Ingredients for brisket slow cooker tacos from the top view.
  • Brisket: I recommend using 3-4 pounds of brisket for this beef brisket taco recipe—the perfect size for six servings. When selecting your taco brisket, find a piece of meat with significant marbling and a layer of fat on top for extra flavor.
  • All-purpose flour: Flour is the key to making a thick, flavorful sauce for brisket tacos. However, you can omit this ingredient if you follow a gluten-free diet.
  • Onion: Robust yet mellow, onions give great depth to these brisket crock pot tacos. Cut your onions into thick half-moon slices before adding them to the slow cooker.
  • Peppers: Spice lovers will love the addition of jalapeno or poblano peppers to this easy taco recipe. Chop your peppers well, and you’re good to go!
  • Beef broth: I use beef broth in my taco beef brisket to give it a complex, hearty taste. However, chicken broth or even vegetable broth would also work.
  • Tomato paste: Rich tomato paste will give your brisket gorgeous color and an irresistibly piquant taste.
  • Fresh thyme sprigs: Thyme is the ultimate flavor-booster ingredient in hearty meat dishes. Earthy and lemony, this simple addition will lighten your beef’s taste.
  • Seasonings: I recommend using paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt for seasoning your beef.
  • Red wine vinegar: A small dash of red wine vinegar will brighten the smoky sweetness of this slow cooker brisket recipe. However, you could also use apple cider vinegar or any other vinegar you have on hand.

Brisket Taco Toppings

The sky is the limit when it comes to toppings for brisket tacos. Any of your favorite taco toppings would work, but you can find nearly a dozen tasty ideas below. You can use flour tortillas, make your own corn tortillas (following this masa tortilla recipe), or buy them at the store if you are short on time.

Brisket tacos toppings portioned and photographed from the top.
  • Guacamole: No one can resist a classic when considering what to put on brisket tacos. You only need four ingredients to make my creamy, fresh, and super easy guacamole recipe, perfect for shredded brisket tacos.
  • Tomatoes: Lighten up these brisket slow cooker tacos with the simple addition of tomatoes. You can use your favorite store-bought salsa, cherry tomato salsa, dice up fresh tomatoes, or make homemade pico de gallo.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of spice, topping a handful of fresh or pickled jalapenos will give your Mexican brisket just the right amount of kick.
  • Mexican cheese: Tangy and mild, a blend of Mexican cheeses is guaranteed to add a creamy taste to your brisket tacos. For extra freshness, you can even crumble cotija cheese on top of your tacos.
  • Pickled red onions: Anyone who likes bold flavors will adore the tangy punch of this easy red onion topping. For the most authentic flavors, try my Mexican Red Onion recipe. Or, you can also use roasted red onion slices if you are not a fan.
  • Fresh cilantro: Cilantro is optional, but it is a nice addition if you are a fan.
  • Lime wedges: If you like a little zing to your tacos, serve them with fresh lime juice. Lime wedges are a visually stunning way to add a citrusy bite.
  • Sour cream: Cool and tangy, a dollop of sour cream is just what your Mexican brisket tacos need to balance out their robust, spicy taste.
  • Sauce: Nothing pairs better with this shredded brisket recipe than its leftover juices we reduce at the end. Simply follow the steps in the recipe to make the sauce that takes this recipe to the next level.

How to Make Shredded Brisket for Tacos

Anyone—beginner and master chefs alike—can easily whip up pulled brisket tacos. You can let your slow cooker do the work when following these easy instructions.

A collage of images showing person preparing meat to make pulled brisket in crock pot.
  1. Make the meat rub: In a small bowl, mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt.
  2. Prick the meat: Use a sharp knife to puncture both sides of the meat in several places. I recommend pricking the beef about 20-30 times for maximum flavor. Then, use a paper towel to pat dry the meat.
  3. Rub the meat: Rub the spice mixture into both sides of the beef before wrapping it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap. Let the meat marinate in the fridge for 4-8 hours.
  4. Let the beef rest: On the day of cooking, remove the spice-rubbed beef from the fridge. Let it rest for 30-45 minutes while prepping the remaining ingredients.
A collage of images showing how to make beef brisket in a crock pot for tacos.
  1. Dust the meat with flour: Remove the stretch film from the beef, and sprinkle both sides with flour. Shake off any excess flour.
  2. Whisk the broth: Whisk together the beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup and set the mixture aside.
  3. Layer the slow cooker: Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the base of the crock pot. Transfer the meat, fat-side-up, on top of the veggies. Then, add the remaining vegetables on top of the beef. Pour the broth mixture atop the brisket, adding the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  4. Cook the brisket: Cover the slow cooker and cook the beef on low for 8-10 hours. By the end, the meat should be fully cooked and easily shreddable.
Person showing how to shred beef brisket.
  1. Shred the beef: Transfer the cooked meat to a cutting board or cookie sheet. Before adding it to your tacos, shred the brisket with two forks. Cover it with aluminum foil until ready to serve.
A collage of photos showing how to reduce the leftover juices.
  1. Prepare the sauce: Place a colander over a saucepan and strain the leftover liquid. Discard the veggies. Then, bring the sauce to a boil over medium-high heat, then reduce it to medium heat. Let the mixture simmer for 15 minutes or until it reduces by half. Taste the sauce and add any extra seasoning, if desired. Just before serving, add the red wine vinegar.

How to Assemble Brisket Tacos

The most fun part about making brisket street tacos is assembling them. Design your tacos using whatever toppings you like, and you’ll have a photo-ready main the entire family will love.

A group of images showing how to make brisket tacos with the toppings.
  1. Prepare the taco station: Place the taco toppings in individual serving bowls, including the shredded brisket and the reduced sauce.
  2. Warm the tortillas: If desired, warm the tortillas in a small pan or microwave.
  3. Assemble shredded beef tacos: Lay out a tortilla, and add a helping of shredded brisket. Drizzle the meat with a tablespoon of the sauce, and then add your favorite toppings on top of the tacos. Repeat this process with the remaining tortillas.
  4. Serve: Garnish the beef brisket tacos with fresh lime and serve.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, Thaw, and Reheat?

Storing brisket for tacos is one of the easiest meal preps you’ll ever do. Make your brisket ahead or store the meat and juices for simple lunches throughout the month.

  • Make ahead: You can prepare this brisket taco recipe up to 2 days in advance. Not only does this process make meal prep a cinch, but it also lets the flavors develop before serving the brisket for leftover tacos.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and let it reach room temperature. Then, portion the brisket leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the leftovers in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftover beef brisket in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

What to Serve with Brisket Tacos

You’ll unlock dozens of mouthwatering Mexican sides to serve when you make slow-cooked beef brisket tacos. From creamy street corn to seasoned quinoa, this list has it all!

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a master chef to learn how to make brisket tacos. These pro tips will ensure your beef is as tender and flavorful as possible.

  • Don’t skip the resting: To get delicious flavor into every bite of brisket, I recommend letting your meat rest for at least 4 hours, preferably overnight. This step ensures that your beef absorbs its savory seasonings before adding it to the slow cooker.
  • Low and slow: A great way to ensure soft, tender meat is to take time with the recipe. Cook the brisket for at least 8-10 hours on low heat, letting the meat relax and absorb its juices. If you want to serve the tacos at night, begin cooking early in the morning. If you plan to serve these tacos during the day, start slow cooking the night before.
  • Skim the fat: Because this beef brisket recipe cooks off much of the meat’s fat in the crock pot, I recommend skimming off the extra fat from the meat mixture with a wooden spoon before serving.
  • Reduce the leftover liquid to use as a sauce: My favorite way to dress my own tacos is by transforming the brisket’s cooking liquid into a mouthwatering sauce. Let the liquid simmer for 15 minutes until it reduces by half. Then, add extra seasonings and serve!
  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting your tender brisket recipe for seasoning: just after shredding your meat and when you first taste the reduced sauce (i.e., while it’s simmering). Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Customize it to your liking: Brisket tacos are one of my favorite foods because of how much fun you can have customizing them! Play with whatever toppings you want, experimenting with new combinations until you find your favorite.
Beef brisket tacos on a plate topped off with guacamole, red onion, and Mexican cheese.

FAQs

Want to know more about how to make brisket in a crock pot for tacos? I’ve answered all your questions here so you can enjoy melt-in-your-mouth eats any day of the week.

Why is my brisket tough?

The meat used for brisket tends to be tougher than other cuts, with lots of connective tissue. Therefore, you must cook your beef at a low temperature for at least 8-10 hours to ensure the meat is as soft and tender as possible.

What are some other ways I can use leftover brisket?

Do you have some leftover brisket from making tacos? There are countless delicious ways to use your meat leftovers, like using it as an enchilada filling, making brisket tacos, or even whipping up a plate of nachos.

Can I use suadero beef instead of brisket in this recipe?

Yes, you can. If you are trying to recreate the suadero tacos you had in Mexico, you can easily use suadero beef (also sold as suadero brisket or suadero meat) instead of brisket in this recipe.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Like:

Can’t get enough of this beef brisket taco recipe? These other beef dishes will satisfy your cravings with hearty, fresh flavors even a pro chef wouldn’t be able to resist.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this recipe, please take a moment to give it a star rating and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Brisket tacos served over corn tortillas and topped off with toppings on a plate.
Print

Slow Cooked Brisket Tacos Recipe

This Slow Cooker Beef Brisket Tacos Recipe requires little hands on time, but every minute is worth the effort. Corn tortillas filled with slow cooked brisket, guacamole, and pickled red onion are out-of-this-world delicious.
Course Meat
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 10 hours
Marinading time 8 hours
Total Time 18 hours 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 642kcal

Ingredients

For The Seasoning (Meat Rub)

  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 2 teaspoons onion powder
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 ½ teaspoons salt
  • 3 lbs. beef brisket flat cut; trimmed of excess fat and “silver skin”
  • 2 tablespoons of all-purpose flour
  • 1 onion halved and sliced ½ inch thick
  • 1 jalapeno or poblano pepper; seeds removed and roughly chopped
  • 4 garlic cloves minced
  • 3 cups beef broth
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 3 sprigs fresh thyme or 1 teaspoon dried thyme
  • 2 bay leaves
  • 1 tablespoon red wine vinegar

For The Tacos:

  • 12 6-inch corn tortillas
  • 1 ½ cups guacamole
  • 1 tomato cut into small pieces
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and sliced
  • 1 cup Mexican cheese such as queso fresco or cotija cheese
  • 1 cup pickled red onions
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro leaves chopped
  • Lime wedges for serving

Instructions

For Slow Cooker Brisket:

  • Prepare the meat rub: Mix the paprika, chili powder, onion powder, garlic powder, and salt in a bowl.
  • Prick both sides of the meat in several places ( about 20-30 “hits”) using the tip of a sharp knife. Then pat dry the meat on both sides using a sheet of paper towel.
  • Rub the spice mixture over both sides of the meat. Wrap it tightly with stretch film or plastic wrap and let it marinate in the fridge for at least 4 hours or preferably overnight (up to 8 hours.)
  • On the day of cooking, remove the meat from the refrigerator and let it rest for 30 minutes while you prepare the rest of the ingredients.
  • Remove the stretch film. Sprinkle it with the flour on both sides, shaking off the excess.
  • Whisk together beef broth and tomato paste in a measuring cup until combined. Set it aside.
  • Place half of the sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic at the bottom of the slow cooker. Place the meat with the fat side up on top of the mixture.
  • Add the remaining sliced onions, pepper, and minced garlic on top of the meat. Pour the mixture over the meat. Add the thyme and bay leaves to the liquid.
  • Cover and cook on low heat setting for 8-10 hours or until meat is fully cooked and shreds easily.
  • Transfer the now-cooked brisket onto a cutting board (or cookie sheet) and cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm. Right before serving, shred the meat using two forks. When done, cover it with aluminum foil to keep it warm.

To Make The Sauce:

  • Using a large spoon, skim off the liquid fat layer in the crock pot as much as you can*. Place a colander over a saucepan, strain the leftover liquid, and discard the veggies.
  • Bring the liquid to a boil over medium-high heat. Turn the heat down to medium and let it simmer for 15 minutes or until it is reduced by half and slightly thickened. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Add the red wine vinegar at the last minute to brighten the flavor.

To Assemble the tacos:

  • Set up your taco station by placing the toppings in individual serving bowls, the now-shredded meat, and the reduced sauce.
  • If preferred, warm tortillas.
  • To assemble the brisket tacos, place shredded brisket over a corn tortilla. Drizzle it with a tablespoon (or more) of the reduced sauce, and then add the toppings. Repeat the same process with the rest of the tortillas.
  • Garnish with fresh lime and serve!

Notes

  • Taste for seasoning: There are two times I recommend tasting this recipe for seasoning: First, just after shredding your meat, and then second, when the sauce is fully reduced after the simmering time is fully completed. Since we are “cooking off” most of the liquid, adding seasonings to the sauce too soon may produce an overly salty sauce.
  • Make it your own: I included some topping suggestions, but as with any other taco recipe, the sky is the limit when dressing your tacos. Use this recipe as a place to start and customize it to your liking.
  • Skim the fat: Do not skip removing the liquid fat at the top layer of the liquid. The amount of liquid fat you’ll end up with depends on how fatty your meat is. You can reserve (I usually freeze it) and use it in place of oil or butter in recipes or discard it. Alternatively, if you have it, you can use a fat separator to remove it.
  • Make ahead: You can prepare the slow-cooked brisket recipe up to 2 days in advance. Doing so helps develop flavors and make them rich and even more delicious. When ready to serve, warm up the meat (and the sauce), prep taco toppings, and assemble at the table.
  • Storage: To store your slow cooker brisket tacos, shred the leftover meat and bring it to room temperature. Then, portion the leftovers into airtight containers, add a little juice and store them in the refrigerator for up to 2 days.
  • Freezing and thawing: Before you freeze your brisket, shred it and let it cool to room temperature. Portion the meat and leftover sauce into several airtight containers, labeling them with dates so you can keep track of their freshness. Then, place each airtight container in the freezer for up to 2 months. When ready to eat, thaw the brisket in the fridge overnight.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating the brisket in a pan with the juices for maximum juiciness. However, you could also place the leftovers in the oven at 350 degrees F. for 15-20 minutes. Be sure to drizzle them with some of the juices so they won’t dry out in the oven.

Nutrition

Calories: 642kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 58g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Cholesterol: 158mg | Sodium: 1394mg | Potassium: 1315mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1502IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 215mg | Iron: 7mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/slow-cooked-beef-brisket-tacos-2/feed/ 46
Eggplant Beef Stew https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/ https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/#comments Mon, 03 Apr 2023 23:15:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1169 Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style…]]>

Inspired by my Vegetable Beef Soup and Crock Pot Vegetable Beef Soup, along with my Turkish Stuffed Eggplant, this Turkish-style eggplant beef stew recipe takes home cooking to another level.

Trust the process with this one, as the low and slow cooking technique I learned from my mom is worth the wait. Love eggplant? Be sure to check out our collection of tasty eggplant recipes.

Beef and eggplant stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Many of the ingredients for this beef stew with eggplant are pantry staples, along with a few that are easy to grab on a quick trip to the grocery store. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe portioned out and photographed from the top view.
  • Stew meat: You can use Sirloin steak tips, or a whole boneless beef chuck roast cut into 1 – 1 ½ inch cubes.
  • Aromatics: Onions and garlic give it a deep, savory flavor.
  • Olive oil
  • Spices and seasonings: These include ground cumin, paprika, bay leaf, salt, and black pepper.
  • Peppers: I like jalapenos for a kick of spice or red bell peppers for mild.
  • Tomatoes: We are using tomato paste and canned tomatoes (diced or crushed).
  • Eggplant: Globe eggplant is the easiest to find in grocery stores and commercial varieties mean you no longer have to deal with Sweating Eggplant. But feel free to use any Type of Eggplant you love.
  • Chicken stock: Homemade Chicken Stock will provide the best flavor, but a store-bought chicken broth would also work.
  • Green peas: Blanched Frozen Peas or store-bought frozen peas will both work.
  • Herbs: Fresh parsley or fresh oregano leaves would also work.

How to Make Eggplant Beef Stew?

This beef with aubergine recipe takes some time and patience, but your efforts will be worth it in the end. Here’s how I like to make it:

Person drying the meat and meat is in the dutch oven.
  1. Dry meat: Dry the stew meat with a paper towel on all sides.
  2. Prep meat: Set the Dutch oven over low heat and add the meat and quartered onion. Cover with the lid and let it cook for 1 hour (no peeking).
  3. Keep it low and slow: At the end of 1 hour, open the lid and give the meat and onions a stir. Cover again and continue to cook for another 2 hours. After 2 hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat – the beauty of this recipe is to cook it low and slow.
A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Finish beef: Continue cooking the meat for another 2 hours, stirring at the end of each hour. The meat should now be super soft. There may be some liquid in the pot, depending on the stew meat, which is totally fine. Give it a taste and make sure that it is soft and not too chewy. If it is, then continue cooking for another 30 minutes to an hour.
  2. Remove meat: Remove the meat, onion, and all the juices from the Dutch oven into a bowl. Cover with foil to keep warm. Do not wash the Dutch oven.
  3. Saute aromatics and spices: In the same Dutch oven, heat olive oil over medium heat and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 – 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for 1 minute, or until fragrant.
  4. Add veggies & let it simmer: Add the prepared eggplant, tomatoes, chicken stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper. Place the beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a stir and cover it with the lid. Bring it to a boil, then reduce it to a simmer for 15-20 minutes. 
  5. Add peas: After the 15-minute mark, add the frozen peas. Bring it to a final boil and let it simmer until ready to serve.
  6. Serve: When ready to serve, remove the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.
Turkish Style eggplant beef stew after it is cooked in a big pot with a wooden spoon on the side.

How to Make Ahead, Store Leftovers, Reheat and Freeze?

Beef stew and eggplant can be made ahead of time and stored in the fridge or freezer for longer storage. Here’s how to do it:

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew any night of the week.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

What to Serve It With?

Any of my side dish recipes would pair wonderfully with this recipe. But if you are looking for some inspiration, some of my favorites include:

Beef eggplant stew in a plate with bread on the side.

Expert Tips

  • So delicious, you don’t even need salt. Don’t fret about not salting the meat in the beginning. The low and slow cooking method creates meat so delicious you’ll find you will not need salt until braising.
  • Keep it low and slow. Trust the process, and the meat will cook through until melt-in-your-mouth tender. Patience is a virtue with this one.
  • A quick tip for preparing eggplant for cooking: As I cut eggplant, I place it in a large bowl of water with some Kosher salt to prevent the eggplant from oxidizing and turning brown.
  • Use one kind of stew meat to ensure the best flavor and even cooking. As I learned from The Kitchn’s article, Best Choice of Meat for Stew, using one type of meat cut in equal sizes will ensure that you will end up with an eggplant beef stew that is evenly cooked.
  • Incorporate other vegetables. Mushrooms, green beans, or potatoes can be used instead of (or in addition to) eggplant. Keep in mind, potatoes or other root vegetables might take longer to cook.
  • Keep it on the smallest heat source. Use the smallest burner on the stovetop over the lowest heat setting when first cooking the meat and onions.

FAQs

Can I make this recipe in the slow cooker?

I would not recommend making this in a slow cooker (or Instant Pot) as the slow cooker is too hot, even on the low setting. The magic of this recipe is to keep it on the smallest and lowest heat source on the stove.

Can you put eggplant in beef stew?

Yes, it is one that I use in many of my stew recipes. It cooks very fast and absorbs the many delicious flavors of beef and vegetables.

How long does eggplant need to be cooked in stew?

Eggplant only takes about 15-20 minutes to cook through in stew.

Do you need to peel eggplant for stew?

No, this is a personal choice. The skin is edible, so unpeeled eggplant is just fine.

Other Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Eggplant and beef stew in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Eggplant Beef Stew Recipe

Eggplant Beef Stew served with bulgur pilaf makes a satisfying dish with tender pull-apart meat. Cooked low and slow, this Turkish style beef stew is a must try!
Course Beef
Cuisine American, Turkish Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 15 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 295kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 lbs stew meat Sirloin steak tips or boneless beef chuck roast, cut into 1 ½ inch cubes
  • 1 large yellow onions peeled and cut into quarters
  • 1 tablespoon vegetable oil olive oil or avocado oil
  • 3 jalapeno peppers seeded and chopped – or bell pepper would also work
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 3 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 eggplant cut into cubes ~ 1 lb.
  • 1 can diced tomatoes 14.5 oz.
  • 1 cup chicken stock
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 1 cup frozen peas no need to thaw
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley freshly chopped
  • Pinch red pepper flakes or Aleppo pepper if you can get your hands on it

Instructions

  • Dry meat: Using paper towels, pat-dry the stew meat as much as you can.
  • Cook meat: Place meat in a Dutch oven with the quartered onion over low heat. Put the lid on and let it cook for an hour without opening it. I recommend using the smallest burner on your stovetop.
  • Keep it low and slow: At the end of an hour, give it a stir, put the lid back on and let it continue to cook for another two hours. At the end of two hours, you will see that the meat will release most of its juices. Do not be tempted to increase the heat or move to a larger burner; the beauty of this recipe is to cook low and slow.
  • Finish beef: Continue to cook for another 2 hours, giving it a stir at the end of each hour mark. In the end, the meat should be super soft. Depending on the stew meat you are using, there may be some liquid in the pot, which is okay.
  • Remove meat: Remove the meat and onion (and all the juices) from the pot into a bowl, cover with foil, and set it aside. Do not wash the dutch oven.
  • Saute aromatics and spices: In the same dutch oven over medium heat, heat olive oil and add chopped pepper, tomato paste, ground cumin, and paprika. Cook, stirring frequently, for 4 to 5 minutes. Stir in the garlic and cook for a minute.
  • Add veggies: Add the cubed eggplant, tomatoes, stock, bay leaf, salt, and pepper.
  • Simmer: Put the now-cooked beef, onion, and all of the juices back into the pot. Give it a quick stir, cover it with the lid, bring it to a boil and let it simmer for 15-20 minutes. Add the frozen peas and let them come to one last boil.
  • Serve: When ready to serve, make sure to take out the bay leaf. Garnish with parsley and serve.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: The stew meat and onions can be prepped and slow-cooked (steps 1-5) up to 3 days in advance. This gives you a good head start if looking to prepare the stew on a weeknight.
  • Storage: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in 30-second increments in the microwave or over medium heat on the stove until warmed through.
  • Freeze: Bring to room temperature, then store in a freezer-safe container for 1-2 months.
  • Thaw: Thaw overnight in the fridge, then reheat as instructed above.

Nutrition

Calories: 295kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 95mg | Sodium: 563mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 601IU | Vitamin C: 31mg | Calcium: 80mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/beef-stew/feed/ 17
Chicken with Bulgur https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/ https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/#comments Thu, 05 Jan 2023 21:23:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2845 If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to…]]>

If you’re not accustomed to cooking with bulgur wheat (also known as burghul), this dish is a great place to start! Bulgur, a whole grain, is often used in Mediterranean cooking to add a nutty flavor and chewy texture to a variety of meals. To learn more about this yummy grain, look no further than my comprehensive guide, What is Bulgur Wheat? 

If you are a fan of one-pot chicken recipes, be sure to also check out our Marry Me Chicken and Chicken Stroganoff recipes.

A roasted chicken thigh with bulgur wheat on a plate with a fork from the top view.

Ingredients

We’re using Mediterranean-inspired spices, such as cumin and paprika, to season the juicy, tender chicken thighs. The rest of the dish is packed with bulgur wheat to add substance and a satisfying, chewy texture. Here’s a breakdown of what you’ll need:

Ingredients for a dish with chicken thighs and bulgur from the top view.
  • For the bulgur wheat, you can choose from various types of bulgur. I like to use medium coarse bulgur (affiliate link) but you can also use Bob’s Red Mill red bulgur (affiliate link).
  • To make the chicken bulgur recipe, you’ll need skinless, bone-in chicken thighs, olive oil, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, an onion, a bell pepper, garlic, sun-dried tomatoes, bulgur wheat, chicken stock (my favorite recipe is Ina Garten’s Chicken Stock), chopped fresh parsley, and feta cheese (optional). 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you don’t have one or more of the above ingredients and you’re in a pinch, feel free to make some swaps and substitutions to accommodate what you have on hand. Here are some suggestions: 

  • Bulgur: While I love to use bulgur for the heartiness, flavor, and texture it provides, I know that it can sometimes be tricky to find at the grocery store. If your local store is out of stock and there’s no time to buy online, you can rest assured that recipes with bulgur wheat and chicken taste great with other grain substitutes. Among all the bulgur substitutes, we recommend using quinoa for this recipe, as it provides a similar texture and flavor. If you’re unfamiliar with quinoa, we have an easy guide to help you cook quinoa with confidence.
  • Seasonings: I chose to keep things simple by seasoning the meat with cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper. If these seasonings don’t appeal to your taste buds, try substituting them with Mediterranean Spice Blend, Italian seasoning, dried oregano, or dried thyme to add a pleasant, mild flavor to the dish. 
  • Sun-dried tomatoes: For this one pot bulgur dish, I recommend purchasing a jar of sun-dried tomatoes in olive oil (8 ounces), as they tend to have the best flavor. You can also purchase packaged and dehydrated sun-dried tomatoes, although I recommend soaking them in a bowl of water for 5 minutes before adding them in. Regular canned tomatoes would also work in a pinch, but be sure only to use a cup of stock if you’re adding in the canned tomatoes with their juices. 

How to Make Chicken with Bulgur

While this Mediterranean bulgur with chicken looks (and tastes) like a restaurant-worthy dish, it requires minimal effort and only one skillet! Once you sear the meat and saute the rest of the ingredients in the pan, all you have to do is pop it in the oven, sprinkle it with a little parsley, and set it on the table to enjoy. Here’s how to make it:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to oil and season chicken thighs from the top view.
  1. Prep the meat: Use paper towels to thoroughly dry each chicken thigh. Drizzle them with olive oil. 
  2. Mix the seasoning: Add the cumin, paprika, salt, and pepper to a small bowl and mix until combined. 
  3. Season the meat: Rub each thigh with the spice mixture. 
  4. Heat the skillet: Add the olive oil to an oven-safe skillet (affiliate link) and heat over medium-high heat until the oil shimmers. 
A person searing chicken and cooking veggies from the top view.
  1. Sear: Place the thighs in the hot pan and sear for 4-5 minutes per side until lightly golden brown. There’s no need to fully cook the chicken, as you’re aiming just to give it some color. Transfer to a plate and set aside. 
  2. Saute the onion: Add the onion and pepper to the same skillet and saute for 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent. 
  3. Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes: Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for an additional minute. 
A person adding bulgur wheat and chicken stock to a pot.
  1. Add the bulgur: Add the bulgur and constantly stir for 2-3 minutes as it cooks. 
  2. Add the stock: Pour in the stock and place the seared thighs back in the skillet. Let the bulgur mixture come to a boil. 
  3. Bake: Carefully place the skillet in the preheated oven and bake for 15 minutes or until the internal temperature of one of the thighs registers 165 degrees F. 
  4. Garnish and serve: Remove the skillet from the oven and top with feta cheese (if using) and chopped fresh parsley. Serve. 

How to Serve

If you’re in need of a quick weeknight dinner, you can skip the sides and serve this burghul chicken as a complete meal. The meat adds lots of protein, and the bulgur makes it ultra hearty and filling! If you have the time, I recommend whipping up my Creamy Yoghurt Dill Sauce to drizzle right on top. 

You can also pair this dish with a side salad to add a boost of nutrients. Continue with the Turkish theme by pairing it with a Turkish Bean Salad, or keep things simple and make my Spring Salad Recipe

How to Store, Freeze, Reheat, and Thaw

Once you’ve enjoyed this bulgur chicken recipe for dinner, you can store your leftovers in the fridge for an easy next-day lunch or dinner option. This dish also freezes well, so feel free to make extra to store away for busy weeks ahead. Here are a few tips:

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container with a lid. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the bulgur chicken dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftover bulgur wheat with chicken (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
A chicken and grain dish topped with feta cheese from the top view.

Expert Tips

While this recipe is fairly simple and straightforward, having some helpful tips and tricks in your toolkit can help you achieve restaurant-quality results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Saute the bulgur before adding the stock: It might be tempting to add the bulgur and chicken broth at the same time, but it’s actually important to first saute the burger before adding your liquid. Taking the time to saute the bulgur with the rest of the ingredients ensures that the grain soaks up all those yummy flavors. I also follow this method for my Turkish Bulgur Pilaf, which resembles a bulgur risotto. 
  • Sear until just browned: We’re lightly searing the thighs before allowing them to cook fully in the oven. Most bulgur recipes with chicken recommend this method as well, as it locks in moisture and flavor. Don’t skip this step, as it only takes a few minutes and will definitely pay off in terms of texture and taste.

FAQs

Do I need to pre soak bulgur?

There is no need to pre-soak your bulgur. Bulgur is a fairly thin grain that cooks quickly, so you’ll be able to achieve a fluffy, tender texture without soaking it first.

Do I need to rinse bulgur before cooking?

Rinsing bulgur before cooking isn’t necessary, but it all comes down to personal preference. If you prefer to rinse your bulgur, you can place it in a colander and rinse it with cold water.

Other One-Pot Chicken Recipes You Might Like

One-pot meals are truly life-saving when you’re in need of a yummy, no-fuss dinner that requires minimal cleanup. If you like chicken and bulgur wheat recipes like this one, you’ll also love these other single-skillet meals: 

If you try this One Pot Chicken and Bulgur recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mediterranean Bulgur with Chicken in a skillet from the top view.
Print

Chicken with Bulgur Recipe

Chicken with Bulgur is a Mediterranean-inspired dish that features juicy chicken thighs and fluffy, tender bulgur wheat. This one-pot recipe comes together in under an hour for a quick weeknight dinner or an easy, impressive dinner party entree.
Course Main
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 560kcal

Ingredients

  • 6 chicken thighs skinless bone in
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 medium-size onion chopped (~1 cup)1 bell pepper, chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 1 jar sun-dried tomatoes 8oz. drained and roughly chopped
  • 1 ½ cups bulgur wheat
  • 1 ¾ cups chicken stock
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled (optional)
  • ½ cup chopped parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 F˚.
  • Pat dry chicken thighs on all sides with paper towels. Drizzle them with olive oil.
  • Mix together cumin, paprika, salt and pepper in a small bowl until fully mixed.
  • Sprinkle chicken on all sides using the spice mixture.
  • Heat a large oven-proof skillet over medium heat until it is shimmering hot.
  • Add the now-seasoned thighs and sear for about 4 minutes on each side until they are nicely browned. We are not cooking the meat fully here, but rather just browning it. Transfer onto a plate and set aside.
  • Add the onion and pepper to the now-empty skillet and cook, scraping the chicken bits at the bottom using a wooden spoon for about 7-8 minutes or until the onion is translucent.
  • Stir in the garlic and sun-dried tomatoes and cook for one minute.
  • Add in the bulgur wheat and cook, constantly stirring, for 2-3 minutes.
  • Pour in the stock and transfer the seared chicken back into the skillet. Bring it to a boil.
  • Transfer the skillet to the preheated oven and roast for 15 minutes or until a digital thermometer inserted in one of the thighs registers 165 F˚.
  • Carefully remove from the oven and sprinkle with feta cheese (if using) and chopped parsley. Serve immediately.

Notes

  • Store: Bring leftovers to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Freeze: Bring the dish to room temperature and place it in an airtight, freezer-safe container. Freeze for up to a month. 
  • Reheat: Reheat leftovers in the skillet on the stove. You may need to add a little water or stock to keep it from drying out. Or, reheat it in the microwave for about a minute or two, stirring every 30 seconds or so to ensure that it is heating evenly.
  • Thaw: Thaw the leftovers (from frozen) overnight in the fridge. 
  • It is optional, but you can add a fresh squeeze of lemon juice at the end for a great way to brighten the dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 560kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 216mg | Sodium: 610mg | Potassium: 623mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 426IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/one-pot-chicken-with-cardamom-bulgur/feed/ 18
Sweet Potato Noodles https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/#comments Wed, 28 Sep 2022 01:51:54 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12110 What are Sweet Potato Noodles? Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a…]]>

What are Sweet Potato Noodles?

Sweet potato noodles are a type of “noodle” made from spiralizing sweet potatoes into a shape similar to spaghetti or angel hair pasta. You can buy spiralized sweet potato noodles at the grocery store or make them at home by feeding skinned sweet potatoes through a spiralizer.

A pot of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

The sweet potato spiral noodles we are featuring in this recipe are not the same as Korean sweet potato glass noodles (also known as japchae noodles, Korean potato noodles, and Korean vermicelli potato noodles). Korean sweet potato noodles consist of sweet potato starch and water, whereas my noodles come from whole sweet potatoes.

I use a spiralizer to make the sweet potato spaghetti used in this recipe. However, you can find out below how to make spiralized sweet potato noodles without a spiralizer.

How are they Made?

If you’ve ever wondered, “How are sweet potato noodles made?” you’ll be happy to see that they are super easy to make. Yes, you do need a spiralizer (I use this Paderno Spiralizer – affiliate link), but it is a rather inexpensive one-time investment.

Once you have your equipment ready, spiralizing sweet potatoes requires the following three steps:

A person showing how to peel and cut a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Cut and peel the sweet potatoes: Use a sharp knife to cut off both ends of the sweet potato. Then, peel off the skin using a vegetable peeler. Once peeled, cut the sweet potatoes in half, right down the middle.
  2. Align the sweet potato: Secure your spiralizer on the countertop to keep it from moving (for instance, my spiralizer has suction cups on its bottom to help keep it in place). Take one of your sweet potato halves, line it up with the center prong on your spiralizer, and press it firmly into the prong. Then, press the other end of the spiralizer to secure the sweet potato from both sides.
A person showing how to spiral a sweet potato from the top view.
  1. Spiralize: Once you secure the sweet potato half, spin the side handle of the spiralizer clockwise while applying pressure. Continue turning the handle until you spiralize the entire sweet potato half. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have spiralized all of your sweet potatoes.

What if I Don’t Have a Spiralizer?

If you don’t have a spiralizer, don’t worry! You can also prepare them using a julienne peeler (affiliate link). Just keep in mind that this method will likely require more physical effort. Also, because the noodles will turn out thinner, they will take less time to cook than spiralized vegetable noodles.

To reduce preparation time, you can also buy pre-prepared sweet potato noodles at the grocery store in lieu of using a spiralizer.

Recipe Ingredients

To make this recipe with sweet potato noodles, you’ll need two sets of ingredients:

Ingredients for sauce for sweet potato noodles from the top view.

For the sauce, you’ll need unsweetened, smooth peanut butter, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, maple syrup, freshly grated ginger, minced garlic, fresh lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock.

Ingredients for a bowl of noodles made from sweet potatoes from the top view.

For the noodles, you’ll need olive oil, onion, red or yellow bell pepper, sweet potatoes, vegetable stock, edamame, and fresh cilantro.

You can also garnish them with sesame seeds, green onions, and lightly salted peanuts (roughly chopped).

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

There are countless ways to customize this gluten free sweet potato noodles recipe. These delicious add-ins will take your dish to the next level, from a pop of spice to natural oils.

  • Tamari: I use tamari in my noodle dish to make it gluten-free. However, soy sauce works just as well.
  • Nut butter: Don’t want to use peanut butter in your pasta sauce? Good news: Almond butter makes an excellent substitute for this sweet potato pasta.
  • Oil: I use sesame oil to give my potato and noodles a nutty Asian flavor. However, this recipe also works with light-flavored olive oil or avocado oil.
  • Add mushrooms: Few things amplify the taste of these tender veggie noodles more than earthy, buttery mushrooms. Add shiitake mushrooms to your noodles at the start of the recipe, and the mushrooms will come out beautifully sautéed. Or, add Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms just before serving your dish for extra smoky flavor.
  • Chili paste: Add a zing of sweet-and-spicy flavor by adding one teaspoon of chili paste to your sweet potato spaghetti recipe.

How to Cook?

Cooking sweet potato noodles is a simple, healthy way to treat yourself to full-bodied Asian flavor. You can have this delicious dish from spiralizer to table in just half an hour.

A person showing how to cook noodles made from yams.
  1. Spiralize the sweet potatoes: Trim, peel, and cut your sweet potatoes to prepare them for spiralization. Then, attach the sweet potato halves to your spiralizer, one by one, and turn the handle clockwise until you spiralize each half. Continue spiralizing your sweet potato halves until you have enough noodles.
  2. Mix the dressing: In a small bowl, whisk together the peanut butter, tamari, sesame oil, maple syrup, ginger, minced garlic, lime juice, salt, and vegetable stock. Refrigerate the mixture until you are ready to use it.
  3. Saute the veggies: Heat the olive oil in a large skillet over medium heat. Add the onion and pepper to the skillet and cook them, frequently stirring, until they turn translucent (5-7 minutes).
  4. Cook the noodles: Add the spiralized sweet potatoes and vegetable stock to the skillet. Using a pair of kitchen tongs, cook sweet potato noodles tossing gently every few minutes until they are al dente and lose most of their volume, for 6-7 minutes.
A person adding dressing and toppings to sweet potato spirals.
  1. Add the dressing: Pour the dressing over the noodles and toss the mixture until the noodles have an equal layer of dressing. Cook the coated noodles until they are warm (2-3 minutes).
  2. Stir in the edamame: Take the noodles off the heat, then stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  3. Serve: Divide the noodles among four bowls and garnish each dish with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts. Serve.

How to Make Ahead and Store

Preparing sweet potato zoodles is a great way to fit meal prep into your schedule. Whether you serve this dish at a party or pack it for an easy lunch, these storage tips are just what you need.

  • Make ahead: To make sweet potato noodles ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.

How to Serve?

As the main dish: Whether you serve it warm, at room temperature, or cold, this dish is a delicious lunch or dinner that is perfect when you are in need of a light meal with lots of flavors.

As a tasty side: This recipe also makes a delicious side dish alongside dozens of meat dishes with a similar flavor profile. Serve your vegetable noodles with Chicken Teriyaki Stir Fry or Crock Pot Butter Chicken for a bold and saucy pair. Or, try my Cauliflower Curry or Thai Lemongrass Chicken for meals as vibrant as they are easy.

A bowl of yam noodles with edamame and cilantro from the top view.

FAQs

Where to buy sweet potato noodles?

Most grocery stores sell sweet potato noodles in their refrigerated section, often near other frozen pasta.

Are sweet potato noodles healthy?

Yes! Sweet potato noodles contain high amounts of vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber, making them a popular choice among health-conscious eaters.

What are sweet potato noodles made of?

They consist of peeled sweet potatoes cut into shape using a spiralizer. However, the Korean version of this dish—japchae noodles—is made from sweet potato starch and water.

Is sweet potato noodles carb?

Yes, sweet potato noodles contain carbs. Generally, 1 cup of sweet potato noodles has 23 g. of carbs.

What do sweet potato noodles taste like?

Though incredibly mild, sweet potato noodles have a hint of the sweet, nutty flavor typical among sweet potatoes. They also have a tender, slightly chewy texture that tastes heavenly in pasta dishes.

Other Sweet Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Want even more sweet potatoes on your table? The following recipes are some of the best ways to incorporate this festive (and healthy!) vegetable into your cooking.

If you try this recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of sweet potato noodles garnished with cilantro.
Print

Sweet Potato Noodles Recipe

This easy Sweet Potato Noodles recipe is loaded with Asian-inspired flavors, like ginger, edamame and cilantro, and is tossed in a sweet and savory peanut sauce. Throw this easy dish together for a satisfying lunch or a light, nutritious dinner
Course Main Dish
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 25 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 4 Servings
Calories 291kcal

Ingredients

For the dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons unsweetened and smooth peanut butter
  • 3 tablespoons tamari*
  • 1 teaspoon sesame oil
  • 1 tablespoon maple syrup
  • 1 teaspoon freshly grated ginger
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 3 tablespoons vegetable stock more as needed

For the Noodles:

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 small onion chopped
  • 1 red or yellow bell pepper seeded and sliced thinly
  • 2 medium-size sweet potatoes peeled and spiralized (as seen in the photos) – You should have 5-6 cups of “noodles”
  • ¼ cup vegetable stock
  • ½ cup edamame
  • 3 tablespoons chopped cilantro

As Garnish:

  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 1-2 stalks green onions both white and green parts chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lightly salted peanuts coarsely chopped

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together all the dressing ingredients in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap, and refrigerate until you are ready to use it.
  • To cook the sweet potato noodles: Heat olive oil in a large skillet in medium heat. Add in the onion and pepper. Cook, stirring frequently, until translucent, 5-7 minutes.
  • Add in the sweet potato noodles and vegetable stock and cook, stirring frequently, for 6-7 minutes.
  • Pour the dressing over the noodles and give it a large stir, making sure that the noodles are coated with the dressing. Cook 2-3 minutes until it is warm.
  • Off the heat, stir in the edamame and chopped cilantro.
  • To serve, divide the noodles in 4 bowls and garnish each one with sesame seeds, green onions, and peanuts.
  • Serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • If you are not gluten-sensitive, you can use soy sauce instead of tamari, but make sure to taste the dressing before adding more salt to it. 
  • To Make ahead: To make this dish ahead of time, spiralize your sweet potatoes up to 3-4 days in advance. Just be sure to remove air from the noodles’ container during storage. I recommend storing them in an airtight jar or a Ziploc bag with as much air removed as possible. You can also prepare the dressing up to two days in advance, storing it in an airtight container. Finally, you may also chop your vegetables on the day you plan to serve your noodles dish to eliminate prep time.
  • Store: To store leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2-3 days.
 

Nutrition

Calories: 291kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 1289mg | Potassium: 708mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 17068IU | Vitamin C: 47mg | Calcium: 88mg | Iron: 2mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-noodle-pad-thai/feed/ 44
Thai Steak and Noodle Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/#comments Mon, 15 Aug 2022 16:29:11 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=10156 I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa…]]>

I absolutely adore all of my Asian recipes. Some of the most noteworthy include Thai Butternut Squash Soup, Asian Quinoa Salad, and Thai Beef Curry in Slow Cooker. But I must admit, this easy Thai beef noodle salad tops all of my summer salads.

a close-up of Thai beef noodle salad from the top view

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

I can assure you that you are going to fall in love with this Thai beef salad with noodles upon the first bite. I know you’ll love it because:

  • Crunch, crunch and more crunch. The more texture there is in my salad, the more crave-able they become. This has all the crunch, along with some creamy, too.
  • Balanced and flavorful. It has a little bit of everything – sweet, savory, salty, spicy, sour, and that special umami essence you just can’t put your finger on. And the beef is phenomenal here. It is first soaked in a flavor-packed marinade, then quickly cooked on the grill or stovetop. You will be making this beef noodle salad all summer long!
  • Easy to make ahead. The steak, dressing, and noodles can all be made ahead. This means all that’s left to do is some chopping and tossing come serving time.

Ingredients

The ingredients for this Asian steak noodle salad are broken down into a few parts – steak marinade, salad dressing, noodles, and salad.

ingredients for Asian steak noodle salad from the top view

For the steak marinade, you will need fresh ginger, garlic clove, soy sauce, coconut sugar, fresh lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, toasted sesame oil, NY strip steak, and Kosher salt.

ingredients for the dressing for beef Thai salad from the top view

For the Thai dressing, gather together fresh lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, raw sugar, and honey.

ingredients for steak Thai salad in bowls from the top view

For the noodles and salad, you will need ramen noodles, toasted sesame oil, large mango, arugula, carrots, scallions, savoy cabbage, tomatoes, avocado, cilantro, basil leaves, mint leaves, salted peanuts, and lime wedges.

Substitutions and Helpful Ingredient Notes

  • Soy Free: Replace the soy sauce with an equal amount of coconut aminos or tamari.
  • Sugar: Replace the coconut sugar with light brown sugar for the marinade and use regular granulated sugar in place of the cane sugar for the dressing.
  • Steak: Use your favorite cut of steak, such as NY strip steak, sirloin steaks, Filet Mignon, flank steak, or skirt steak. Note cooking times will vary.
  • Hot Chili Paste: My favorite chile paste is Sambal Oelek, easily found in the global/international food section.
  • Noodles: Replace the ramen with thin rice noodles, like vermicelli or lo mein noodles.
  • Fruit: If mango is unavailable, swap it out for pineapple or mandarin oranges.
  • Greens: Go the Houston’s route and swap out the arugula for watercress instead.
  • Cabbage: If you can’t find savoy cabbage (a bit milder and sweeter), regular green cabbage can be substituted.
  • Tomatoes: Replace the tomato with 1 cup cherry tomatoes.
  • Peanut Free: If you or your friends have a slight aversion to peanuts, crunchy and salted almonds are the next best thing. Sesame seeds are a great sub, as well.

How to Make

Houston’s Thai steak noodle salad recipe takes some prep work and an overnight marinade, but your patience will be rewarded. Here’s how I like to do it:

person showing how to marinate steak for Thai beef salad noodles
  1. Prepare marinade: In a small bowl, whisk together the ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil. Pour into an airtight container with a lid or a large resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade (or a small resealable plastic bag) and give it a gentle toss to ensure all parts of the steak are coated. Seal and let it marinate for 6-12 hours.
  2. Prepare steak: Remove the steak from the marinade and place it onto a large plate lined with paper towels. Pat dry with another paper towel to remove the excess liquid. Discard marinade. Season with salt on both sides.
  3. Grill steak: Preheat a gas grill to 450 degrees Fahrenheit. Grill, flipping the steak a few times during cooking until lightly charred on both sides. Check for doneness by inserting a thermometer (affiliate link) into the thickest part of the steak. Pull it off when it registers 120 degrees Fahrenheit for medium-rare or 130 degrees Fahrenheit for medium, depending on your desired degree. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Once off the grill, tent with aluminum foil. Allow it to rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Then, slice into 1-inch thick slices or cubes right before serving.
person showing how to make dressing and noodles for Thai steak salad recipe
  1. Make the salad dressing: In a small bowl or mason jar, whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, fish sauce, sugar, and honey. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed.
  2. Cook noodles: Bring a small pot of water to a boil. Cook noodles for 3 minutes, or according to package directions. Drain and transfer to a large salad bowl. Drizzle with the sesame oil and give it a gentle toss to coat.
person showing how to make salad for steak noodle salad
  1. Assemble salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, finely shredded savoy cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle with the dressing and toss to combine. Finish with the sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss and divide amongst four plates. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

What to Serve it With?

This Thai steak salad recipe needs nothing more than some company to share it with. Serve it as:

How to Store

This beef Thai salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

Thai beef salad with noodles on a plate from the top view

Expert Tips

  • Marinate the steak the night before. The steak can sit in the marinade for up to 12 hours without it affecting the texture.
  • Prepare steak, dressing, and noodles up to 2 days in advance. Grill the steak, mix the dressing, and boil the noodles. Store each in their own airtight container in the fridge. This salad (including the meat) can be served at room temperature. However, if you prefer, you can lightly warm up the grilled meat before assembling the salad.
  • Use a stovetop grill pan. Grill the steak on an indoor grill pan or cast-iron skillet instead.

Other Thai Cuisine Recipes You’ll Enjoy:

If you try this Thai Steak and Noodle Salad recipe or any other beef recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

This recipe is adapted from Bon Appetit’s Thai Steak Noodle Recipe.

Houston's Thai Steak Salad in an oval plate from the top view
Print

Thai Steak and Noodle Salad Recipe

This Thai Steak and Noodle Salad is colorful, refreshing, and bursting with all the Asian flavors you love. This Houston's copycat summer salad combines a fresh herb and veggie base with sweet-spicy Thai dressing and perfectly marinated steak. Serve it as a complete meal next time you're craving Thai cuisine!
Course Salad
Cuisine Thai Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Marinading time 6 hours
Total Time 6 hours 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 981kcal

Ingredients

For The Steak Marinade:

  • 1 tablespoon grated fresh ginger from a 1 inch piece ginger
  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • ¼ cup soy sauce
  • 3 tablespoons coconut sugar or light brown sugar
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lime juice
  • 1 tablespoon fish sauce
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon toasted sesame oil
  • 1 pound New York Strip Steak or Filet Mignon Steak – 1 inch thick
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Salad Dressing:

  • ¼ cup fresh lime juice
  • ¼ cup hot chili paste such as sambal oelek
  • ¼ cup avocado oil or any other tasteless vegetable oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons fish sauce
  • 2 tablespoons cane sugar or granulated sugar
  • 1 tablespoon honey

For The Noodles:

  • 2 oz. dried ramen noodles seasoning package discarded
  • ½ teaspoon toasted sesame oil

For The Salad:

  • 1 ripe mango peeled, cut into 1-inch cubes
  • 1 cup arugula washed and rinsed
  • 2 carrots peeled and shredded
  • 2 green onions sliced thinly
  • 2 cups savoy cabbage sliced thinly – or green cabbage
  • 1 cup chopped tomatoes from 1 large tomato
  • 1 ripe avocado cut into cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • ½ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ cup fresh mint leaves torn
  • ½ cup salted peanuts roughly chopped
  • Lime wedges for serving on the side

Instructions

  • To make the marinade: Whisk together ginger, garlic, soy sauce, sugar, lime juice, fish sauce, black pepper, olive oil, and toasted sesame oil in a bowl. Transfer it to an airtight container with a lid or pour it into a resealable plastic bag. Place the steak in the marinade, seal, and let it marinate for at least 6 hours or up to 12 hours.
  • When you are ready to cook the meat, remove it from the marinade onto a large plate lined with paper towels and pat dry to remove the excess liquid. Season lightly with ¼ teaspoon kosher salt.
  • To cook the steak: Preheat a gas grill* to 450 degrees. Grill, turning a few times until lightly charred on both sides and a thermometer inserted in the thickest part of the steak registers 120 degrees F for medium-rare or 130 degrees F for medium. This takes about 9-11 minutes in total. Cover it with aluminum foil, and let it rest on a cutting board for 10 minutes. Cut it into 1-inch pieces right before serving the salad.
  • To make the salad dressing: Whisk together lime juice, hot chili paste, avocado oil, garlic, fish sauce, sugar, and honey in a bowl. Give it a taste and add more salt if needed. Set it aside.
  • To cook the noodles: Cook noodles in a small pot of boiling water for 3 minutes. Drain and transfer to a large bowl. Drizzle with sesame oil and give it a toss.
  • To assemble the salad: Place the mango, arugula, shredded carrots, scallions, cabbage, and tomatoes in the bowl with the noodles. Drizzle it with the prepared dressing. Give it a gentle toss to combine.
  • Add sliced steak, avocado, fresh cilantro, basil, mint, and peanuts. Gently toss to combine.
  • Divide amongst four plates and serve with wedges of lime on the side.

Notes

  • *You can cook the steak on the stovetop in a grill pan or cast-iron skillet.
  • Storing leftovers: This salad will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. After the 2-day mark, the vegetables break down and become mushy.

Nutrition

Calories: 981kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 37g | Fat: 68g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 39g | Cholesterol: 91mg | Sodium: 2535mg | Potassium: 1558mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 7623IU | Vitamin C: 82mg | Calcium: 168mg | Iron: 5mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thai-grilled-beef-and-herb-salad/feed/ 19
Mexican Pickled Onions https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/ https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/#comments Tue, 09 Aug 2022 15:02:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7571 This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad…]]>

This quick and easy topping adds bright flavor and a gorgeous pink color to any recipe, from Mexican Corn Salad to quesadillas to Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even use Mexican onions for tacos, giving you dozens of Mexican party food ideas. Take your Flank Steak Tacos, Brisket Tacos, and Black Bean Quinoa Tacos to the next level with one easy recipe. 

Love red onions as a condiment? Also, check out our Roasted Red Onions recipe!

Mexican pickled red onions in a jar with a fork from the top view

Ingredients

For this Mexican pickled onion recipe, you’ll need one large red onion, boiling hot water, fresh lime juice, apple cider vinegar, and kosher salt.

ingredients for the recipe

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins

When it comes to add-ins, these red pickled onions make Mexican cuisine an adventure. Choose a few of your favorite ingredients from this tasty list for a flavor experience perfectly suited to your taste buds.

optional add-in ingredients for pickled purple onions
  • Add some spice: Turn up the heat at your Mexican potluck by making a batch of quick pickled red onions with jalapenos. Just be sure to slice your jalapeno peppers thinly before adding them to the pickling jar. Or, add a pinch of red pepper flakes to the mix for another spicy solution. 
  • Make it sweeter: Mexican pickled onions are known for their sharp, tangy flavor. Now you can balance this robust condiment with a touch of sweetness by adding just a teaspoon of honey, maple syrup, or granulated sugar. 
  • Add seasoning: Want to make this Mexican pickled red onion recipe even more flavorful? Then, additional seasoning is just what you need! Thinly sliced garlic clove and allspice berries will give your onions a potent edge, while cumin seeds and whole black peppercorns are perfect for a rich and earthy taste. You can even add bay leaves or dried oregano (or Mexican oregano, if you can get your hands on it) for bold herby notes.
  • White onions: Not a fan of red onions? No problem! Though I love red onions for their brilliant color and sweet taste, white or yellow onions will also work in this easy recipe.
  • Vinegar: Though I use apple cider vinegar in my Mexican red onions, red wine vinegar or distilled white vinegar will also work.
  • Lemon juice: If you don’t want to make your Mexican pickled red onions with lime juice, fresh lemon juice works as a tart and tasty substitute.

How to Make Pickled Red Onions for Tacos

Mexican-style pickled red onions are a cinch to make and even better to eat. One small batch of this pickled red onion recipe, and you’ll want it for all your Mexican meals.

person making Spanish pickled onions
  1. Prep the onions: Place the sliced red onion in a colander, set the colander in a bowl, and set aside. Pour two cups of boiling water atop the sliced onions and gently press with a spoon. 
  2. Soak: Be sure to submerge all of the onion slices in the water. Let them soak for 45 seconds and drain.
  3. Add ingredients to the jar: Transfer the onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Then, pour the fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions, and add the salt. Using a fork, make sure to push them down so that they are submerged in the liquid as much as possible.
  4. Add additional ingredients: If you’re using any optional add-ins, put them into the jar.
person shaking a jar of marinated red onions for tacos
  1. Shake the ingredients: Close the lid over the jar and give it a good shake.
  2. Refrigerate the jar: Place the closed jar in the fridge and let it sit for a minimum of two hours.
  3. Serve: Serve the pickled Mexican onions as a condiment or garnish with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes.

How to Store

To store leftover Mexican pickled red onions, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. However, keep in mind that the more things you add in, the higher the potential of spoilage.

How to Use These Lime Pickled Onions

These authentic Mexican pickled red onions (aka Escabeche Onions)  are a godsend when it comes to garnishing any of your meat or vegetable dishes. And guess what? They are not just for Mexican cooking! They can also be served with dishes from Cuban, Dominican, and even Spanish cuisine.

Needless to say, you can use this versatile condiment anywhere you use red onions, from tasty tacos to garden-fresh salads. Below are a few dishes from the archives to get you started:

Your Favorite Tacos & Quesadillas

These red pickled onions are mostly served for street tacos in Mexico, so it is a no-brainer to serve them with your favorite tacos in your home as well. 

For a savory, protein-filled meal, add your onions to Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos (hello, meat-lovers!). Use it as a topping for your Salmon Avocado Toast. You can also serve vegetarian or pescatarian dishes by adding your pickled purple onion to a Spinach Quesadilla, fish tacos, or Black Bean Quinoa Tacos.

Chilis & Grain Bowls 

Who can resist a bold and hearty bowl of authentic Mexican chili? Not me! You can add authentic Mexican pickled onions to rich and savory recipes, like Quinoa Chili, Chocolate Chili, and my fan-favorite Mexican Quinoa Bowl. Pink onions are also a great condiment in vegan recipes and surely a perfect match for my Vegan Chili and Burrito Bowl.

Salads

This quick recipe makes a delicious addition to dozens of your favorite Mexican dishes, from spicy Mexican Corn Salad to fresh Mexican Street Corn Salad with Pasta. You can even add this simple recipe to dishes beyond Mexican food, like my creamy, crowd-pleasing Potato Salad with Capers.

a jar of Qdoba pickled red onions recipe from the side view

Expert Tips

You don’t have to live south of the border to learn how to make pickled onions Mexican style. These tasty tips will have you preparing these delicious marinated onions any day of the week.

  • Use the freshest onions you can get your hands on: When making this lime pickled red onions recipe, make sure your onions are super fresh. Not only will they taste fresher, but they will also have a brighter color and more intense flavor.
  • Slice your onions thinly: Even thin onion slices make the best pickled onions. For best results, use a sharp chef’s knife, or a mandoline (affiliate link), if you have one.
  • Do not skip the 45-second soaking: I learned this trick from Rick Bayless’ cookbook, Mexican Kitchen (affiliate link). While it might seem like an extra step, soaking raw onions for a short amount of time helps with softening their flavor and pungent taste. 
  • Pickled purple onions lose volume as they sit: Don’t be worried if your onion slices seem to overflow in their jar, especially at the beginning. They lose volume as they marinate in the acid, so feel free to push them down until they fit. If your onions still don’t fit, feel free to split them into two jars instead.
  • Use a glass container with a tight-fitting lid: Glass containers with tight lids—such as a pint-sized jar such as a mason jar (affiliate link) with a wide mouth or a large jar such as this Weck Canning Jar (affiliate link) —are your best options.
  • Use the pickle juice in salad dressings: Don’t throw away the pickle brine, as the leftover tangy juice makes for a great addition to any of your salad dressings.

FAQs

How long do pickled red onions last?

Mexican pickled red onion will last 2 weeks when stored in an airtight container in the fridge.

How to make pickled onions very quickly?

 To make quick pickled onions for tacos, use lime juice—also referred to as “Mexican vinegar”—as your pickling base. When you make pickled onion in lime, the citrus juice will break down your onions in less time than other pickling ingredients.

Other Recipes You Can Make with Red Onions:

Wondering what else you can do with red onions? Here are a few of my favorite recipes to help you use them:

If you try this Mexican Pickled Onions recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

red onions pickled in lime juice in a jar with fork pulling out some
Print

Mexican Pickled Onions Recipe

These easy Mexican Pickled Onions add a punch of tangy flavor and a burst of bold color to all your favorite Mexican recipes. This 4-ingredient recipe is super quick to make and adds the perfect finishing touch to tacos, salads, chilis, and more!
Course Garnish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 2 hours
Total Time 2 hours 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 96kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 large red onion sliced thinly (approximately 1 ½ cup sliced onion)
  • 2 cups boiling hot water
  • ¾ cup fresh lime juice*
  • 2 tablespoons apple cider vinegar red wine vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt

Optional Add Ins:

  • 1 garlic clove sliced thinly (⅛ inch thick slices)
  • ½ small jalapeno slice thinly – remove seeds if you like
  • ¼ teaspoon cumin seeds
  • ¼ whole black peppercorns
  • 1 teaspoon honey maple syrup or granulated sugar
  • 1 bay leaf
  • ¼ teaspoon oregano Mexican oregano if you can get your hands on
  • ½ teaspoon all spice berries
  • Pinch of red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Place red onion slices in a colander set in a bowl. Pour 2 cups of boiling water over the onion. Gently press with a spoon to make sure that the onions are fully submerged in water. Let it sit for 45 seconds.
  • Transfer the now-drained onion slices to a jar with a tight-fitting lid. Pour fresh lime juice and apple cider vinegar over the onions. Add in the salt.
  • If you are using any of the optional add-ins, go ahead and add them in.
  • Put the lid on and shake until everything is fully combined.
  • Place it in the fridge and let it sit for at least 2 hours.
  • Serve with your favorite taco, salad, or grain bowl recipes as garnish.

Video

Notes

  • Lime juice: I highly recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice here, but in a pinch, you can also use store-bought lime juice.
  • Storage: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 weeks. 
  • They lose volume as they sit in lime juice and vinegar mixture: When you are first placing them in the jar it might feel like you have a lot, but keep in mind that as they sit in the acidic brine juice, they lose some of their volume.
  • Weck Jars or Pint Size Mason Jars are ideal: I use Weck jars for pickling (as you see in the photos), but pint-sized Mason Jars are also ideal. Just make sure that they have a large mouth and a tight-fitting lid.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 96kcal | Carbohydrates: 26g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 2359mg | Potassium: 395mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 93IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/pickled-red-onions/feed/ 16
Thai Quinoa Salad https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/ https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/#comments Mon, 08 Aug 2022 17:15:23 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=36630 If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads…]]>

If you have been following me for a while, you know that I am a huge fan of quinoa salads and make them often. I know you like them too because my Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, Avocado Quinoa Salad, Quinoa and Kale Salad, Quinoa Black Bean Avocado Salad, and Butternut Squash Quinoa Salad recipes are some of the most popular recipes on Foolproof Living.

This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe, packed with good-for-you and colorful veggies and a delicious peanut sauce, is the newest addition to the collection.

Thai Quinoa Salad in a bowl garnished with peanuts and cilantro with a spoon

This crunchy Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is made with my all-time favorite creamy vegan Thai salad dressing, Sesame Ginger Dressing, fluffy quinoa, and fresh veggies. In my humble opinion, this hearty salad is addictive, but in a good way. Packed with a ton of everyday vegetables and topped off with roasted nuts (including but not limited to cashews, almonds, and peanuts), it is wholesome, vegan, and gluten-free.

What is in This Recipe?

As in most salad recipes, this easy Thai vegan quinoa salad has 2 sets of ingredients; The salad dressing and the salad ingredients.

Thai-Style Peanut butter dressing with a whisk in a jar
  1. Asian Sesame Ginger Dressing: For the dressing ingredients, you will need creamy peanut butter (or almond butter would also work), maple syrup, rice vinegar, tamari (or soy sauce), sesame oil, fresh garlic, fresh ginger and chili pepper sauce (like Sriracha or sambal oelek). If you need information on making ahead or storing this dressing recipe, be sure to check out my recipe post on how to make sesame ginger dressing.
Ingredients for Thai Crunch salad on a marble backdrop
  1. Salad Ingredients: In terms of the salad ingredients, you will need 3 cups of cooked quinoa, purple cabbage, carrots, red bell peppers, scallions, cucumbers, edamame, cilantro (optional), and roasted nuts like O Organics Cashews, Peanuts, and Almonds (for extra crunch).

Substitutions and Helpful Notes For The Ingredients:

  • Red Cabbage: As I mentioned in my No Mayo Coleslaw and Greek Yogurt Coleslaw recipes, the secret to making cabbage salads work is to slice the cabbage as thinly as you can. This Thai cabbage salad is no different. Because doing so allows the cabbage to soften as soon as it is mixed with the salad dressing and turns it into a soft yet still crunchy salad ingredient. If you do not have purple cabbage, you can use green cabbage instead.
  • Green Onion: Scallions are a classic for any salad, but you can also use thinly sliced red onion.
  • Shelled edamame: I consider edamame a staple ingredient for any of my Asian-style salad recipes (i.e. Asian Chicken Salad recipe). However, if you cannot get your hands on it, you can use sugar snap peas instead or omit them altogether.
  • Quinoa: I used 3 cups of cooked tricolor quinoa, but any type of quinoa (tricolor, white, and red quinoa) would work in this recipe. I usually cook quinoa in bulk and freeze it to have it on hand fast.
  • Use almond Butter instead of peanut butter: You can use almond butter and peanut butter interchangeably in this recipe. I love using Open Nature’s almond or peanut butter as it is made with nothing but nuts and a bit of sea salt. Not to mention it is super creamy.
  • Lime Juice: Don’t have rice vinegar? In a pinch, you can use an equal amount of freshly squeezed lime juice or apple cider vinegar instead.

How To Make?

  1. Cook the quinoa: I believe that the best way to make quinoa taste good is to cook it in the vegetable broth after rinsing it. I cooked my quinoa in a pressure cooker (in my instant pot), but you can cook it in a rice cooker, microwave or on the stovetop as well.
Person whisking vegan spicy peanut dressing
  1. Make the Thai Peanut dressing: While the quinoa cooks, make the dressing. Place all salad dressing ingredients in a jar (or a small bowl) and give it a whisk until it is creamy.
  2. Assemble the salad: Place the now-cooked quinoa in a large salad bowl and top it off with all the chopped veggies.
How to make Thai Style Quinoa Salad shown in 4 photos in a collage
  1. Drizzle it with the dressing: Pour the spicy peanut dressing over the salad and give it a gentle toss.
  2. Garnish & Serve: Top it off with chopped O Organics organic roasted almonds and cashews with sea salt (for extra crunch) and chopped fresh cilantro (optional).

What to serve it with?

This crunchy Thai quinoa salad is a meal-worthy salad that you can serve by itself. However, I also love to serve it as a vegetable side dish with my Thai Lemongrass Chicken or Orange Ginger Chicken.

Additionally, if you are serving it during the BBQ season, you can easily pair it with Grilled Mahi Mahi or Grilled Shrimp Skewers for a healthy meal that is guaranteed to impress.

A bowl crunchy Thai quinoa salad in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Make Ahead & Storage:

Can I make it ahead, you ask? You sure can. As a matter of fact, this Asian Quinoa Salad recipe is one of my favorite meal prep lunches. Simply store it in individual airtight containers in the fridge and enjoy it throughout the week.

If you decide to do so, I highly recommend storing the dressing separately and tossing it with the salad right before serving it.

And if you end up with leftovers of this quinoa cabbage salad, simply store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 

A Few Helpful Tips & Variations:

  • Taste for seasoning: I highly recommend giving a taste to the salad before serving it. I used a minimal amount of tamari sauce in the recipe below to make it work for everyone. However, as someone who is addicted to salt, I use almost double the amount of tamari when I make this salad for us.
  • Turn it into a Thai Chicken Quinoa Salad: If I am serving this for my meat-loving husband, I usually bake split chicken breasts or air fryer chicken legs, cut (or shred) them into cubes, and incorporate them into the salad.

FAQs

What is Thai Quinoa Salad?

Thai Quinoa Salad is an Asian-styled salad made with crunchy vegetables like cabbage, bell peppers, and cucumbers, and drizzled with a spicy peanut sauce that is flavored with ginger, garlic, and sesame oil.

Is quinoa salad eaten hot or cold?

One of my favorite things about this Thai quinoa recipe is that it can be served warm, room temperature, or cold. If I am serving it as a main dish, I usually serve it warm. I love that the freshly cooked and still warm quinoa absorbs the dressing right away and makes it incredibly delicious and creamy. However, it makes a great salad when served cold as well, which is why I usually make it a part of my weekly meal prep and store it in individual containers.

Check Out These Products and More in Shaw’s:

There you have it friends, a Thai-style crunchy quinoa salad recipe that you can make all year round. I love shopping at our local Shaw’s and appreciate that they have a great collection of organic ingredients that I can use in my everyday cooking. If there is one in your area, be sure to check out their products.

Vegan quinoa salad garnished with nuts and cilantro served in bowls from the top view

Other Quinoa Recipes You Might Like:

If you liked this easy quinoa salad recipe, I suspect that you are like me; a fan of quinoa salads and include it in your weekly meal prep.

If you try this Thai Quinoa Salad recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Crunch Thai quinoa salad from the top view with a spoon on the side
Print

Thai Quinoa Salad Recipe

This Thai Quinoa Salad recipe is my go-to weekday lunch. It is easy and quick to make, naturally vegan and gluten free. Packed with crunchy veggies like carrots, cabbage, and cucumber and tossed with a peanut butter/almond butter dressing, it is guaranteed to impress.
Course Salad
Cuisine Asian Cuisine, Thai
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 395kcal

Ingredients

For The Peanut Butter Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons Open Nature® almond or peanut butter* (unsweetened/unsalted)
  • 2 tablespoons maple syrup or honey
  • 1/4 cup rice vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons tamari or soy sauce
  • 2 teaspoons toasted sesame oil
  • 1 clove of garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon fresh ginger grated
  • 1 teaspoon chili pepper sauce I used Sriracha – optional
  • 1/4 teaspoon coarse sea salt

For The Salad:

  • 3 cups cooked quinoa warm or cold
  • 3 small carrots peeled and shredded
  • 1 cup red cabbage sliced thinly
  • 1 red bell pepper chopped
  • 5 stalks of scallions sliced thinly (both green and white parts)
  • 2 Persian cucumbers peeled and cut into small pieces
  • 1 cup edamame or sugar snap peas
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro chopped
  • 1 cup roasted and lightly salted nuts chopped ( I used cashews and almonds)

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Place all the ingredients in a jar and whisk until emulsified.
  • To make the salad: Place the quinoa, carrots, cabbage, bell pepper, scallions, cucumber, edamame, and cilantro in a large salad bowl.
  • Drizzle the dressing over the salad. Give it a toss. Garnish with cashews and almonds. Serve.

Video

Notes

  • Make Ahead: This salad is one of my favorite meal prep lunches because it stores well. Simply make the salad and dressing. Place the salad ingredients in individual meal prep bowls and store them with the dressing on the side. When ready to serve, drizzle it with the dressing and toss.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge. When ready to serve, give it a mix, give it a taste, and season with salt, if necessary.

Nutrition

Calories: 395kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 494mg | Potassium: 770mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 6091IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 95mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/thai-quinoa-salad/feed/ 12
Air Fryer Elotes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/#respond Sun, 31 Jul 2022 13:26:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57299 Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic,…]]>

Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic, charred corn flavor; it will be ready and on the table in 15 minutes. 

Love the flavors of elotes? Also, try our Elote Dip and Mexican Street Corn Soup recipes.

air fryer Mexican street corn on a plate from the top view

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

This elote recipe is the air fryer version of my fan favorite Mexican Street Corn, one of my most popular recipes. It is the perfect side dish or a quick snack to make when you are short on time. If that’s not reason enough, I have listed a few more below:

  • A great alternative to grilling: Mexican street corn in the air fryer is perfect for you if you don’t have a grill. You still get that excellent, charred corn taste without all the mess of grilling.  And since you can fire up the air fryer no matter the weather, every day can be Cinco de Mayo. 
  • Ready in 20 minutes: You will be stunned at how fast you can whip together this authentic Mexican corn on the cob in the air fryer. 20 minutes is all you need from start to finish.

Ingredients

Using the freshest corn on the cob and a few simple ingredients are all you need to make this melt-in-your-mouth air fryer street corn.

air fryer Mexican corn ingredients

Let’s start by gathering your fresh sweet corn (fully husked) and vegetable oil for cooking. For your elote sauce, you will need mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder. And lastly, Mexican cotija cheese and fresh cilantro for your garnish.

Substitutions & Variations

If you are missing some ingredients or want to experiment a little, no worries; I’ve listed a few of the most common substitutions and variations below. Feel free to make this recipe your own.

  • Mexican Crema: If you are lucky enough to get your hands on some authentic Mexican crema, you are in for a treat. A cross between American sour cream and French crème fraiche, Mexican crema is thick and tangy, the perfect addition to Mexican fare, and a great alternative to air fryer corn on the cob with mayo and sour cream-based elote sauce. Simply omit mayo and sour cream and use ½ cup Mexican crema instead.
  • Cheese: Have everything you need but the cotija cheese, don’t panic; you can substitute parmesan cheese and even feta cheese (though I would recommend using low sodium feta) and still end up with excellent results.
  • Elote Seasoning: If you have access to Trader Joe’s, their elote seasoning is worth trying in this recipe.
  • Lemon juice:  If you don’t have any lime juice and are in a pinch, feel free to use some lemon juice in its place.
  • Spice it up: If you enjoy spicy flavors, you can increase the heat by adding more chili powder or cayenne pepper.
  • Frozen corn on the cob: You can use frozen corn to make Mexican fried corn on the cob when fresh is no longer available. You can find the instructions to use frozen corn in the recipe card below.
  • Not a fan of cilantro: You either love it or hate it. If you don’t care for it, omit the cilantro. 

How To Make Air Fryer Street Corn

If you find yourself with an abundance of fresh sweet corn and a craving for Mexican food, this air fryer Mexican street corn recipe is exactly what you need. Follow my step-by-step instructions below for quick and delicious elotes.

Be sure to preheat your air fryer to 380° F.

person making street corn in air fryer
  1. Prep corn: While you wait for your air fryer to preheat, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil (or olive oil). 
  2. Air Fry corn: Once your fryer is ready, place ears of corn in a single layer in the air fryer basket and cook for 5-6 minutes.
  3. Make your elote sauce: While your corn is cooking, assemble your sauce by gently mixing your mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a small bowl. 
  4. Rotate corn: Check your corn and rotate the ears to ensure even cooking. Fry for another 7-8 minutes (a total of 12-15 min of air frying time). 
person adding toppings to Mexican corn
  1. Apply sauce and serve: Carefully remove hot ears of corn from the fryer basket and allow to cool. After a few moments, cover each air fried corn generously with Mexican street corn sauce. Sprinkle all sides with Mexican cotija cheese, extra chili powder (if you wish), freshly chopped cilantro, and garnish with lime wedges. Enjoy!

How To Serve

On the cob or off the cob? That is the question. Fortunately, this recipe is a hit either way; I have listed some options for you to try below, let me know your favorite form of serving it.

  • As a snack by itself: My favorite way of eating air fryer Mexican corn on the cob is right from the air fryer and smothered in tangy Mexican flavored sauce; the mixture of hot charred corn and the kick of creamy sauce is pure perfection.
  • Elote in a cup: This is an excellent alternative to eating it on the cob. For elote in a cup, you will slice the charred kernels from the corn cobs and gently mix them in a small bowl with the prepared street corn sauce. For an elegant touch, spoon the corn mixture into glass cups, top with cheese and seasonings, and garnish with lime wedges for a perfect dinner party appetizer.

How To Store

This Mexican street corn air fryer recipe is so scrumptious that it will be hard not to eat it all at once; if you find yourself with some leftovers, below are some instructions for storage.

  • Storage: You can store your delicious corn leftovers in an airtight container. If your street corn is already assembled, it will be good for up to one day in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.
air fryer street corn with toppings from the side view

Expert Tips

Is this your first time making air fryer elote? Here are some helpful tips that will guarantee perfect results on your first try:

  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket.
  • Do not overcrowd your fryer basket: To get the best possible char on each ear of corn, you want to be sure to place corn in a single layer.
  • You can use frozen corn: If you don’t have fresh corn on hand, you can make frozen corn elote. My method requires only 5 minutes of additional (hands off time) and requires no thawing. Instructions and cooking time are included in the recipe card below.
  • Use a flat platter for prep: Mixing your sauce ingredients on a flat platter or a large plate and then rolling your ears of corn through the mayonnaise mixture may help you get a more even sauce coverage. Finish each ear with a sprinkle of chili powder, cheese, and cilantro.
  • Extra Salt: Be sure to taste your Cotija cheese before adding salt to the elote sauce, as some Cotija cheese brands can be very salty.
  • Want to make it dairy free? Here is a recipe for Dairy-Free Mexican Street Corn Sauce you can use should you prefer it to have no dairy.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Air Fryer Mexican Corn recipe or any other Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

air fryer elotes on a plate with toppings from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Elotes Recipe

These Air Fryer Elotes are perfectly seasoned, roasted to perfection, and topped with a creamy homemade elote sauce and plenty of cheese and cilantro. Serve this take on Mexican Street Corn as a quick appetizer or side dish for a weeknight dinner or your next fiesta. With only a few ingredients, you can throw these together in 20 minutes!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 5
Calories 213kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn On The Cob

  • 5 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil or melted butter

For The Street Corn Sauce

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • ¼ cup sour cream
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice plus wedges of lime for serving
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder plus more to sprinkle over at the end
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese*
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process. Let it cool for a few minutes before spreading it with the sauce.
  • Meanwhile, make the sauce by mixing together mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a bowl.
  • When ready to serve, brush each corn on the cob with a generous amount of the mayo mixture. Sprinkle each corn with cotija cheese and chopped fresh cilantro on all sides. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Additional Salt: Be sure to taste the cotija cheese you are using before adding salt to the salt. Some cotija cheese is very salty. If it is not, then you can add in ½ teaspoon salt and adjust it accordingly after giving it a taste.
  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket. However, be sure not to overcrowd the basket to get proper charring.
  • Times may vary: It is a known fact that air fryer cooking times may vary. Take the cooking time here as a place to start and adjust accordingly. One easy way to gauge the process is to check halfway through the frying process. If it is getting too charred, then shorten the cooking time. Or visa versa.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to one day. 
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 255mg | Potassium: 275mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 380IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/feed/ 0
Avocado Bacon Burger https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/ https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/#comments Wed, 13 Jul 2022 16:13:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=12004 If you think that nothing beats a homemade burger be sure to also try our Ground Lamb Burgers with Tzatziki…]]>

If you think that nothing beats a homemade burger be sure to also try our Ground Lamb Burgers with Tzatziki and Bulgur Wheat Burgers.

Avocado bacon burger from the front view.

Ingredients

To make this bacon avocado cheeseburger recipe, you will need three sets of ingredients:

ingredients for guac and turkey bacon from the top view
  1. To make the 4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe, you will need garlic, lime juice, kosher salt, and ripe avocados.
  2. For the turkey bacon, you will need one 8-oz. package of turkey bacon. You can choose to make your turkey bacon in an air fryer or the oven.
ingredients for guac bacon burger from the top view
  1. For the burger patties, gather organic ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, kosher salt, black pepper, vegetable oil, burger buns, and lettuce leaves. You can also choose to add sliced cheddar cheese.

Substitutions

  • Bacon: I top my guacamole burger with turkey bacon, but you can also use traditional pork bacon. For an expert guide to cooking strips of bacon, check out this recipe for perfectly crisp Oven-Baked Bacon.
  • Avocados: Don’t want to spend extra time preparing burger toppings? Skip the guac and top your burgers with avocado slices or mashed avocados. Placing avocado on a burger will give it a rich, creamy flavor without the extra hassle.
  • Hamburger buns: I use my Homemade Brioche Buns in this beef avocado burger recipe, but you can also use store-bought buns to cut down on prep time. If you are following a gluten-free diet, be sure to get gluten-free buns. You can also make the famous Whataburger Avocado Bacon Burger recipe using Texas Toast.
  • Cheese: Though I top my guacamole bacon burger with cheddar cheese, you can use any cheese you like. American cheese, pepper jack cheese, Swiss cheese—the sky’s the limit! Or, if you don’t want to overdo your avocado burger topping, you can omit the cheese altogether.

How to Make This Recipe?

Follow the simple steps below for bbq avocado burgers that are just as delicious as any famous restaurant burger you can buy:

Make the Patties

  1. Prepare the pan: Line a small sheet pan with parchment paper and set it aside.
person showing how to prepare beef patties
  1. Mix the ground beef: Add ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper to a large bowl. Mix the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Divide the meat mixture into four equal portions.
  2. Shape burger patties: Flatten each piece into a burger patty roughly ¾-inch thick and three inches in diameter. 
person showing how to make an indentation in the middle of a beef pattie
  1. Make an indentation in the middle: Use a small, flat-bottomed ramekin to make an indentation* in the center of each patty. (*See expert tips below for more information as to why we are doing this)
  2. Transfer the patties: Move the patties to the prepared baking sheet. Cover them with plastic wrap and freeze for 30 minutes before grilling.

Cook the Turkey Bacon

steps for baking turkey bacon on a wire rack
  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Then, line the turkey bacon slices on the wire rack or a parchment paper-lined baking sheet with none of the strips overlapping. 
  2. Cook the bacon: Bake the turkey bacon slices in the oven for ten minutes before removing them, flipping them, and baking them for another five minutes. Once cooked, set the bacon aside.

Make the Guacamole

person showing how to make guacamole in a collage of images
  1. Prep the ingredients: In a large bowl, mix the garlic, lime juice, and salt. Halve the ripe avocados, scoop them out, and place them into the same bowl.
  2. Mix everything together: Use a fork or potato masher to mash the avocados until they reach your desired level of creaminess. Taste the mixture and add seasoning if necessary.

Get the Grill On

a collage of images showing how to grill burgers
  1. Prepare the grill: Preheat a gas grill to 400 degrees F (medium-high heat). Once heated, dip a wad of paper towels into vegetable oils and wipe the grates.
  2. Grill the patties: Place the ground beef on the grill for 4-5 minutes. Then, flip the patties and cook for another four minutes, or until the center of each registers your desired temperature. The internal temperature should read 125 degrees F. for medium-rare,  130 degrees F. for medium, and 155-160 for well done (source)*.
  3. Add the cheese: When done, move the beef patties off the direct heat, top each with a slice of cheese, and let the residual heat melt the cheese (45-60 seconds). Transfer the finished patties to a plate and cover them with aluminum foil. Let the beef rest for five minutes. You may also lightly toast your burger buns on the grill for 1-2 minutes while the burgers rest.

PRO TIP: If you choose not to grill your bacon avocado burger as described above, you can cook your patties on a grill pan or in a skillet.

Assemble the Bacon Avocado Cheeseburgers

showing how to make an avocado bacon burger in a collage of images with all the layers

Assemble the bacon guacamole burger: Place the bottom bun on a plate. Layer the hamburger with avocado, a tomato slice, a cooked patty, two slices of bacon, and a lettuce leaf.

Finish the burger stack with the top bun. Then, repeat this assembly process with the remaining burgers and serve.

How to Make Ahead & Store Leftovers

One bite of this bacon avocado burger recipe, and you won’t dare let another go to waste. Now you can whip up juicy burgers in a snap and store them like a pro—all with one simple guide.

  • Make ahead: To make this burger recipe ahead of time, prepare your guacamole, turkey bacon, and ground beef mixture, and store each in a separate airtight container. Keep these ingredients in the fridge for up to one day, and only move your hamburger patties to the freezer 30 minutes before grilling.
  • Storage: When storing your guacamole bacon burgers, place each ingredient in its own airtight container. When ready to eat, reheat and assemble them one by one.
  • Reheat: To reheat your guacamole bacon burgers, reheat the meat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F for 7-10 minutes) or a skillet. Once warm, assemble the rest of your burger using the remaining ingredients.

What to Serve it With

Dozens of side dishes make a delicious pairing with this delicious avocado bacon burger recipe. Whether you want a crisp veggie or a zesty bean dip, this collection has you covered.

Expert Tips

If you want to make this guacamole bacon burger recipe as delicious as it is from the drive-thru, these foolproof tips are just what you need.

  • Put a thumbprint in the burger: This tip is one of Bobby Flay’s tricks to make the best burgers – When placed on the grill, beef patties tend to bulge in the center, leading to unevenly cooked meat. Though you may want to fix misshapen burgers by pressing down on them with a spatula, this solution can lead to dry, flavorless meat. For best results, then, I recommend creating an indentation in the center of your uncooked beef patties using your thumb or a small, flat-bottomed ramekin. As the beef expands, the dent will disappear, and you’ll have perfectly shaped guacamole burgers.
  • Use good bread: I think a lot of people overlook the importance of the bun when making a burger. To me, the bun you use is just as important as the meat. If you have the time, I highly recommend making a batch of my homemade brioche buns recipe. If not, head on over to your local bakery to pick up burger buns that actually taste good. 
  • Double the recipe: Need more burgers on the grill? You can easily double this guacamole burger recipe to feed a crowd.
  • Change it up: I know there is already quite a bit happening with this burger, but if you have the time I highly recommend making a batch of caramelized onions as a topping to take it to a whole other level.
  • Degree of doneness: I know a lot of people prefer a burger that is cooked either medium-rare or medium. However, I think it is important to mention that both CDC and USDA recommend consumers cook ground beef to 160 degrees F to kill E.coli germs rapidly.

FAQs

How many calories are in a bacon avocado cheeseburger?

The recipe for avocado burgers below is about 759 calories per serving.

Is an Avocado Bacon Burger good?

Yes! Juicy, flavorful, and hassle-free, avocado bacon burgers are the perfect dish to serve on the Fourth of July, Labor Day, game days, and even busy weeknights. You won’t believe how much savory, zesty flavor there is in every bite of this simple dish.

Other Ground Beef Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Avocado Bacon Barbecue Burger recipe or any other one of our beef dinner recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Avocado Bacon Burger from the front view
Print

Avocado Bacon Burger Recipe

If you love avocados and bacon, you must try this delicious Avocado Bacon Burger recipe. Simply put, it is made by layering beef burger patties with guacamole and turkey bacon in a buttery brioche burger bun. To me, this is a next-level burger with minimal effort.
Course Main Course
Cuisine American
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 20 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 759kcal

Ingredients

For The Burger:

  • 1 lb ground beef I used 85/15
  • ½ teaspoon Worcestershire sauce
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Vegetable oil olive or avocado oil would work to oil the grates
  • 4 slices of sliced cheddar cheese optional – American Cheese, Swiss Cheese or Pepper Jack Cheese would also work
  • 1 large tomato sliced
  • 4 burger buns I used my Brioche Buns
  • 4 lettuce leaves

For The Bacon

  • 8 slices turkey bacon (8oz) or regular bacon would also work

For The Guacamole

  • 1 clove garlic minced
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 ripe avocados

Instructions

  • Line a small sheet pan with parchment paper. Set it aside.
  • To make the burger patties: Place ground beef, Worcestershire sauce, garlic powder, paprika, salt, and black pepper in a large bowl. Mix until well combined. Divide it into 4 equal portions and flatten them into ¾-inch thick burger patties that are about 3 inches in diameter. Make a dent in the middle of each patty using a small flat-bottomed ramekin (please refer to how-to images for a visual).
  • Transfer patties onto the prepared baking sheet. Cover them with plastic wrap and freeze for 30 minutes.
  • To cook the bacon in the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Line turkey bacon slices on the wire rack (or on a parchment-lined baking sheet) making sure not to overlap. Bake in the preheated oven for 10 minutes. Remove from the oven, flip them and bake for another 5 minutes. Set them aside.
  • To make the guacamole: Mix together garlic, lime juice, and salt in a large bowl. Cut the avocados in half and scoop out the avocados and place them into the bowl. Using the back of a fork (or a potato masher) mash the avocados until it reaches to your desired level of chunkiness. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
  • To cook the burgers: Preheat a gas grill* to 400 degrees F. Dip a wad of paper towel into vegetable oil and then generously wipe the grates. Place beef patties on the grill and cook for 4-5 minutes. Flip the burgers and cook for another 4 minutes or until a thermometer inserted in the middle registers 125 degrees F for medium-rare, 130 degrees F for medium, and 155-160 degrees F for well done.
  • When they are done, move them from the direct heat and top each burger with a slice of cheese, if using. Let the residual heat melt the cheese for 45 seconds to a minute.
  • Transfer the burgers onto a plate, cover them with foil and let them rest for 5 minutes.
  • If preferred, while the burgers rest, lightly toast buns (off direct heat) on the grill, for a minute or two.
  • To assemble the burgers: Place the bottom bun on a plate. Line it with avocado, tomato slice, burger meat, bacon, and a lettuce leaf. Put the top bun on. Repeat with the rest of the burgers. Serve!

Notes

  • No grill, no problem: Alternatively, you can use a grill pan or a skillet to cook your burger patties on the stove top.
  • This recipe is written for four people, but you can multiply it as many times as you want.
  • Prefer pork bacon instead? Simply use regular bacon and if you need help, here is a great baked bacon recipe.
  • Put a thumbprint in the burger: This tip is one of Bobby Flay’s tricks to make the best burgers – When placed on the grill, beef patties tend to bulge in the center, leading to unevenly cooked meat. Though you may want to fix misshapen burgers by pressing down on them with a spatula, this solution can lead to dry, flavorless meat. For best results, then, I recommend creating an indentation in the center of your uncooked beef patties using your thumb or a small, flat-bottomed ramekin. As the beef expands, the dent will disappear, and you’ll have perfectly shaped guacamole burgers.
  • Storage: To store leftovers place each ingredient in its own airtight container. When ready to eat, reheat and assemble them one by one.
  • Reheat: To reheat your guacamole bacon burgers, reheat the meat in a low heat oven (300 degrees F for 7-10 minutes) or a skillet. Once warm, assemble the rest of your burger using the remaining ingredients.

Nutrition

Calories: 759kcal | Carbohydrates: 34g | Protein: 39g | Fat: 53g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 24g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 125mg | Sodium: 1937mg | Potassium: 1112mg | Fiber: 8g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 2374IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 233mg | Iron: 5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/guacamole-burgers/feed/ 9
Fresh Peach Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/#comments Fri, 24 Jun 2022 15:47:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=9726 Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or…]]>

Fan of Mexican-inspired condiments? Be sure to also try my Corn and Bean Salad, Easy Guacamole, Mango Pineapple Salsa, or pick your favorite from my collection of fun Mexican Party Food ideas.

Fresh peach salsa with tomatoes in a large bowl from the top view

Ingredients

With a few simple, fresh ingredients, you can enjoy this easy peach salsa recipe as an appetizer or a great topping year-round. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

To make this easy homemade fresh fruit salsa recipe gather your fresh peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeño pepper, red onion, fresh lime juice, salt, and black pepper. It is optional, but you can also add fresh cilantro and a little chili powder to finish it off.

Substitutions & Possible Additions

  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work for this Mexican peach salsa. When buying peaches, I recommend picking ones that are not overly ripe, as the ripe ones tend to be too juicy. You do want some of the juices, but it should be just enough to compliment the dressing instead of overpowering it.
  • Tomatoes: I used cherry tomatoes, but you can try Roma tomatoes or other heirloom varieties, such as San Marzano or Brandywine are also delicious.
  • Onions: Use white (such as Vidalia onions) or green onions as a substitute for red onions. 
  • Garlic Cloves: A clove of garlic finely minced can add a burst of flavor and can be added in the end.
  • Nuts & Seeds: Add in a handful of walnuts or pepitas for a bit of a crunch.

How To Make

This delicious homemade fresh peach salsa recipe comes together in 15 minutes and mixes the freshest ingredients for a mouthwatering addition to any meal. Here are the steps:

A collage of images showing how to make peach salsa
  1. Prep ingredients: Place fresh ripe peaches, cherry tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno pepper, and red onion in a large bowl.
  2. Add seasonings: Sprinkle with kosher salt and black pepper, and pour lime juice over the assembled ingredients. 
  3. Toss and garnish: Lightly mix ingredients together. If you choose, you can add chili powder and cilantro as your garnish.
  4. Serve: You can serve immediately. However, if you have the time, let your peach jalapeno salsa sit for 15 to 30 minutes to let the flavors to blend.

How To Store

If you didn’t finish this delicious peach salsa in one sitting (is that even possible?), you have options for preserving that fantastic flavor.

  • Storage: For the best results, you can store your homemade peach salsa in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing this salsa recipe.

What to Serve with Peach Salsa

This homemade salsa recipe is perfect when you want to add a Mexican flavor to chicken, pork, or fish recipes. But guess what? It is so versatile that you can pretty much use it anywhere you use regular tomato salsa, which is probably why some even call it, peach pico de gallo.

Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • With your favorite tortilla chips: A great appetizer! Chips and salsa, how can you go wrong?
  • Makes a great topping: Vegetable-filled Burrito Bowls or Baked Chicken Breasts smothered in this fruity and spicy peach salsa recipe. Need I say more?
  • Peach salsa for fish: This recipe is a great accompaniment for grilled fish like this  Grilled Mahi Mahi. It would also be delicious on Grilled Shrimp or  Breaded Fish
  • Tacos: Of course! Fresh salsa is terrific on tacos, and this salsa recipe with peaches pairs amazingly well with tacos, especially fish tacos. For an elevated taco experience, try it on; Brisket Tacos, Flank Steak Tacos, and a vegan-friendly Black Bean Quinoa Taco.

Variations

There are many ways to customize this peach and tomato salsa recipe to suit your tastebuds.

  • Turn up the heat: For a spicier peach salsa, leave the seeds in the jalapeno peppers. If you are a brave soul with an affinity for super spicy salsa, then swap jalapenos with habanero peppers.
  • Cool it down: If heat isn’t your thing, you can adjust your spice level. Use fewer hot peppers, or omit the hot peppers altogether for a mild fruity salsa still loaded with flavor.
  • Without tomatoes: If you’re not a fan of your peach salsa with tomatoes, you can simply leave them out. It will be sweeter but still delicious.
  • Cilantro: If peach cilantro salsa is not your thing, simply leave the cilantro out and make it without. It will be just as delicious.
peach salsa served on a tortilla chip from the front

Expert Tips

Here are a few foolproof tips that will ensure each bite is nothing short of sweet and juicy peach perfection.

  • Added Salt: If you are serving this fresh fruit salsa with tortilla chips, I recommend adjusting the amount of salt you use to prevent it from being overly salty.
  • Bite-Size: I suggest finely diced peaches (½-inch cubes) to achieve a better blend of flavors, but if you prefer a chunkier salsa, you can chop the pieces a little larger.
  • Marinate: If time permits, let it sit in the fridge for 15-20 minutes to allow the flavors to marinate and blend. 

FAQs

Can you freeze fresh peach salsa?

It is not recommended that you freeze fresh peach salsa. The freezing process will alter the texture and consistency of your salsa. For optimal flavor, you should eat this salsa with peaches and tomatoes fresh.

Can you can fresh peach salsa? 

Most canned peach salsa recipes are made by cooking peaches and tomatoes before preserving them in a jar. Since this recipe is made with fresh peaches and tomatoes, it would not be ideal for canning.

Other Delicious Peach Recipes You Might Like

Do you have an abundance of just-picked peaches? Need more ideas about what you can do with these sweet juicy gems? I have listed a few more recipes to satisfy your cravings during the peach season and all year round.

Person stirring a bowl of Fresh Peach and Walnut Salsa

If you try this Fresh Peach Salsa recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

peach salsa in a bowl from the top view
Print

Fresh Peach Salsa Recipe

This Fresh Peach Salsa recipe is made in 15 minutes with juicy peaches, tomatoes, jalapeno peppers, and red onion. Serve it as a condiment over grilled fish or chicken, fish tacos or by itself with tortilla chips on the side.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 81kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 peaches cut into small pieces (½ inch cubes) – approximately 2 cups – pick firm but ripe peaches
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 small red bell pepper seeded and chopped
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ red onion chopped
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ¼ cup lime juice
  • ½ cup chopped fresh cilantro optional
  • ¼ teaspoon chili powder optional

Instructions

  • Place peaches, tomatoes, red bell pepper, jalapeno, red onion, salt and pepper in a large bowl.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and give it a toss.
  • Garnish with cilantro and chili powder, if using.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Serve it with your favorite tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • This recipe yields approximately 3 cups of fresh peach salsa.
  • Peaches: Any peach varieties such as white peaches, yellow peaches, nectarines, or even grilled peaches would work in this recipe.
  • Storage: You can store the leftovers in an airtight container for up to 2 days in the fridge.

Nutrition

Calories: 81kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.05g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 318mg | Potassium: 325mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 15g | Vitamin A: 889IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/fresh-peach-walnut-salsa/feed/ 16